LIBRARY 

OF  THK 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 


Deceived 
Accessions  Noj~ru?  Class  No. 


and  Synonyraes.    (Just  published.) 

--  Caesar's  Commentaries  on  the  Gallic  War,  with 
Notes,  Dictionary,  Life  of  Caesar,  Map  of  Gaul,  Plans  of  Bat- 
tles, etc. 
--  Cicero's  Select  Orations,  with  Notes,  etc. 

Arnold's  First  and  Second  Latin  Book  and  Practical  Gram- 
mar.* Revised  and  corrected.  By  J.  A.  SPENCEK,  D.  D.  12mo. 
359  pages. 

---  Practical  Introduction  to  Latin  Prose  Composi- 
tion.* Revised  and  corrected.  By  J.  A.  SPENCER,  D.D.  12mo. 
356  pages. 

Cornelius  Nepos,*  with  Questions  and  Answers,  and  an  Imitative 
Exercise  on  each  Chapter.  With  Notes  by  E.  A.  JOHNSON,  Pro- 
fessor of  Latin  in  University  of  New  York.  New  edition,  en- 
larged, with  a  Lexicon,  Historical  and  Geographical  Index,  etc. 
12mo.  350  pages. 

Beza's  Latin  Version  of  the  New  Testament.  12mo.  291  pages. 

Caesar's  Commentaries  on  the  Gallic  War.  With  English 
Notes,  Critical  and  Explanatory  ;  a  Lexicon,  Geographical  and 
Historical  Indexes,  and  a  Map  of  Gaul.  By  J.  A.  SPENCER,  D.  D. 
12ino.  408  pages. 

Cicero's  Select  Orations.    With  Notes  for  the  use  of  Schools  and 

Colleges.    By  E.  A.  JOHNSON,  Professor  of  Latin  in  the  Univer- 

sity of  New  York.    12mo.    459  pages. 
Cicero  de  Officiis.    With  English  Notes,  mostly  translated  from 

Zump  and  Bonnell.   -By  THOMAS  A.  THACHEB,  of  Yale  College. 

12mo.    194  pages. 


STANDARD  CLASSICAL  WORKS. 


Horace,  The  Works  of.  With  English  Notes,  for  the  use  of 
Schools  and  Colleges.  By  J.  L.  LINCOLN,  Professor  of  Latin 
Language  and  Literature  in  Brown  University.  12mo.  575  pages. 

Livy.  Selections  from  the  first  five  books,  together  with  the  twen- 
ty-first and  twenty-second  books  entire.  With  a  Plan  of  Rome, 
and  a  Map  of  the  Passage  of  Hannibal,  and  English  Notes  for 
the  use  of  Schools.  By  J.  L.  LINCOLN,  Prof,  of  the  Latin  Lan- 
guage and  Literature  in  Brown  University.  12mo.  329  pages. 

Quintus  Curtius:  Life  and  Exploits  of  Alexander  the  Great. 
Edited  and  illustrated  with  English  Notes,  by  WILLIAM  HENRY 
CROSBY.  12mo.  385  pages. 

Sallust's  Jugurtha  and  Catilina,  With  Notes  and  a  Vocabu- 
lary. By  BUTLER  and  STURGUS.  12mo.  397  pages. 

It  is  believed  that  this  will  be  found  superior  to  any  edition 
heretofore  published  in  this  country. 

The  Histories  of  Tacitus.  With  Notes  for  Colleges.  By  W.  S. 
TYLER,  Professor  of  Latin  and  Greek  in  Amherst  College. 
12mo.  453  pages. 

Tacitus's  Germania  and  Agricola.  With  Notes  for  Colleges. 
By  W.  S.  TYLER.  12mo.  193  pages. 

Virgil's  JEneid.*    With  Explanatory  Notes.    By  HENRY  FRIEZE, 
Professor  of  Latin  in  the  State  University  of  Michigan.    (Re- 
cently published.)    12mo.    598  pages. 
The  tjqse  is  unusually  large  and  distinct.    The  work  contains 

eighty-five  engravings,  which  delineate  the  usages,  customs,  weap- 
ons, arts,  and  mythology  of  the  ancients,  with  a  vividness  that  can 

be  attained  only  by  pictorial  illustrations. ' 


GREEK  TEXT-BOOKS. 

A  First  Greek  Book*  and  Introductory  Reader,  By  A. 
HARKNESS,  Ph.D.,  author  of  "Arnold's  First  Latin  Book." 
t;  Second  Latin  Book,"  etc.  (Recently  published.)  12mo. 


Acts  of  the  Apostles,  according  to  the  text  of  AUGUSTUS  HAHN. 
With  Notes  and  a  Lexicon  by  JOHN  J.  OWEN,  D.  D.,  LL.  D. 
With  Map.  12mo. 

Arnold's  First  Greek  Book,*  on  the  Plan  of  the  First  Latin 
Book.  12mo.  297  pages. 

Arnold's  Practical  Introduction  to  Greek  Prose  Composi- 
tion.* 12rno.  297  pages. 

1 Second  Part  to  the  above.*    I2mo.    248  pages. 

|3^~  SEE  END  OP  THIS  VOLUME. 


AN 


INTRODUCTORY 

LATIN     BOOK, 


INTENDED   AS   AN 


ELEMENTARY  DRILL -BOOK, 


INFLECTIONS  AND   PRINCIPLES  OF   THE  LANGUAGE, 


AND   AS  AN 


I N  T  H  0  D  U  C  T 1 0 


AUTHOR'S  GRAMMAR,  READER  AND  LATIN  COMPOSITION. 


BY 

ALBERT    HARKNESS, 

_  Professor  in  Broivn  University. 

AUTHOR   OP    "A   LAT1X   GRAMMAR,"    UA   LATIN   READER,"   "A  FIRST   GREEK  BOOK,"   KTO. 


3IT7 


YORK : 
D.    APPLETON    AND    COMPANY, 

549    &    551    BROADWAY. 
1876, 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  I860,  by 

ALBERT   HARKNESS, 
In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Rhode  Island. 


PR 


E  P  A  C  E. 


THE  volume  now  offered  to  the  public  is  intended  to 
furnish  the  pupil  his  first  lessons  in  Latin.  As  an  Ele- 
mentary Drill-book,  it  aims  to  supply  a  want  long  felt  in 
our  schools.  In  no  stage  of  a  course  of  classical  study  is 
judicious  instruction  of  more  vital  importance  than  in  that 
which  deals  with  the  forms  and  elements  of  the  Latin  lan- 
guage. To  the  beginner,  every  thing  is  new,  and  requires 
minute  and  careful  illustration. »  lie  must  at  the  very  out- 
set become  so  familiar  with  all  the  grammatical  inflections, 
with  their  exact  form  and  force,  that  he  will  recognize 
them  with  promptness  and  certainty  wherever  they  occur, 
lie  must  not  lose  time  in  uncertain  conjecture,  where  posi- 
tive knowledge  alone  will  be  of  any  real  value.  Improve- 
ment on  this  point  is  one  of  the  pressing  needs  of  our 
schools.  This  volume  is  intended  as  a  contribution  to 
classical  education  in  aid  of  this  particular  work.  It  aims 
to  lighten  the  burden  of  the  teacher  in  elementary  drill, 
and  to  aid  him  in  grounding  his  pupils  in  the  first  ele- 
ments of  the  Latin  language. 

It  is  the  unmistakable  verdict  of  the  class-room,  that 
theory  and  practice  must  not  be  separated  in  the  study  of 
language.  The  true  method  of  instruction  will  make  am- 
ple provision  for  both.  On  the  one  hand,  the  pupil  must, 
by  a  vigorous  use  of  the  memory,  become  master  of  all  the 
grammatical  forms  and  rules ;  while,  on  the  other  hand,  he 
must  not  be  denied  the  luxury  of  using  the  knowledge 
which  he  is  so  laboriously  acquiring. 

To  this  just  and  urgent  demand  of  the  class-room,  the 

iii 


IV  PREFACE. 

author's  First  Latin  Book,  published  fifteen  years  since,  on 
the  basis  of  Dr.  Arnold's  works,  owed  its  origin.  For  the 
favor  with  which  it  was  .received,  and  for  the  generous 
interest  with  which  it  has  so  long  been  regarded,  the  author 
desires  here  to  express  his  sincere  thanks  to  the  numerous 
classical  instructors  whose  fidelity  in  its  use  has  contrib- 
uted so  largely  to  its  success.  In  the  conviction,  however, 
that  it  has  now  done  its  appointed  work,  he  begs  leave  to 
offer  them  the  present  volume  as  its  successor. 

The  great  objection  to  most  First  Latin  Books,  that, 
however  excellent  they  may  be  in  themselves,  they  are  not 
especially  adapted  to  any  particular  Grammar,  and  that 
they  accordingly  fill  the  memory  of  the  pupil  with  rules 
and  statements  which  must,  as  far  as  possible,  be  unlearned 
as  soon  as  he  passes  to  his  Grammar,  is  entirely  obviated 
in  this  volume.  All  the  grammatical  portions  of  it,  even 
to  the  numbering  of  the  articles,  arc  introduced  in  the 
exact  form  and  language  of  the  author's  Grammar.  In- 
deed, the  paradigms  are  not  only  the  same  as  in  the  Gram- 
mar, but  also  occupy  the  same  place  on  the  page ;  so  that 
even  the  local  associations  which  the  beginner  so  readily 
forms  with  the  pages  of  his  first  book  may  be  transferred 
directly  to  the  Grammar. 

This  work  is  intended  to  be  complete  in  itself.  It  com- 
prises a  distinct  outline  of  Latin  Grammar,  Exercises  for 
Double  Translation,  Suggestions  to  the  Learner,  Notes  and 
Vocabularies.  As  an  Introduction  to  the  author's  Gram- 
mar, Reader  and  Latin  Composition,  it  discusses  and  illus- 
trates precisely  those  points  which  are  deemed  most  essen- 
tial as  a  preparation  for  the  course  of  study  presented  in 
those  works. 

PROVIDENCE,  R.I.,  June,  1866. 


TJIIVBRSITY 


CONTENTS. 


PART     FIRST. 

OKTHOGKAPHY. 

Page. 

Alphabet 1 

Sounds  of  Letters 2 

Exercise  I 3 

"II 4 

III 5 

Syllables G 

Quantity 6 

Accentuation 7 

Exercise  IV.         ., 7 

PART     SECOND. 

ETYMOLOGY. 
CHAPTER    I. 

NOUNS. 

Gender  ..........  8 

Person  and  Number 9 

Cases 9 

Declensions 10 

First  Declension  . 11 

Exercise  Y 11 

Second  Declension  .  .  .  . 13 

Exercise  VI. .  .  .  14 

VII. 16 

Third  Declension .17 

Exercise  VIII 23 

"IX 25 

Fourth  Declension '  .  .26 

Exercise  X .  .  *.  .  27 

v 


VI  CONTENTS. 

Page. 

Fifth  Declension 28 

Exercise  XI. .        .        .29 

CHAPTER    H. 

ADJECTIVES. 

First  and  Second  Declensions 30 

Exercise  XII 33 

Third  Declension 35 

Exercise  XIII 37 

Comparison  of  Adjectives  .  .  .  .  .  .  .38 

Exercise  XI Y 39 

Numeral  Adjectives 40 

Exercise  XV 42 

CHAPTER    HI. 

PRONOUNS. 

Personal  Pronouns .43 

Possessive .44 

Demonstrative 44 

Relative 45 

Interrogative    .         .         . 46 

Indefinite 46 

Exercise  XYI 47 

CHAPTER    IY. 

VERBS. 

Yoiccs  .  .  . 48 

Moods 49 

Tenses 50 

Numbers  ' 50 

Persons 51 

Conjugation 51 

The  Yerb  Sum 52 

Exercise  XYII 56 

XVIII. 57 

XIX 60 

First  Conjugation  .  .  . 62 

Exercise  XX 6' 


CONTENTS.  Vii 

Tage. 

Exercise  XXI G7 

"         XXII.     .         .         . 69 

XXIII.  .         . 71 

XXIV 73 

XXV.     . .74 

XXVI 75 

XXVII 76 

Second  Conjugation         . 78 

Exercise  XXVIII.         . 82 

XXIX. 83 

XXX 84 

XXXI 85 

•       "        XXXII. 86 

XXXIII .87 

XXXIV 88 

Third  Conjugation .90 

Exercise  XXXV 94 

XXXVI 95 

XXXVII 96 

XXXVIII .97 

XXXIX .         .97 

"        XL 98 

XLI 99 

Fourth  Conjugation         .         . .100 

Exercise  XLII 104 

XLIII 104 

XLIV .105 

XLV 106 

XLVI.   .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .107 

XLVII 107 

XLVIII 108 

Verbs  in  10 110 

Exercise  XLIX.  *.        .112 


PART     THIRD. 

SYKTTAX. 
CHAPTER*!. 

SYNTAX   OF    SENTENCES. 

Section. 

I.     Classification  of  Sentences 114 

II.     Simple  Sentences 115 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER    II. 

SYNTAX    OP   NOUNS. 

Section.  Page. 

I.    Agreement  of  Nouns 117 

Exercise  L. 117 

LI 119 

II.    Nominative. 120 

Exercise  LII. 120 

III.  Vocative 121 

Exercise  LIII .121 

IV.  Accusative 122 

Exercise  LI  V 123 

"        LV .  124 

"        LVI 125 

V.    Dative 126 

Exercise  LVII 127 

"        LVIII 129 

VI.     Genitive '  .        .        .        .  130 

Exercise  LIX 131 

"        LX 132 

VII.    Ablative 133 

Exercise  LXI 135 

"        LXII 137 

LXIII.     .  138 

LXIV. 140 

VIII.     Cases  with  Prepositions 141 

Exercise  LXV 142 

Suggestions  to  the  Learner 143 

Latin-English  Vocabulary       .         . 147 

English-Latin  Vocabulary .        .157 


EXPLANATION  OF  REFERENCES  AND  ABBREVIATIONS. 


THE  numerals  refer  to  articles  in  this  work, 


The  following  abbreviations  occur: 


abl ablative. 

ace accusative. 

act active. 

julv adverb. 

conj conjunction. 

dat dative. 

f. .  feminine. 

gen genitive. 

indef. indefinite. 

interrog interrogative. 

m ,  masculine. 


n neuter. 

nom nominatire. 

P page. 

part particle. 

pass passive. 

pers person. 

plur.,  or  pi.     .     .     .  plural. 

prep preposition. 

rel relative. 

sing singular. 

voc.  ......  vocative. 

ix 


. 

(TJII7HBSITY 


INTEODUCTORY  LATIN  BOOK. 


1.  LATIN  GRAMMAR  treats  of  the  principles  of  the  Latin 
language. 

PART  FIRST. 
ORTHOGRAPHY.1 


ALPHABET. 

2.  THE  Latin  alphabet  is  the  same  as  the  English,  with 
the  omission  of  iv. 

3.  Classes  of  Letters.  —  Letters  are   divided   into   two 

classes : 

I.   Vowels a,  e,  i,-o,  u,  y. 

II.   Consonants:  — 

1.  Liquids 1,  m,  n,  r. 

2.  Spirants h,  s. 

3.  Mutes :  1)  Labials p,  b,  f,  v. 

2)  Palatals       .         .         .         .        c,  g,  k,  q,  j. 

3)  Linguals          .         .         .         .     t,  d. 

4.  Double  Consonants       .        .        .        .        x,  z. 

4.  Combinations  of  Letters. — We  notice  here, 

1.  Diphthongs,  —  combinations  of  two  vowels  in   one  syllable. 
The  most  common  are  ae,  oe,  au. 

2.  Double  Consonants,  —  x  =  cs  or  gs  ;  z  =  ds  or  ts. 

3.  C%,  phj  th,  are  best  treated,  not  as  combinations  of  letters, 
but  only  as  aspirated  forms  of  c,  />,  and  /,  as  li  is  only  a  breathing. 

1  Orthography  treats  of  the  letters  and  sounds  of  the  language. 


2  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN  BOOK. 

SOUNDS   OF  LETTERS. 

5.  Scholars  in  different  countries  generally  pronounce 
Latin  substantially  as  they  do  their  own  languages.    In 
this  country,  however,  two   distinct  systems   are  recog- 
nized, generally  known  as  the  English  and  the  Continent- 
al Method^    For  the  convenience  of  the  instructor,  w* 
add  a  brief  outline  of  each. 

I.    ENGLISH    METHOD. 

1.  /Sounds  of  Vowels. 

6.  Vowels  generally  have   their  long  or  short  English 
sounds. 

7.  Long  Sound.  — Vowels  have  their  long  English  sounds 
— a  as  in  fate,  e  in  mete,  i  in  pine,  o  in  note,  it  in  tube,  y 
in  type — in  the  following  situations: 

1.  In  final  syllables  ending  in  a  vowel:2  se,  si,  serf-vi, 
serf-vo,  corf-nu,  mV-sy. 

2.  In  all  syllables  before  a  vowel  or  diphthong :  dd-us, 
de~o*-rum,  def-ae,  di-ef-i,  nif-hi-hcm? 

3.  In.  penultimate4  and  unaccented  syllables,  not  final, 
before  a  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r:  pa'-ter, 
paf-tres,  Af-thos,  0J-thrys,  do-lof-ris.    But 

1)  A  unaccented  has  the  sound  of  a  final  in  America :  men'-sa. 

8.  Short  Sound.  —  Vowels  have  the  short  English  sound 
—  a  as  in  fat,  e  in  met,  i  in  pin,  o  in  not,  u  in  tub,  y  in 
myth  —  in  the  following  situations: 

1  Strictly  speaking,  there  is  no  Continental  Method,  as  every  nation 
on  the  continent  of  Europe  has  its  own  method. 

2  Some  give  to  i  in  both  syllables  of  tibi  and  sibi  the  short  sound. 

3  In  these  rules,  no  account  is  taken  of  h,  as  that  is  only  a  breathing  : 
hence  the  first  i  in  nihilum  is  treated  as  a  vowel  before  another  vowel : 
for  the  same  reason,  ch,  ph}  and  th  are  treated  as  single  mutes ;   thus  th 
in  Athos  and  Otkrys. 

4  Penultimate,  the  last  syllabic  but  one. 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  -  SOUNDS  OF  LETTERS.         3 

1.  Iii  final  syllables  ending  in  a  consonant  :  a'  -mat,  a'- 
met,  rex'  -it,  sol,  cori-sid,  Te'-thys  /  except  post,  cs  final,  and 
os  final  in  plural  cases  :  res,  di'-es,  hos,  a'-gros. 

2.  In  all  syllables  before  x,  or  any  two  consonants  except 
a  mute  with  I  or  r  (7,  3)  :  rex'-it,  bel'-lum,  rex-ef-runt,  bel- 
lo'-rum. 

3.  In  all  accented  syllables  before  one  or  more  consonants, 
except  the  penultimate  :  dom'-i-nus,  pat'-ri-bus.    But 

1)  A,  e,  or  o,  before  a  single  consonant  (or  a  mute  with  I  or  r) 
followed  by  e,  2,  or  ?/,  before  another  vowel,  has  the  long  sound: 
a'-ci-es,  a'-cri-a,  me-re-o,  do'-ce-o. 

2)  £7,  in  any  syllable  not  final,  before  a  single  consonant,  or  a 
mute  with  I  or  r,  except  iW,  has  the  long  sound  :  Pu'-ni-cus, 
Iri-tas. 

2.  Sounds  of  Diphthongs. 

9.  Ae  and  oe  are  pronounced  like  e  : 

1)  long:   Caef-sar  (Ce'-sar),  Oer-ta  (E'-ta). 

2)  short:  Daedf-a~lus  (Ded'-a-lus),  Oedf-i-pus. 
Au  as  in  author  :  aur-rum. 

Eu   .    .    neuter:  neu'-ter* 


EXERCISE  I. 

Give  the  sounds  of  the   Vowels  and  Diphthongs  in  thA 
following  icords. 

1.  Men^-sam,2  men^-sas,  men!-sis,  men'-sae,3  men-sa'-rum.4 
2.  Ho'-ram,5  ho'-ras,  ho'-ris,  hof-rae,6  ho-raf-rum.7  p.  Schof- 
la,8  scho;-lam,  scho^-las,  scho(-lis,  scho^-lae,  scho-la'-rum. 
4.  Co-ro'-na,8  co-ro^-nam,  co-rof-nas,  co-ro'-nis,  co-ro'-nae.9 

1  Ei  and  oi  are  seldom  diphthongs;  but,  when  so  used,  they  have 
the  long  sound  of  i:  hei,  cut. 

2  8,  2;  8,  1.        *7,  3;  8,  1.      8  7,  3  ;  7,3,  1). 

3  8,  2;  9;  7,  1.     6  7,  3;  9;  7,  1.    9  7,  3  ;  9  ;  7,  L 

4  8,  2;  7,  3;  8,  1.    7  7,  3;  8,  1. 


*  INTEODTJCTOKY   LATIN  BOOK. 

3.  Sounds  of  Consonants. 

10.  The   consonants   are   pronounced  in  general  as  in 
English;   but  a  few  directions  may  aid  the  learner. 

11.  C,  G,  S,  T,  and  X  are   generally   pronounced   with 
their  ordinary  English  sounds.     Thus, 

1.  C  and  g  are  soft  (like  s  and  j)  before  <?,  i,  y,  ae,  and  oe;  and 
hard  in   other  situations:   ce'-do    (sedo),   ci'-vis,    Cy'-rus,   cae'-do, 
coef-na,  a'-ge  (a-je),  a'-gi;   ca'-do  (ka'do),  co'-go,  cum,  Ga-des. 

2.  S  generally  has  its  regular  English  sound  as  in  son,  thus : 
sa'-cer,  so'-ror,  si'-dus.     But 

1)  S  final  after  <?,  ae,  au,  &,  ?M,  71,  r,  is  pronounced  like  z:  spes, 
praes,  laus,  urbs,  hi' -ems,  mons,  pars. 

3.  T  has  its  regular  English  sound  as  in  time  :  ti'-mor,  to'-tus. 

4.  X  has   generally  its   regular   English   sound   like  Jcs:   rex'-i 
(rek'-si),  ux'-or  (uk'-sor). 

12.  C,  S,  T,  and  X  —  Aspirated.  —  Before  i,  preceded  by 
an  accented  syllable  and  followed  by  a  vowel,  c,  5,  £,  and 
x  are  aspirated,  —  c,  ,9,  and  t  taking  the  sound  of  sh,  x  that 
of  Jcsh:  sor-ci-us  (so'-she-us),  Al '-si-urn  (Al'-she-um),  arr-ti- 
um  (a^-she-um) ;  anx'-i-us  (ank^she-us).     C  has  also  the 
sound  of  sh  before  eu  and  T/O,  preceded  by  an  accented  syl- 
lable: ca-du'-ce-us  (ca-du'-she-us),  Sicr-y-on  (Sisl/-e-on). 

13.  Silent  Consonants.  —  An   initial   consonant,  with  or 
without  the  aspirate  /?,  is  sometimes  silent :   Cne'-us  (NV- 
us). 

EXERCISE  II. 

Give  the  sounds  of  ihe+Letters  in  the  following  words. 

1.  Ci'-vis,1  civ'-i-um,  civ'-i-bus.  2.  Carf-men,2  carr-mi- 
nis,  car'-mi-ne.3  3.  Rex,4  re'-gis,5  ref-gi,  re'-gnm.5'  4.  Ca'- 
put,6  capr-i-tis,  cap'-i-tum.  5.  A'-ci-em,7  a'-ci-e,  ar-ci-es.8 
6.  Ars,8  ar'-tis,  ar'-tes,8  ar'-ti-um.9 


Ml,  1  and  2;  7,  3;  8,  1. 

Ml,  1,  and  3. 

2  11,  1  ;  8,  2  ;  8,  1. 

7  8,  3,  1);  12; 

8,  1. 

3  8,3;  7,3;  7,1. 

Ml,  2,  1). 

4  11,  4. 

M2. 

Ml,  l;  7,  3;  8,  1. 

ORTHOGRAPHY.  -  SOUNDS  OF  LETTERS.        5 

II.     CONTINENTAL    METHOD.1 

1.  Sounds  of  Vowels. 

14.  Each  vowel  has  in  the  main  one  uniform  sound;2 
but  the  length  or  duration  of  the  sound  depends  upon  the 
quantity  of  the  vowel.     See  20. 
The  vowel-sounds  are  as  follows  : 

a  like  a  in  father  :  e.g.,  a'-ra. 
e    "    a      made  :     " 
i    "     e      me:         " 


o    "     6       no  :  "     o'-ro. 

u   "     6       do  :  "     u'-num. 

y    "     e       me;          "    Ny'-sa. 

2.  Sounds  of  Diphthongs. 

15.  Ae  and  oe  like  a    in  made  :  e.g.,  ae'-tas,  coe'-lum. 
au  "     ou  "  out:         "     au'-rum? 

3.  Sounds  of  Consonants. 

16.  The  pronunciation  of  the  consonants  is  similar  to 
that  of  the  English  method  ;  but  it  varies  somewhat  in  dif- 
ferent countries. 

EXERCISE  III. 

Give  the  sounds  of  the  Letters  in  the  following  words, 

according  to  the  Continental  Method. 
1.   Ho'-ra,   ho'-ram,   ho'-ras,   ho'-rls,   ho'-rae,   ho-ra'-rum. 
2.  Glo'-ri-S,  glo'-ri-am,  glo'-ri-ae.     3.  Do'-num,   do'-ni,  do'- 

1  If  the  English  Method  is  adopted  as  the  standard  in  the  school,  this 
outline  of  the  Continental  Method  should  be  omitted. 

2  These  sounds  sometimes  undergo  slight  modifications  in  uniting 
with  the  various  consonants. 

3  In  other  combinations,  the  two  vowels   aro  generally  pronounced 
separately;  but  ei  and  eu  occur  as  diphthongs,  with  nearly  the  same 
sound  as  in  English. 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN  BOOK. 

DO,  do'-na,  do-no'-rum,  do'-nis.     4.    Cl'-vis,   ci'-vl,   ci'-vem, 
cl'-ves,  civ'-i-iim,  civ'-i-bus. 

SYLLABLES. 

17.  In  the  pronunciation  of  Latin,  every  word  has  as 
many  syllables  as  it  has  vowels  and  diphthongs;  thus  the 
Latin  words  more,  vice,  acute,  and  persuade  are  pro- 
nounced, not  as  the  same  words  are  in  English,  but  with 
their  vowel-sounds  all  heard  in  separate  syllables;  thus: 
mo' -re,  vi'~ce,  a-cu'-te,  per-sua'-de. 

QUANTITY. 

20.  Syllables  are,   in  quantity  or  length,   either   long, 
short,  or  common.1 

21.  Long.  —  A  syllable  is  long  in  quantity, 

1.  If  it  contains  a  diphthong:  haec. 

2.  If  its  vowel  is  followed  by  J,  x,  z,  or  any  two  conso- 
nants, except  a  mute  with  I  or  r :  rex,  mons. 

22.  Short.  —  A  syllable  is  short  if  its  vowel  is  followed 
by  another  vowel  or  a  diphthong :  dir-es,  vi'-ae,  ni'-hil? 

23.  Common,  —  A  syllable  is  common,  if  its  vowel,  natu- 
rally 3  short,  is  followed  by  a  mute  with  I  or  r :  a'-gri. 

24.  The  signs  ",  w,  *,  denote  respectively  that  the  syllables  over 
which  they  are  placed  are  long,  short,  or  common :  si-grd-rum.* 

1  Common ;  i.e.,  sometimes  long,  and  sometimes  short. 

2  No  account  is  taken  of  the  breathing  h.     See  7,  2,  note  3. 

3  A  vowel  is  said  to  be  naturally  short  when  it  is  short  in  its  own 
nature;  i.e.,  in  itself,  without  reference  to  its  position. 

4  By  referring  to  14,  it  will  be  seen,  that,  in  the  Continental  Method, 
quantity  and  sound  coincide  with  each  other :  a  vowel  long  in  quantity  is 
long  in  sound,  and  a  vowel  short  in  quantity  is  short  in  sound.    But, 
by  referring  to  7  and  8,  it  will  be  seen,  that,  in  the  English  Method,  the 
quantity  of  a  vowel  does  not  at  all  affect  its  sound,  except  in  determin- 
ing the  accent  (26).     Hence,  in  this  method,  a  vowel  long  in  quantity  is 
often  short  in  sound,  and  a  vowel  short  in  quantity  is  often  long  in 
sound.     Thus,  in  rex,  urbs,  drs,  sol,  the  vowels  are  all  long  in  quantity; 


OKTHOGKAPHY.  —  ACCENTUATION.  7 

ACCENTUATION. 

I.  PKIMAKY  ACCENT. 

25.  Monosyllables   are   treated   as   accented    syllables: 
mons,  nos. 

26.  Other  words  are  accented  as  follows : l 

1.  Words  of  two  syllables  —  always  on  the  first :  menf-sa. 

2.  Words  of  more  than  two  syllables  —  on  the  penult s 
if  that  is  long  in  quantity,  otherwise  on  the  antepenult : 2 
ho-nb'-ris,  con'-su-tis. 

II.  SECONDARY  ACCENTS. 

27.  A  second  accent  is  placed  on  the  second  or  third  syllable 
before  the  primary  accent,  —  on  the  second,  if  that  is  the  first  syl- 
lable of  the  word,  or  is  long  in  quantity ;  otherwise  on  the  third  : 
mon'-u-e'-runt)  mon'-u-e-ra'-mus^  in-stau'-ra-ve'-runt. 

28.  In  the  same  way,  a  third  accent  is  placed  on  the  second  or 
third  syllable  before  the  second  accent :  honf-o-riff-i-cen-tis'-si~mus. 

EXEKCISE    IV. 

Accent  and  pronounce  the  following  Words. 
1.  Corona,3  coronae,  coronarum.4    2.  Gemmae,5  gemmain, 
gemmarum.      3.   Sapientiae,6  amlcitiae,  justitiae,   gloriae.7 

but  by  8,  1,  they  all  have  the  short  English  sounds :  while  in  ave,  mare, 
the  vowels  are  all  short  in  quantity;  but  by  7,  1,  and  3,  they  all  have 
the  long  English  sounds.  Hence,  in  pronouncing  according  to  the 
English  Method,  determine  the  place  of  the  accent  by  the  quantity  (ac- 
cording to  26),  and  then  determine  the  sounds  of  the  letters  irrespective 
of  quantity  (according  to  7-12). 

1  In  the  subsequent  pages,  the  pupil  will  be  expected  to  accent  words 
in  pronunciation  according  to  these  rules.     The  quantity  of  the  penult 
in  words  of  more  than  two  syllables  will  therefore  be  marked  (unless 
determined  by  21  and  22),  to  enable  him  to  ascertain  the  place  of  the 
accent. 

2  Penult,  last  syllable  but  one  ;  antepenult,  the  last  but  two. 

8  26,  2;   7,3,  1).  5 11,  1;  26,  1.  7  11,  1 ;  8,3,  1). 

426,  2;  27.  6  27  ;  8,3,  1);  12. 


8  INTEODUCTOEY   LATI^    BOOK. 

4.  Sapientiam,  amicitiam,  justitiam,  gloriam.    5.  Sapientia, 
amicitia,  justitia,  gloria. 


PART  SECOND. 
ETYMOLOGY. 


29.  ETYMOLOGY   treats   of  the  classification,  inflection, 
and  derivation  of  words. 

30.  The   Parts   of    Speech l   are  —  Nouns,  Adjectives, 
Pronouns,    Verbs,  Adverbs,   Prepositions,    Conjunctions, 
and  Interjections. 


CHAPTER    I. 
ffOUNS. 

31.  A  Noun,  or  Substantive,  is  a  name,  as  of  a  person, 
place,  or  thing :   Cicero,  Cicero ;  Roma,  Rome ;  puer,  boy ; 
domus,  house. 

1.  A  Proper  Noun  is   a  proper  name,  as  of  a  person  or  place : 
Cicero,  Roma. 

2.  A  Common  Noun  is  a  name  common  to  all  the  members  of  a 
class  of  objects :  rzr,  man ;  equus,  horse. 

32.  Nouns  have  Gender,  Number,  Person,  and  Case. 

• 

GENDER. 

33.  There  are  three  genders,2  —  Masculine,  Feminine, 
and  Neuter. 

1  Thus  in  Latin,  as  in  English,  words  arc  divided,  according  to  their 
use,  into  eight  classes,  called  Parts  of  Speech. 

2  In  English,  Gender  denotes  sex.     Accordingly,  masculine  nouns  de- 
note males,-  feminine  nouns,  females;   and  neuter  nouns,  objects  which 
are  neither  male  nor  female.    In  Latin,  however,  this  natural  distinction 


ETYMOLOGY .  —  NOUNS.  9 

34.  In  some  nouns,  gender  is  determined  by  significa- 
tion ;  in  others,  by  endings. 

35.  GENERAL  RULES  FOR  GENDBR. 
I.    MASCULINES. 

1.  Names  of  Males:  Cicero ;  vir,  man;  rex,  king. 

2.  Names   of  River 's,    Winds,   and   Months :    Rlienus, 
Rhine ;  Notus,  south  wind ;  Aprilis,  April. 

II.     FEMININE. 

1.  Names  of  Females:  mutter,  woman;  leaena,  lioness. 

2.  Names   of   Countries,    Towns,   Islands,   and    Trees: 
Aegyptus,  Egypt;    Roma,   Rome;    Delos,  Delos;  pirus, 
pear-tree. 

PERSON  AND  NUMBER. 

37.  The  Latin,  like  the  English,  has  three  persons  and 
two  numbers.     The  first  person  denotes  the  speaker ;  the 
second,  the  person  spoken  to ;  the  third,  the  person  spoken 
of.     The  singular  number  denotes   one,  the   plural  more 
than  one. 

CASES. 

38.  The  Latin  has  six  cases :  * 

Names.  English  Equivalents. 

Nominative,  Nominative. 

Genitive,  Possessive,  or  Objective  with  of. 

Dative,  Objective  with  to  or  for. 

Accusative,  Objective. 

Vocative,  Nominative  Independent. 

Ablative,  Objective  with  from,  by,  in,  with. 

of  gander  is  applied  only  to  the  names  of  males  and  females ;  while,  in 
all  other  nouns,  gender  depends  upon  an  artificial  distinction,  according 
to  grammatical  rules. 

1  The  case  of  a  noun  shows  the  relation  which  that  noun  sustains  to 
other  words ;  as,  John's  book.  Here  the  possessive  case  (John's)  shows 
that  John  sustains  to  the  book  the  relation  of  possessor. 


10  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

1.  Oblique  Cases.  —  In  distinction  from  the  Nominative  and  Voc- 
ative (casus  recti,  right  cases),  the  other  cases  are  called  oblique 
(casus  obliqui). 

2.  Case-Endings.  —  In  form,  the  several  cases  are,  in  general,  dis- 
tinguished from  each  other  by  certain  terminations  called  case- 
endings  :  Nona,  mensa,  Gen.  mensae,  &c. 

3.  Cases  alike.  —  But  certain  cases  are  not  distinguished  in  form. 
Thus, 

1)  The  Nominative,  Accusative,  and  Vocative,  in  neuters,  are  alike, 
and  in  the  plural  end  in  a. 

2)  The  Nominative  and  Vocative  are  alike  in  all  nouns,  except 
those  in  us  of  the  second  declension  (45). 

3)  The  Dative  and  Ablative  Plural  are  alike. 

DECLENSIONS. 

39.  The  formation  of  the  several  cases  is  called  Declen- 
sion. 

40.  Five  Declensions.  —  In  Latin,  there  are  five  declen- 
sions, distinguished  from  each  other  by  the  following 

Genitive  Endings. 

Dec.  I.       Dec.  II.       Dec.  III.       Dec.  IV.       Dec.  V. 

ae,          I,  is,          us,         el.1 

41.  Stem  and  Endings.  —  In  any  noun,  of  whatever  de- 
clension, 

1.  The  stem2  may  be  found  by  dropping  the  ending  of 
the  genitive  singular. 

2.  The  several  cases  may  be  formed  by  adding  to  this 
stem  the  case-endings. 

1  See  119,  l. 

2  The  stem  is  the  basis  of  the  word,  or  the  part  to  which  the  several 
endings  are  added  to  form  the  various  cases.     Thus  in  the  forms,  mensa, 
mensae,  mensdm,  mensis,  &c.,  given  under  42,  it  will  be  observed  that 
mens  remains  unchanged;  and  that,  by  the  addition  of  the  endings,  a, 
ae,  am,  is,  &c.,  to  it,  the  several  cases  are  formed.    Here  mcns  is  the 
stem;  and  a,  ae,  am,  is,  £c.,  are  the  case-endings. 


ETYMOLOGY. FIEST   DECLENSION".  11 

FIRST   DECLENSION. 

42.  Nouns  of  the  first  declension  end  in 

S.  and  e,  — feminine  ;  as  and  es,  —  masculine.1 
But  pure  Latin  nouns  end  only  in  a,  and  are  declined 
ns  follows  : 

SIXGULAK. 

Norn,  mensa,  a  table,  a 

Gen.    mensae,  of  a  table,  ae 

Dat.    mensae,  to,  for,  a  table,  ae 

Ace.    mensem,  a  table,  fim 

Foe.    mensa,  0  table,  it 

-4W.     mensa,  with,  from,  by,  a  table,  ii 

PLURAL. 

Norn,  mensac,  tables,  ae 

G^en.    mensarikm,  of  tables,  arttm 

Z)a^.    mensls,  to,  for,  tables,  is 

-4cc.    mensas,  tables,  as 

T'bc.    mensac,  0  ta&Zes,  ac 

-4W      mensis,  ivith,from,  by,  tables,  is. 

1.  Case-Endings From  an  inspection  of  this  example,  it  will  be 

seen  that  the  several  cases  are  distinguished  from  each  other  by 
the  case-endings  placed  on  the  right. 

2.  Examples  for  Practice.  —  With  these  endings  decline  : 

Ala,  wing;  aqua,  water;  causa,  cause;  fortuna,  fortune;  porta, 
gate ;  victoria,  victory. 

EXERCISE  V.JpjFi**/^ 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Amicltia,    ae,2  f?  friendship. 

Corona,      ae,  f.  crown. 

1  That  is,  nouns  of  this  declension  in  a  and  e  are  feminine,  and  those 
in  as  and  es  arc  masculine. 

2  The  ending  ae  is  the  case-ending  of  the  Genitive:  amicitla;  Gen., 
amicitiae. 

3  Gender  is  indicated  in  the  vocabularies  by  m.  for  masculine,  f.  for 
feminine,  and  n.  for  neuter. 


IXTKODUCTOIJY   LATIX   BOOK. 

Gemma  ac,  f.  yem. 

Gloria,  ac,  f.  ylory. 

Ilora,  ac,  /.  hour. 

Justitia,  ac,  /.  justice. 

Sapientia,  ae,  f.  ivisdom. 

Scholii,  ae,  f.  school. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Corona,1  corona,  coronae,2  coronam,  coronfirum,  coro- 
nis,  coronas.  2.  Gemma,  gemma,  gemmae,  gemmam, 
gemmarum,  gemmis,  gemmas.  3.  Sapientia,  amicitia,  jus- 
titia,  gloria.  4.  Sapientiam,  amicitiam,  justitiam,  gloriam. 
5.  Sapientia,  amicitia,  justitia,  gloria.  G.  Scholarum,  ho- 
iTirum.  7.  Scholis,  lioris.  8.  Scholas,  lioras. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Friendship,  friendships.  2.  Of3  friendship,  of  friend- 
ships. 3.  To  friendship,  to  friendships.  4.  By  friendship, 
by  friendships.  5.  Justice,  by  justice,  of  justice,  to  justice. 
G.  Wisdom,  glory.  7.  With  wisdom,  with  glory.  8.  To 
wisdom,  to  glory*  9.  Of  wisdom,  of  glory.  10.  Of  a4 
crown,  of  a  gem.  11.  Crowns,  gems.  12.  With  the4 
crowns,  with  the  gems.  13.  Of  crowns,  of  gems. ' 

1  As  the  Latin  lias  no  article,  a  noun  may,  according  to  the  connec- 
tion in.  which  it  is  used,  be  translated  (1)  without  the  article  *,  as,  corona, 
crown;  (2)  with  the  indefinite  article  a  or  an;  as,  corona,  a  crown;  (3) 
with  the  definite  article  the;  as,  corona,  the  crown. 

2  When  the  same  Latin  form  may  be  found  in  two  or  more  cases,  the 
pupil  is  expected  to  give  the  meaning  for  each  case.     Thus  coronae  may 
be  in  the  Genitive  or  Dative  Singular,  or  in  the  Nominative  or  Voca- 
tive Plural. 

3  The  pupil  will  observe   that  the  English  prepositions,  of,   to,  bj, 
may  be  rendered  into  Latin  by  simply  changing  the  ending  of  the  word. 
Thus  friendship,  amicitia ;  of  friendship,  amicitiac. 

4  The  pupil  will  remember  that  the  English  articles,  a,  an,  and  the, 
arc  not  to  be  rendered  into  Latin  at  all.     Crown,  a  crown,  and  the  crownf 
are  all  rendered  into  Latin  by  the  same  word. 


ETYMOLOGY. —  SECOND    DECLENSION. 


13 


SECOND    DECLENSION. 

45.  Nouns  of  the  second  declension  end  in 

er,  ir,  iis,  os,  —  masculine;  iim,  on,  —  neuter. 
But  pure  Latin  nouns  end  only  in  er,  ir,  us,  um,  and  are 
declined  as  follows : 

Servus,  slave.    Puer,  boy.    Age?,  field.    Templum,  temple, 
SINGULAR. 


N.  serviis 

pu2r 

ag-er 

templiini 

G,  servl 

puerl 

%rl 

templl 

Z>.  servo 

pu£ro 

agro 

templo 

A.  servtiiii 

pueriiisi 

agriiiaa 

templitm 

V.  serve 

puer 

%er 

templiiin. 

A.  servo 

puero 

agro 

templo 

PLURAL. 

N.  servl 

puerl 

agri 

templti 

G.  servoriim 

puerorikm 

agroi-iiiii 

temploru.nl 

D.  sen-Is 

puerls 

%rls 

templls 

A.  servos 

puSros 

agros 

templa, 

V.  servl 

puerl 

agrl 

templa 

A.  scrvls. 

pu6rls. 

agris. 

templls. 

1.  Case-Endings From  an  inspection  of  the  paradigms,  it  will 

be  seen  that  they  are  declined  with  the  following 


Case-endinys. 


1.  us. 


3.  um. 


SINGULAR. 

JV.  us 

1 

iim 

G.  I 

1 

I 

D.  o 

5 

6 

A.  iim 

iim 

iim    • 

V.  e 

i 

iim 

A.  o 

6 

o 

1  The  endings  for  the  Nom.  and  Voc.  Sing,  are  wanting  in  nouns  in 
er:  thus  puer  is  the  stem  without  any  case-ending;  the  full  form  would 
DC  vuerus. 


14  INTRODUCTORY  LATIN  BOOK. 

PLURAL. 

N.I  I  a 

G.  Drum  orum  orum 

D.  Is  is  is 

A.  os  os  a 

V.I  I  a 

A.  is.  is.  is. 

2.  Examples  for  Practice.  —  Like  SERVUS  :  annus,  year ;  dontinus. 
master.  —  Like  PUER:    gener,  son-in-law;   socer,  father-in-law. — 
Like  AGER:  faber,  artisan;   magister,  master.  —  Like   TEMPLUM: 
bellum,  war ;  regnum,  kingdom. 

3.  Paradigms. —  Observe 

1)  That  p uer  differs  in  declension  from  servus  only  in  dropping 
the  endings  us  and  e  in  the  Nom.  and  Voc. :  Nom.  puer  for  puerus, 
Voc.  puer  for  puere. 

2)  That  ager  Offers  from  puer  only  in  dropping  e  before  r. 

3)  That  templum,  as  a  neuter  noun,  has  the  Nom.,  Accus.,  and 
Voc.  alike,  ending  in  the  plural  in  a.       See  38,  3. 

EXERCISE  VI. 

I.     Vocabulary. 

Doniim,  i,  n.  gift. 

Gener,  generi,  m.  son-in-law. 
Liber,  libri,  m.  look. 

Oculus,  I,  m.  eye. 

Praeceptiim,  I,  n.  rule,  precept. 

Socer,  soceri,  m.  father-in-law. 

Tyrannus,  I,  m.  tyrant. 

Verbum,  I,  n.  word. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Oculus,  oculi,  oculo,  oculum,  ocule,  oculorum,  oculis, 
oculos.  2.  Socer,  soceri,  socero,  socerum,  socerorum,  soce- 
ris,  soceros.  3.  Servi,  tyranni.  4.  Pueri,  generi.  5.  Agri, 
libri.  6.  Templi,  doni.  7.  Servo,  tyranno.  8.  Puerum, 
generum.  9.  Agrorum,  librornm.  10.  Templa,  dona,  11. 
Servum,  servos.  12.  Generi,  generorum.  13.  Agri,  agro- 


ETYMOLOGY. SECOND    DECLENSION.  15 

rum,     14.   Dono,  donis.      15.    Verbum,  praeccptum.     16. 
Verbi>  praecepti. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  The  slave,  the  slaves.  2.  For  the  slave,  for  the  slaves. 
3.  Of  the  slave,  of  the  slaves.  4.  Of  the  father-in-law, 
of  the  son-in-law.  5.  Of  the  fathers-in-law,  of  the  sons-in- 
law.  6.  For  the  fathers-in-law,  for  the  sons-in-law.  7.  The 
boy,  the  field.  8.  The  boys,  the  fields.  9.  The  gift,  the 
gifts.  10.  With  the  gift,  with  the  gifts.  11.  The  tyrant, 
the  boy,  the  book,  the  precept.  12.  Of  the  tyrant,  of  the 
boy,  of  the  book,  of  the  precept. 

SECOND  DECLENSION  — CONTINUED. 

RULE  II— Appositives. 
363.  An  Appositive  agrees  with  its  Subject  in  CASE  : 1 

Cluilius  rex  moritur,  Cluilius  the  king  dies.  Liv.  Urbes  Car- 
thago atque  Niimantia,  the  cities  Carthage  and  Numantia.  Cic. 

I.    DIRECTIONS  FOR  PARSING. 

In  parsing  a  Noun,  Adjective,  or  Pronoun, 

1.  Name  the  Part  of  Speech  to  which  it  belongs. 

2.  Decline 2  it. 

3.  Give  its  Gender,  Number,  Case,  &c. 

4.  Give  its  Syntax,3  and  the  Rule  for  it. 

1  A  noun  or  pronoun  used  to  explain  or  identify  another  noun  or  pro- 
noun, denoting  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  called  an  appositive;  as, 
Cluilius  rex,  Cluilius  the  king.     Here  rex,  the  king,  is  the  appositive, 
showing  the  rank  or  office  of  Cluilius,  —  Cluilius  the  king.     The  noun 
or  pronoun  to  which  the  appositive  is  added  —  Cluilius  in  the  example  — 
is  called  the  subject  of  the  appositive. 

2  Adjectives  in  the  Comparative  or  in  the  Superlative  degree  (160) 
should  also  be  compared  (162). 

3  By  the  Syntax  of  a  word  is  meant  the  Grammatical  construction  of 
it.     Thus  we  give   the  Syntax  of  regina,  under  the  Model,  by  stating 
that  it  is  in  apposition  with  its  subject,  Artemisia. 

2 


16  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

MODEL. 

Artemisia,  regina,  Artemisia  the  queen. 
Regina  is  a  noun  (31)  of  the  First  Declension  (42),  as  it  Las  ae 
in  the  Genitive  Singular  (40);  STEM,  regln  (41).  Singular:  re- 
gina, reglnae,  reglnae,  reglnam,  regina,  regina.  Plural:  reglnae, 
reginarum,  rcglnis,  reglnas,  reglnae,  reglnis.  It  is  of  the  Feminine 
gender,  as  the  names  of  females  are  feminine  by  35,  II.  1.  It  is  in 
the  Nominative  Singular,  in  apposition  with  its  subject  Artemisia, 
with  which  it  agrees  in  case,  according  to  Rule  LI. :  "  An  Apposi- 
tive  agrees  with  its  Subject  in  CASE." 

EXERCISE  VII. 

I.     Vocabulary. 

Cams,  ii,  m.  Caius,  a  proper  name. 

Filia,  ae,  f.  daughter. 

Hasta,  ae?>/!  spear. 

Pisistratus,  I,  m.  Pisistratus,  Tyrant  Qf  Athens. 

Ramus,  I,  m.  branch. 

Regina,  ae,  /.  queen. 

Tullia,  ae,  f.  Tullia,  a  proper  name. 

Victoria,  ae,  /.  Victoria,  Queen  of  England. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Ramus,  hasta.  2.  Kami,  hastae.  3.  Ramo,  hastac. 
4.  Ramum,  hastam.  5.  Ramo,  hasta.  6.  Ramorum,  has- 
tarum.  7.  Ramis,  hastis.  8.  Ramos,  hastas.  9.  Tyranni, 
tyrannorum.  10.  Verbum,  verba.  11.  Verbo,  verbis. 
12.  Templum,  templa.  13.  Templi,  templorum.  14.  Pi- 
sistrutus  tyrannus.1  15.  Pisistrati  tyranni.  16.  Pisistruto 
tyranno.  17.  Tullia  filia.  18.  Tulliae  filiae.  19.  Tul- 
liam  filiam. 

II.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  The  tyrant,  the  crown.     2.  The  tyrants,  the  crowns. 

1  Tyrannus  is  an  appositivc,  in  the  Nominative,  in  agreement  with  its 
subject,  Pisistratus,  according  to  Rule  II.  363. 


ETYMOLOGY. THIRD    DECLENSION.  17 

3.  Of  the  tyrant,  of  the  crown.  ,  4.  Of  the  tyrants,  of  the 
crowns.  5,  To  the  tyrant,  to  the  crown.  6.  To  the  tyrants, 
to  the  crowns.  7.  The  book,  the  books.  8.  With  the 
book,  with  the  books.  9.  Of  Pisistratus,  for  Pisistratus. 
10.  Of  the  queen,  for  the  queen.  11.  Cains  the  slave.1 
12.  Of  Caius  the  slave.  13.  For  Caius  the  slave.  14. 
Victoria  the  queen.  15.  For  Victoria  the  queen.  16, 
Of  Victoria  the  queen. 

THIRD  DECLENSION. 

48.  Nouns  of  the  third  declension  end  in 

a,  e,  i,  o,  y,  c,  1,  n,  r,  s,  t,  x. 

I.    MASCULINE  ENDINGS  :2 
o,  or,  os,  er,  es  increasing  in  the  genitive. 

II.  FEMININE  ENDINGS: 

as,  is,  ys,  x,  cs   not  increasing  in  the  genitwe ;  s  preceded 
l>y  a  consonant. 

III.  NEUTER  ENDINGS: 

a>  e?  i>  7?  c>  \  n?  *,  ar,  ur,  us. 

49.  Nouns  of  this  declension  may  be  divided  into  two 
classes : 

I.  Nouns  which  have  a  case-ending  in  the  Nominative 
Singular.     These  all  end  in  e,  s,  or  x. 

II.  Nouns  whicli  have  no  case-ending  in  the  Nomina- 
tive Singular. 

o 

In  Class  II.,  the  Nom.  Sing,  is  either  the  same  as  the  stem,  or  is 
formed  from  it  by  dropping  or  changing  one  or  more  letters  of  the 
stem:  consul,  Gen.  consiilis;  stem,  consul,  a  consul:  leo,  leonis; 
stem,  leon  (Nom.  drops  n),  lion :  carmen,  carmmis ;  stem,  carmin 
(Nom.  changes  in  to  en),  song. 

1  See  Rule  II.  363. 

2  That  is,  nouns  with  these  endings  are  masculine. 


18 


1NTKODUCTOKY   LATIN   BOOK. 


50.  CLASS  I.  —  WITH  NOMINATIVE  ENDING. 
I.     Nouns  in  es,  is,  s  impure^  and  x:  —  with  stem  un- 
changed  in  Nominative. 

Nubes,/.         Avis,/.  Urbs,/.  Hex,  m. 

cloud.  bird.  city.  Jting. 


SINGULAR. 

A7,  nubes 

avis 

urbs 

rex2 

G.  nubis 

avis 

urbis 

rcgis 

D.  nubl 

avl 

urbl 

regl 

A.  nubem. 

avem 

urbein. 

regain. 

V.  nubes 

avis 

urbs 

rex 

-1.  nube 

av£ 

urbe 

rcge" 

PLURAL. 

N.  nubes 

aves 

urbes 

rcges 

G.  nubiiim. 

aviitm 

urbiitin 

regfim 

D.  nubilnts 

avibiis 

urbil>iis 

rcgil>its 

A.  nubes 

aves 

urbes 

reges 

V.  nubes 

aves 

urbes 

rcges 

A.  nubl  bits. 

avil>its. 

urbil>iis. 

rcgibits. 

II.     Nouns   in   es,  is,   s    impure,  and  x:  —  with  stem 
cJ tanged  in  Nominative. 

Miles,  m.      Lapis,  m.  Ars,/".       Judex,  m.  and  /' 


soldier.  stone.  art. 

SINGULAR. 


judge. 


X.  miles 

lapis 

ars 

j  udex  2 

G.  niilitis 

lapidis 

artis 

judicis 

D.  militl 

lapidl 

artl 

judicl 

A.  militeni 

lapidem 

art^m 

judic^in 

F.  mile's 

lapis 

ars 

judex 

A.  milite 

lapide 

arte" 

judice" 

PLURAL. 

A",  milites 

lapides 

artes 

judices 

G.  militftm 

lapidiiisa. 

artiitm 

judicitm. 

1  Impure;  i.e.,  preceded  by  a  consonant. 

2  X  in  rex  =  £rs;  g  belonging  to   the   stem,  and  s  being   the  Nom. 
ending :  but  in  judex,  x  =  cs ;  c  belonging  to  the  stem,  and  s  being  the 
Norn,  ending. 


ETYMOLOGY. THIRD   DECLENSION. 


19 


D.  milittbiis 

lapidifoits 

artlbiks 

judicll>u.s 

A.  milites 

lapides 

rirtes 

judices 

F.  milites 

lapides 

artes 

judices 

A.  militlbtis. 

lapidlbiis. 

artibiis. 

judiclfotis. 

III.    Nouns  in  as,  OS,  us,  and  e:  —  those  in  as,  os,  and 
us  with  stein  changed,  those  in  e  with  stem  unchanged. 
Civitas,  f.        Nepos,  m.        Yirtus,  f.       Mare,  n. 
state.  grandson.          virtue.  sea. 

SINGULAR. 


N.  civitas 

nepos 

virtus 

milre 

G.  civitatis 

ncputis 

virtutis 

maris 

D.  civitatl 

neixJtl 

virtutl 

marl 

A.  civitat^m 

nepotem 

virtuteisi 

mar^ 

F.  civitas 

ncpos 

virtus 

mare* 

A.  civitate 

nepot^ 

virtute 

marl2 

PLURAL, 

N.  civitates 

ncputes 

virtutes 

maria 

G.  civitatiiiKi1 

nepotttiii 

virtutwmi 

maritkni. 

D.  civitatil>u.s 

ncpotil>ii.s 

virtutil>iis 

maribils 

A.  civitates 

nepotes 

virtutes 

marisi 

F.  civitates 

nepotes 

virtutes 

maria. 

A.  civitatibiis. 

nepotil>ia.s. 

virtutil>tis. 

marll>iks. 

51.  CLASS  II.  —  WITHOUT  NOMINATIVE  ENDING. 
I.     Nouns  in  1  and  r :  —  with  stem  uncJianged  in  Nomi- 
native. 


Sol,  m. 

Consul,  in. 

Passer,  m. 

Yultur,  m. 

sun. 

consul. 

sparrow. 

vidture. 

SINGULAR. 

N.  sol 

consul 

passer 

vultur 

G.  sGlis 

consulis 

passeris 

vulturis 

D.  sGll     , 

consull 

passSrl 

vulturl 

A.  solem. 

consCil^ni 

passereni 

vultur^iii 

F.  sol 

consul 

passer 

vultiir 

A.  sole 

consule" 

passere 

vulture 

PLURAL. 

N.  sOles 

consules 

passeres 

vultures 

G. 

consuliiiii. 

passSriiin. 

vulturttm. 

Z).  solibiis 

consulil>its 

passeril>ti.s 

vulturibits 

1  Sometimes  civitatium. 


2  Sometimes  mare  in  poetry- 


20 


INTRODUCTORY    LATIN   BOOK. 


A.  soles 

consults             passeres 

vultures 

V.  soles 

constiles             passSres 

vultures 

A.  sollbiks. 

constili"biis.       passerll>tis. 

vulturltofts. 

II.     Nouns  in 

o  and  r  :  —  with  stem  changed  in  Nbmi- 

native. 

Leo,  m. 

Virgo,  f.        Pater,  m. 

Pastor,  m. 

lion. 

maiden.           father. 

shepherd. 

SINGULAR. 

N.  leo 

virgo                     pater 

pastor 

G.  leonis 

virginls               patris 

pastoris 

D.  leonl 

virginl                 patrl 

pastorl 

A.  leonem 

virginem            patr^m 

pastorem 

F.  leo 

virgo                    pater 

pastor 

A.  leone 

virgine                patre 

pastor^ 

PLURAL. 

Tf.  Icones 

virgines              patres 

pastor^s 

G.  leoniim 

virginitm           patrum 

pastoriim. 

D.  leonlfciis 

yirglnl'biis         patrll>iis 

pastorlbiis 

A.  leon£s 

virgm^s              patres 

pas  tores 

F.  leones 

virgines              patres 

pas  tores 

A.  leonlfoiis. 

virginil>iis.        patril>ii.s. 

pastoril>iis. 

III.    Nouns  in 

en,  us,  and  ut  :  —  with  stem  changed  in 

Nominative. 

Carmen,  n. 

Opus,  71.          Corpus,  n. 

Caput,  n. 

song. 

work.              body. 

head. 

SINGULAR. 

N.  carmen 

opus                      corpus 

cupiit 

G.  carminis 

opgris                  corporis 

capitis 

D.  carrainl 

opSrl                    corporl 

capitl 

A.  carman 

optis                     coipus 

caput 

V.  carman 

opus                      corptis 

caput 

A.  carmine" 

opdre                   corporl 

capite 

PLURAL. 

N.  carmina 

oper^/                    corpora. 

capita 

G.  carminikni 

operii-iii.               corporiim 

capitiini 

D.  carminlbiis 

operi1>iis            corporil>fts 

capitil>ii« 

A.  carmina 

op6ra                   corpora 

capita 

V.  carmina 

opSra                   corpora 

capita 

A.  carminlbiis. 

operitotts,          corporlljus. 

capitil>M.s. 

ETYMOLOGY. THIRD    DECLENSION. 


21 


52.  Case-Endings.  —  From   an  inspection   of  the  para- 
digms, it  will  be  seen, 

1.  That  the  nouns   belonging  to  Class  II.  differ  from 
those  of  Class   I.  only  in   taking  no  case-ending  in  the 
Nominative  and  Vocative  Singular. 

2.  That  all  nouns  of  both  classes  arc  declined  with  the 
following 


Case-Endings. 


\- 


SINGULAR. 
Masc.  and  Fern. 

Norn,  s l  (es,  is) 2 

Gen.  is 
I 
em  (im)  3 


Dat. 
Ace. 


Voc.    like  Nom. 
AH.     e,  I 

PLURAL. 
Masc.  and  Fern. 
Norn,  es 
Gen.    urn,  ium 
Dat.    ibus 
Ace.    es 
Voc.    es 
Abl    ibus. 


Neuter. 
£ 2 

is 

I 

like  Nora. 

it  U 

e,  I 

Neuter. 
ii,  ia 

iim,  iiim 
ibiis 
a,  ia 
a,  ia 
ibus. 


53.  Declension.  —  To  apply  these  endings  in  declension, 
we  must  know,  besides  the  Nominative  Singular, 

1.  The  Gender,  as  that  shows  which  set  of  endings 
must  be  used. 

2.*  The  Genitive  Singular  (or  some  oblique  case),  as 
that  contains  the  stem  (41)  to  which  these  endings  must 
be  added. 

1  In  nouns  in  x  (=  cs  or  gs),  s  is  the  case-ending,  and  the  c  or  g  be- 
longs to  the  stem. 

2  The  dash  here  implies  that  the  case-ending  is  sometimes  wanting,  as 
in  all  nouns  of  Class  II. 

3  The  enclosed  endings  are  less  common  than  the  others. 


22  INTRODUCTORY  LATIN  BOOK. 

54.  EXAMPLES  FOR  PRACTICE: 

Class  I. 


Eupcs, 

Gen.  rupis,  f. 

rock;            hospes,     Gen.  liospitis,  m.     guest. 

vestis, 

vestis,  f. 

garment;     cuspis,               cuspidis,  f.      spear. 

trabs, 

trabis,  f. 

beam  ;          mons,                mentis,  m.      mountain. 

lex, 

legis,  f.' 

law;             apex,                 apicis,  m.        summit. 

libertas, 

.      libertatis, 

f.     liberty;        salus,                 salutis,  f.         safety. 

sedile, 

sedllis,  n. 

seat  ; 

Class  II. 

Kxsul, 

Gen.  exsiilis,  m, 

,  and  f.     exile  ;        dolor,     Gen.  dolor  is,  m.      pain. 

actio, 

actionis,  f. 

action  ;      imago,            imaginis,  f.    image. 

anser, 

anser  is,  m 

goose  ;        frater,             fratris,  m.      brother. 

nOmen, 

nomlnis,  n 

name;        tempus,          temporis,  n.  time. 

RULE  XVI  — Genitive. 

395.  Any  Noun,  not  an  Appositive,  qualifying  the 
meaning  of  another  noun,  is  put  in  the  Genitive  i1 

Catonis  orationes,  Gate's  orations.  Cic.  Castra  hostium,  the 
camp  of  the  enemy.  Liv.  Mors  Hamilcaris,  the  death  of  Hamil- 
car.  Liv. 

MODEL   FOR   PARSING. 

Catonis  oration es,    Cato*s  orations. 

Catonis  is  "a  proper  noun,  as  it  is  the  name  of  a  person  (31,  1). 
It  is  of  the  Third  Declension,  as  it  has  is  in  the  Genitive  Singular 
(40)  ;  of  Class  II.,  as  it  has  no  Nominative  Ending  (49,  II.  and  51, 
II.)  :  STEM,  Caton  (41)  ;  Nom.  Cato  (;i  dropped,  49,  II.).  Singu- 

1  The  Appositivc  (363,  p.  15)  and  this  qualifying  Genitive  resemble  each 
other  in  the  fact  that  they  both,  qualify  the  meaning  of  another  noun : 
Cluilius  rex,  Cluilius  the  king;  Catonis  orationes,  Cato's  orations,  or  the 
orations  of  Cato.  Here  the  Appositive  rex  qualifies,  or  limits,  the  mean- 
ing of  Cluilius  by  showing  what  Cluilius  is  meant,  —  Cluilius  the  king. 
In  a  similar  manner,  the  Genitive  Catonis  qualifies,  or  limits,  the  mean- 
ing of  orationes  by  showing  what  orations  arc  meant,  —  the  orations  of 
Cato.  Yet  the  Appositive  and  the  Genitive  are  readily  distinguished  by 
the  fact  that  the  former  qualifies  a  noun  denoting  the  same  person  or 


ETYMOLOGY. THIRD    DECLENSION.  23 

lar : l  Ca'o,  Catonis,  Catoni,  Catonem,  Cato,  Catone.  It  is  of  the 
Masculine  gender,  as  the  names  of  males  are  masculine  by  35, 1.  1. 
It  is  in  the  Genitive  Singular,  depending  upon  ordtidnes,  according 
to  Rule  XVI. :  "  Any  noun,  not  an  Appositive,  qualifying  the  mean- 
ing of  another  noun,  is  put  in  the  Genitive." 

THIRD    DECLENSION— CONTINUED.  — CLASS  I.2 
EXERCISE    VIII. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Clvis,  clvis,  m.  and/.  citizen. 

Lex,  legis,  /.  law. 

Mors,  mortis,  /.  death. 

Pax,  pficis,  /.  peace. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Nubis,  nubium.  2.  Nubem,  nubes.  3.  Avis,  aves. 
4.  Avi,  avibus.  5.  Urbs,  urbes.  G.  Urbi,  urbibus.  7. 
Rex,  reges.  8.  Regis,  regum.  9.  Nubes,  miles.  10.  Nu- 
bis,  militis.  11.  Nubem,  militem.  12.  Rex,  judex.  13. 
Regis,  judicis.  14.  Reges,  judices.  15.  Civitas,  civitates. 
16.  Virtus,  virtutes.  17.  Mors  regis.3  18.  Morte  regis. 
19.  Mortes  regum.  20.  Virtus  judicis.  21.  Pacis  gloria. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  The  citizen,  to  the  citizen,  of  the  citizen,  of  citizens, 
for  citizens.  2.  A  cloud,  clouds,  of  a  cloud,  of  clouds,  with 
a  cloud,  with  clouds.  3.  A  king,  a  law.  4.  Kings,  laws. 

thing  as  itself,  while  the  Genitive  qualifies  a  noun  denoting  a  different 
person  or  thing.  Thus,  in  the  examples  above,  Cluilius  and  the  Apposi- 
tive rex  denote  the  same  person ;  while  orationes  and  the  Genitive  Cato- 
nis  denote  entirely  different  objects. 

1  As  Cato  is  the  name  of  a  person,  the  Plural  is  seldom  used. 

2  This  exercise  furnishes  practice  in  the  declension  of  nouns  belonging 
to  Class  I.  of  the  Third  Declension.     See  50. 

3  Regis  is  in  the  Genitive,  and  qualifies  the  meaning  of  7nors,  according 
to  Rule  XVI.  395. 


24  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

5.  Of  the  king,  of  the  law.  6.  Of  the  kings,  of  the  laws. 
7.  To  the  king,  to  the  law.  8.  To  the  kings,  to  the  laws. 
9.  The  law  of  the  state.1  10.  The  laws  of  the  state. 

\ 

THIRD  DECLENSION— CONTINUED.  — CLASS  H. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

RULE  XXXII  — Cases  with  Prepositions. 

432.  The  Accusative  and  Ablative  may  be  used 
with  Prepositions.2 

Ad  amicum  scrips!,  /  have  written  to  a  friend.  Cic.  In  curiam, 
into  the  senate-house.  Liv.  In  Italia,3  in  Italy.  Nep.  Pro  castris, 
before  the  camp. 

MODEL   FOR  PARSING. 

Ad  amicum,    To  a  friend. 

Amicum  is  a  noun  (31)  of  the  Second  Declension  (45),  as  it  has 
tin  the  Genitive  Singular  (40);  STEM,  amlc  (41).  Singular:  aml- 
cus,  amlci,  amlco,  amicum,  amice,  amlco.  Plural :  amid,  amicorum, 
amlcis,  amlcos,  amlci,  amlcis.  It  is  of  the  Masculine  gender  by  45, 
is  in  the  Accusative  Singular,  and  is  used  with  the  preposition  ad, 
according  to  Rule  XXXII. :  "  The  Accusative  and  Ablative  may 
be  used  with  Prepositions."  The  Accusative  is  used  with  ad. 

1  The  Latin  word  for  of  the  state  will  be  in  the  Genitive,  according  to 
Kule  XVI.  395. 

2  The  Preposition  is  the  part  of  speech  which  shows  the  relations  of 
objects  to  each  other :  in  Italia  esse,  to  be  in  Italy ;   ante  me,  before  me. 
Here  in  and  ante  are  prepositions.    In  the  Vocabularies,  each  preposition, 
as  it  occurs,  will  be  marked  as  such ;  and  the  case  which  may  be  used  with 
it  will  be  specified.     It  has  not  been  thought  advisable  at  this  early  stage 
of  the  course  to  burden  the  memory  of  the  learner  with  a  list  of  preposi- 
tions and  their  cases. 

3  Here  the  Ablative  Italia  is  used  with  in ;  though,  in  the  second  ex- 
ample, the  Accusative  curiam  is  used  with  the  same  preposition.     The 
rule  is,  that  the  Latin  preposition  in  is  used  with  the  Accusative  wheu  it 
means  into,  and  with  the  Ablative  when  it  means  in. 


ETYMOLOGY. THIRD    DECLENSION.  25 


EXERCISE    IX. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Ad,  prep,  with  ace.  to,  towards. 

Cicero,  Ciceronis,  m.  Cicero,  the  Roman  orator. 

Consul,  consulis,  m.  consul.1 

Contra,  prep,  with  ace.  against,  contrary  to. 

Exsul,  exsulis,  m.  and  /.  exile. 

Frater,  fratris,  m.  brother. 

Nomen,  nominis,  n.  name. 

Oratio,  orationis,  f.  oration,  speech. 

Orator,  oratoris,  in.  orator. 

Victor,  victoris,  m.  victor,,  conqueror. 


II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Leo,  leonis,  leones.  2.  Virgo,  virginis,  virgines.  3. 
Solis,  soleni,  soles.  4.  Consulis,  consulem,  consules.  5. 
Solibus,  consulibus.  6.  Passeris,  vulturis.  7.  Passerum, 
vulturum.  8.  Patri,  pastori.  9.  Patres,  pastores.  10. 
Carmen,  carmina.  11.  Caput,  capita.  12.  Opens,  corporis. 
13.  Ciceronis2  oratio.  14.  Ciceronis  orationes.  15.  Ora- 
tione  consulis.  16.  Ad  gloriam.3  17.  Contra  regein. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  The  exile,  the  exiles.  2.  For  the  exile,  for  the  exiles. 
3.  Of  an  exile,  of  the  exiles.  4.  The  shepherd,  the  orator. 
5.  Of  shepherds,  of  orators.  6.  Shepherds,  orators.  7.  Of 
a  shepherd,  of  an  orator.  8.  A  song,  a  name.  9.  Songs, 

1  The  consuls  were  joint  presidents   of  the   Roman   commonwealth. 
They  were  elected  annually,  and  were  two  in  number. 

2  See  Rule  XVI.  395,  and  Model. 

3  The  Accusative  gloriam  is  here  used  with  the  preposition  ad,  according 
to  Rule  XXXII.  432. 


26 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 


names.  10.  Of  songs,  of  names.  11.  Father,  brother. 
12.  To1  the  father,  to  the  brother.  13.  Contrary  to  the 
law.2  14.  Contrary  to  the  laws  of  the  state. 


FOURTH  DECLENSION. 

116.  Nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  end  in 

us,  —  masculine  y  u,  —  neuter. 
They  are  declined  as  follows : 

Fructus,  fruit.         Cornu,  horn.  Case-Endings. 

SINGULAR. 

X.  fruct&j*  cornu.  us  u 

j-'.  fractals  corniis  us  us 

V.  fructul  cornik  ul  ii 

-•t.  fructiim  cornii  um  u 

r.  fructiis  cornft.  us  u 

*1.  ffiicta  cornii  u  u 

PLUKAL. 

-Y.  fructflLM  cornusi  us  ul 

G.  fnictttum  corniiikm  uiim  uum 

D.  fructibiis  cornil>ils  ibus  (ubas)  ibiis  (ubus) 

A.  fructas  corniiii  us  iul 

V.  fructfts  cornii^  us  iut 

A.  fructil>ii«.  cornil>iis.  ibus  (dbas).  ibris  (ubus). 

1.  Case-Endings, —  Nouns  of  this  declension  are  declined  with  the 
case-endings  placed  on  the  right. 

2.  Examples  for  Practice — Cantus    song ;   cumix,  chariot ;  cursus, 
course  ;  versus,  verse ;  genu,  knee. 

1  To  should  still  be  regarded  as  a  sign  of  the  Dative,  though  it  may 
sometimes  be  rendered  by  the  preposition  ad. 

2  See  Rule  XXXII.  432.    The  words  contrary  to  arc  to  be  rendered  by 
a  single  Latin  preposition. 


ETYMOLOGY. FOURTH    DECLENSION.  27 

EXERCISE    X. 

I.     Vocabulary. 

Adventus,  us,  m.  arrival,  approach. 

Ante,  prep,  with  ace.  before. 

Caesar,  Caesaris,  m.  Caesar,  a  Roman  surname. 

Cantus,  us,  m.  singing,  song. 

Conspectus,  us,  m.        .  sight,  presence. 

Exercitiis,  us,  m.  army. 

Hostis,  hostis,  m.  and  f.         enemy. 

Impetus,  us,  m.  attack. 

In,  prep.  into  with  ace.,  in  with  abl. 

Luscmia,  ae,  f.  nightingale. 

Occasus,  us,  ?n.  the  setting,  as  of  the  sun. 

Post,  prep,  with  ace.  after. 

Ver,  veris,  n.  spring. 

II.      Translate  into  English. 

1.  Fructus,  cantus.  2.  Fructibus,  cantibus.  3.  Cantus 
luscimae.1  4.  Cantu  lusciniae.  5.  Cantibus  lusciniarum. 
6.  Adventus  veris.  7.  Post  adventum2  veris.1  8.  Solis 
occfisus.  9.  Post  solis  occasum.  10.  Caesaris  adventu. 
11.  Ante  adventum  Caesaris.  12.  Impetus  nostrum.  13. 
Impetu  hostium.  14.  In  conspectu  exercitus. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  The  army,  the  armies.  2.  For  the  army,  for  the 
armies.  3.  Of  the  army,  of  the  armies.  4.  The  arrival  of 
the  army.  5.  Before  the  arrival  of  the  army.  6.  After5 

1  Genitive,  according  to  Rule  XVI.    See  p.  22. 

2  Used  with  post,  according  to  Rule  XXXII.    Sec  p.  24. 

3  Sec  Rule  XXXII.  432,  p.  24.     The  pupil  will  remember  that  the 
English  prepositions,  to,  for,  with,  from,  by,  are  generally  rendered  into 
I>atin  by  merely  putting  the  noun  in  the  proper  case,  i.e.  in  the  Dative 
for  to  or  for,  and  in  the  Ablative  for  with,  from,  by.     Other  English 
] (repositions,  before,  after,  behind,  between,  etc.,  are  rendered   into  Latin 
by  corresponding  Latin  prepositions. 


28  INTRODUCTORY    LATIN   BOOK. 

the  arrival  of  the  consul.  7.  The  singing  of  the  night- 
ingale. 8.  After  the  setting  of  the  sun.  9.  Before  the 
attack  of  the  enemy.  10.  After  the  attack  of  the  enemy. 


*•  FIFTH    DECLENSION. 

119.  Nouns  of  the  fifth  declension  end  in  es,  —feminine, 
and  are  declined  as  follows : 

Dies,  day.1  Res,  thing.  Case-Endings. 

SINGULAR. 

AT.  dies  res  eS 

G.  die!  rel  el 

D.  die!  rel  ci 

-•I.  digm  r£m  Cm 

I",  dies  §  res  es 

-•1.  die  re  e 

PLURAL. 

N.  dies  res  es 

<7.  dittriim  -rerikm  eriim 

Z).  diefriis  rebus  ebiis 

A.  dies  res  es 

K  dies  res  es 

-4.   diefrii*.  rebiis.  ebiis. 

1.  Case-Endings. — Nouns  of  this  declension  are  declined  with 
the  case-endings  placed  on  the  right. 

E  in  el  is  generally  short  when  preceded  by  a  consonant,  other- 
wise long. 

"Jr      2.  Examples  for  Practice-2 — Acies,   battle-array;   effigies,  effigy; 
fades,  face  ;  series,  series ;  species,  form ;  spes,  hope. 

1  Dies,  day,  is  an  exception  in  Gender,  as  it  is  generally  masculine, 
though  sometimes  feminine  in  the  singular. 

2  Nouns  of  this  declension,  except  dies  and  res,  want,  in  the  Plural, 
the  Genitive,  Dative,  and  Ablative.      These  cases  must,   therefore,  be 
omitted  in  declining  these  examples. 


ETYMOLOGY.  —  FIFTH   DECLENSION. 


29 


COMPARATIVE   VIEW   OF   THE  TIVE  DECLENSIONS. 


121.  Case-Endings  of  Latin  nouns.1 


SINGULAR. 

Dec.  I. 

Dec 

II.                  Dec.  III. 

Dec. 

IV. 

D.V.^ 

Fern. 

Masc., 

Neut. 

M.  &  F. 

Neat. 

Masc. 

Neut. 

Fern.' 

N.  a 

us  —  2 

um 

s(es,is)3 

—  e  — 

us 

u 

es 

G.  ae 

i 

5 

Is 

13 

us 

us 

§1 

D.  ae 

0 

0 

I 

i 

til 

u 

el 

A.  am 

um 

um 

em  (im) 

like  nom. 

iim 

u 

em 

V.  a 

e  — 

um 

like  nom. 

like  nom. 

us 

u 

es 

A.  a        ;o 

o 

e(I) 

«  (i)          jii 

u 

e 

PLURAL. 

N.  ae       1 

* 

5s 

a  (ia) 

us 

ua 

es 

0'.  ariim  oriim 

oriim 

um  (ium] 

um  (ium) 

uum 

uum 

erum 

D.   13 

is 

13 

ibus 

ibus 

ibus  (ubus) 

Ibus  (ubus) 

ebus 

^1.  as 

OS 

a 

es 

a(ia) 

us 

ua 

es 

V.  ae 

1 

a 

es 

us 

ua 

es 

vl.  is. 

Is 

is. 

Ibus 

ibus. 

Ibus  (ubus) 

ibus  (ubus).  ebiis 

EXERCISE    XI. 


I.      Vocabulary. 

Acies,  aciel,  /. 

battle-array,  army. 

Amlcus,  I,  m. 

friend. 

Cibus,  I,  m. 

food. 

T)Q,prep.  icilli  all. 

concerning. 

Dies,  diel,  m.  and  /. 

'day. 

Facies,  faciei,  f. 

face,  appearance. 

Numerus,  I,  m. 

number,  quantity. 

Res,  rei,  f. 

thing,  affair. 

Species,  specie!,  f. 

appearance. 

Spes,  spel,  /. 

hope.   .v  , 

Victoria,  ae,  /. 

} 
victory. 

1  This  table  presents  the  endings  of  all  nouns  in  the  Latin  language, 
except  a  few  derived  from  the  Greek. 

2  The  dash  denotes  that  the  case-ending  is  sometimes  wanting  :  cr  and 
»V  in  Dec.  II.,  it  will  be  remembered,  are  not  case-endings,  but  parts  of 
the  stem  (45,  1). 

3  The  enclosed  endings  are  less  common  than  the  others. 


30  IXTKODTJCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Diei,  dierum,  diebus.  2.  Aciei,  aciem,  acie.  3.  Diem, 
speciem.  4.  Die,  specie.  5.  Res,  spes.  6.  Rei,  spei.  7. 
Victoriae  spes.  8.  Victoriae  spe.  9.  Diei  horae.  10. 
Numerus  dierum.  11.  Gloria,  cibus,  nubes,  cantus,  facies. 
t!2.  Gloriae,  cibi,  nubis,  cantus,  faciei.  13.  Gloriam,  cibum, 
nubem,  cantum,  faciem. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  A  day,  days.  2.  Of  the  day,  of  the  days.  3.  For  the 
day,  for  the  days.  4.  The  thing,  the  things.  5.  With  the 
thing,  with  the  things.  6.  Concerning  the  thing,  concern- 
ing the  things.  7..  Of  the  thing,  of  the  things.  &.  Con- 
cerning the  battle-array.  9.  Wisdom,  friend,  citizen,  fruit, 
hope.  10.  For  wisdom,  for  a  citizen,  for  hope. 


C  H  A  P  T  E  K    II. 

ADJECTIVES. 

146.  The  adjective  is  that  part  of  speech  which  is  used 
to  qualify  nouns :  bonus,  good ;  magnus,  great. 

The  form  of  the  adjective  in  Latin  depends  in  part  upon  the 
gender  of  the  noun  which  it  qualifies ;  bonus  puer,  a  good  boy ;  bona 
puella,  a  good  girl ;  bonum  tectum,  a  good  house.  Thus  bonus  is  the 
form  of  the  adjective  when  used  with  masculine  nouns,  bona  with 
feminine,  and  bonum  with  neuter. 

147.  Some  adjectives  are  partly  of  the  first  declension 
and  partly  of  the  second,  while  all  the  rest  are  entirely  of 
the  third  declension. 

I.    FIRST   AND   SECOND   DECLENSIONS. 

148.  Adjectives  of  this  class  have  in  the  nominative 
singular  the  endings : 


ETYMOLOGY. ADJECTIVES. 


31 


Masc.,  Dec.  II. 

Fern.,  Dec.  I.           Neut.,  Dec.  II. 

US  1  , 

a, 

uin. 

ey  are  declined 

as  follows  : 

Bonus,  good. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Norn,   boniis 

bona 

boniini 

Gen.     bonl 

bonae 

boni 

Dat.     bono 

bonae 

bono 

Ace.     boniiiii 

bonam 

boniini 

Foe.      bon£ 

bona 

bonii.ni 

Abl.    .  bono 

bona 

bono  ; 

PLURAL. 

Nom.   boni 

bonae 

bona 

Gen.     bonOrttm 

bonariiHi 

bonoriiiu 

Dat.     bonls 

bonls 

bonl* 

^4cc.     bonos 

bonas 

bona 

Foe.      bonl 

bonae 

bona 

Abl      bonls 

bonls 

bonls. 

Liber,  free. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom.   liber 

libera 

llberiim 

Gen.     libSrl 

liberae 

libgri 

Dat.     libero 

liberae 

lib^ro 

Ace.     liberuiii 

libCraii! 

liberiini 

Voc.     liber 

libtfra 

libSriim 

Abl.      libero 

libera 

lib^ro  ; 

PLURAL 

Nom.    liberl 

liberae 

libSrii 

Gen.     liberoriiBai 

L            liberariim. 

libero  riini 

Dat.     libSrls 

libdrls 

Iib6rls 

^4cc.     liberos 

liberas 

libSra 

Voc.     liberl 

liberae 

libera 

All.      liberls 

liberls 

liberls. 

1  The  dash  indicates  that  the  ending  is  sometimes  wanting.     See  45, 1. 


32  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

Aeger,  sick. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

Nom.   aeger  aegr&  aegriim 

Gen.     aegrl  aegrae  aegrl 

Dai.     aegro  aegrae  aegro 

Ace.     aegrii.m  aegr&m  aegriim 

Foe.     aeger  aegra,  aegriim 

Abl.      aegro  aegra  aegro  5 

PLURAL. 

Nom.   aegrl  aegrae  aegr& 

Gen.    aegrorum  aegrariim  aegrOr&m 

Dat.     aegrls  aegrls  aegris 

Ace.     aegros  aegras  aegra 

Foe.     aegrl  aegrae  aegra 

Abl.     aegrls  aegrls  aegrls. 


1.  Bonus  is  declined  in  the  Masc.  like  servus  of  Dec.  II.  (45),  in 
the  Fern,  like  mensa  of  Dec.  I.  (42),  and  in  the  Neut.  like  templum 
of  Dec.  II.  (45), 

2.  Liber  differs  in  declension  from  bonus  only  in  dropping  us  and 
c  in  the  Nom.  and  Voc.  (45,  3,  1).     Aeger  differs  from  liber  only  in 
dropping  e  before  r  (45,  3,  2). 

3.  Most  adjectives  in  er  are  declineJl  like  aeger. 


RULE  XXXIII  — Agreement  of  Adjectives. 

438.  An  Adjective  agrees  with  its  Noun  in  GENDER, 
NUMBER,  and  CASE  : 

Fortuna  caeca  est,  Fortune  is  blind.1  Cic.  Verae  amicitiae,  true 
friendships.  Cic.  Magister  optimus,  the  best  teacher.  Cic. 

1  Here  the  adjective  caeca  is  in  the  feminine  gender,  in  the  singular 
number,  and  in  the  nominative  case,  to  agree  withfortuna.  It  is  declined 
like  BONUS  :  caecus,  caeca,  caecum. 


ETYMOLOGY. ADJECTIVES. 


33 


MODEL  FOR  PAUSING. 

Verae  amlcitiae,     True  friendships. 

Verae  is  an  adjective  (146)  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions 
(147)  :  STEM,  ver  (41, 148,  1).  Singular:  N.  verus,  vera,  verum;  G. 
veri,  verae,  veri ;  D.  vero,  verae,  vero  ;  A.  verum,  veram,  verum ;  V. 
vere,  vera,  verum  ;  A.  vero,  vera,  vero.  Plural :  N.  veri,  verae,  vera  ; 
G.  verorum,  ver  arum,  verorum;  D.  ver  is,  veris,  veris  ;  A.  veros,  veras, 
vera  ;  V'.  veri,  verae,  vera ;  A.  veris,  veris,  veris.  It  is  in  the  Nomi- 
native Plural  Feminine,  and  agrees  with  its  noun  amicitiae,  accord- 
ing to  Rule  XXXLTI :  "  An  Adjective  agrees  with  its  Noun  in  GEN- 
DER, NUMBER,  and  CASE." 


EXERCISE    XII. 


I.      Vocabulary. 


Anniilus,  I,  m. 

Aureus,  a,  iim,1 

Beatus,  a,  um, 

Bonus,  a,  iim, 

Egregiiis,  a,  iim, 

Fldus,  a,  tim, 

Gratus,  a,  um, 

Magnus,  a,  iim, 

Multus,  a,  iim, 

Puella,  ae,  /. 

Pulcher,  pulchra,  pulchriim, 

Regina,  ae,  f. 

Regniim,  I,  n. 

Veriis,  a,  iim, 

Vita,  ae,  /. 


ring. 

golden. 

happy,  blessed. 

good. 

distinguished. 

faithful. 

acceptable,  pleasing. 

great. 

much,  many. 

girl. 

beautiful. 

queen. 

kingdom. 

true. 

life. 


1  The  endings  a  and  um  belong  respectively  to  the  feminine  and  to  the 
neuter.     Thus  aureus,  aurea,  aureum,  like  bonus,  148. 


34  INTRODUCTORY    LATIN"   BOOK. 

II.     Translate,  into  English. 

1.  Armcus  fidus.1  2.  Amicifidi.  3.  Amlcofido.  4.  Ami- 
cum  fidum.  5.  Amice  fide.  6.  Amicorum  fidorum.  7.  Ami- 
cis  fidis.  8.  Amlcos  fidos.  9.  Corona  aurea.  10.  Coronae 
aureae.  11.  Coronam  auream.  12.  Corona,  aurea.  13. 
Coronarum  aurearum.  14.  Coronis  aureis.  15.  Coronas 
aureas.  16.  Donum  gratum.  17.  Doni  grati.  18.  Dono 
grato.  39.  Dona  grata.  20.  Donorum  gratorum.  21. 
Donis  gratis.  22.  Ager  pulcher.  23.  Puella  pulchra,  24. 
Donum  pulchrum.  25.  Agri  pulchri.  26.  Puellae  pul- 
chrae.  27.  Dona  pulchra.  28.  Beata  vita,  29.  Aureus 
annulus.  30.  Aurei  annuli.  31.  Magna  gloria.  32.  Egre- 
gia  victoria. 


III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  A  true 2  friend.  2.  The  true 2  friends.  3.  Fora  true 
friend.  4.  For  true  friends.  5.  Of  the  true  friend.  6. 
Of  true  friends.  7.  True  glory.  8.  With  true  glory.  9. 
Of  true  glory.  10.  An  acceptable  word.  11.  Acceptable 
words.  12.  With  acceptable  words.  13.  Of  acceptable 
words.  14.  A  beautiful  book.  15.  The  beautiful  books. 
16.  With  a  beautiful  book.  17.  Of  beautiful  books.  18. 
The  beautiful  queen.  19.  The  crown  of  the  •  beautiful 
queen.  20.  The  beautiful  crown  of  the  queen.  21.  A 
good  king,  a  good  queen,  a  good  kingdom.  22.  The  broth- 
ers of  the  good  king. 

1  In  Latin  the  adjective  generally  follows  its  noun,  as  in  this  example; 
though  sometimes  it  precedes  it,  as  in  English.     When  emphatic,  the 
adjective  is  placed  before  its  noun ;  as,  Verae  amicitiae,  true  friendships. 
Fidas  agrees  with  amicus,  according  to  Eule  XXXIII. 

2  Be  sure  and  put  the  adjective  in  the  right  form  to  agree  with  its 
noun,  according  to  Rule  XXXIII. 


ETYMOLOGY. ADJECTIVES. 


35 


H.  ADJECTIVES   OF  THE  THIRD   DECLENSION. 

150.  Adjectives  of  the  third  declension  may  be  divided 
into  three  classes : 

I.  Those  which  have  in  the  nominative  singular  three 
different  forms,  —  one  for  each  gender. 

II.  Those  which  have  two  forms,  —  the  masculine  and 
feminine  being  the  same. 

III.  Those  which  have  but  one  form,  —  the  same  for  all 
genders. 

151.  I.  ADJECTIVES  OF  THREE  ENDLSTGS  of  this  declen- 
sion have  in  the  nominative  singular : 


Masc. 

er, 


Fern. 

is, 


They  are  declined  as  follows  : 


Neut. 

e. 


Acer,  sharp. 

SINGULAR. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neat. 

JV.  acer 

acris 

acre 

G.  acris 

acris 

acris 

D.  acrl 

acrl 

acrl 

A.  acrem 

acrem. 

acr£ 

V.  acer 

acris 

acre 

A.  acrl 

acrl 

acrl  ; 

N.  acres 
G.  acrlikm 
D.  acritoiis 
A.  acres 
V.  acres 
A.  acrlbits 


PLURAL. 

acres 

acrliim 

acri"biis 

acres 

acres 

acrlbiks 


acriiim 

acritoiis 
acriti 
acria, 
acril>iis. 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

152.   II.   ADJECTIVES  OF   Two   ENDINGS  have  in 
nominative  singular: 

M.  and  F.  Neut. 

1.  is  e,  for  positives. 

2.  ior  (or)         ius  (us),  for  comparatives. 
They  are  declined  as  follows  : 

Tristis,  sad.  Tristior,  more  sad.1 


the 


SINGULAR. 

M.  and  F. 

Neut. 

M.  and  F. 

Neut. 

N.  tristis 

tristl 

N.  tristior 

tristiiis 

G.  tristis 

tristis 

G.  tristioris 

tristioris 

D.  tristl 

tristl 

D.  tristiorl 

tristiorl 

A.  tristem 

tristl 

A.  tristior  ein. 

tristiiis 

V.  tristis 

tristl 

V.  tristior 

tristius 

A.  tristl 

tristl  ; 

A.  tristior  e"  (I) 

tristiorl  (l)  ; 

PLURAL. 

N.  tristes 

tristiai 

N.  tristior  es 

tristior  si, 

G,  tristiitm 

tristiii.111 

G.  tristiorikin. 

tristiorii-in 

D.  tristlbiis 

tristlbiis 

D.  tristioril>iis 

tristiorilJU-S 

A.  tristes 

tristifc 

A.  tristiores 

tristiorS, 

V.  trist^s 

tristia. 

V.  tristiores 

tristiorii 

A.  tristitoiks 

tristitoiis. 

A.  tristioril>tjLS 

tristiorit>iis. 

153.  III.  ADJECTIVES  OF  ONE  ENDING.  —  All  other  ad- 
jectives have  but  one  form  in  the  nominative  singular  for 
all  genders.  They  generally  end  in  s  or  a,  sometimes  in  I 
or  r,  and  are  declined  in  the  main  like  nouns  of  the  same 
endings.  The  following  are  examples : 


Felix, 

happy. 

Prudens, 

pnulent. 

SINGULAR. 

M.  and  F. 

Neut. 

M.  and  F. 

Neut, 

N.  iclix 

felix 

N. 

prudens 

prudens 

G.  fcllcis 

felicis 

G. 

prudentis 

prudentis 

D.  felicl 

felicl 

D. 

prudent! 

prudentl 

A.  felicem 

felix 

A. 

prudentem. 

prudens 

V.  felix 

felix 

V. 

prudens 

prudens 

A.  felled  (I) 

felice*  (I)  ;              A. 

prudent^  (1) 

prudente  (I)  ; 

l 

Comparative. 

See  1GO. 

ETYMOLOGY. ADJECTIVES. 


37 


PLURAL. 


AT.  fellces 

felicisi 

N.  prudentes 

prudenti^ 

G.  feliciiim 

feliciiim 

G.  prudentiikm 

prudentiiim 

D.  felicil>iis 

felicil>iis 

D.  prudentil>iis 

prudentil>iis 

A.  fellces 

feliciii 

A.  prudentes 

prudenti^ 

F  fellces 

feliciii 

V  prudentes 

prudent!^ 

A.  felicifriks 

fellcil>iis. 

A.  prudentlbits 

prudentlbiis. 

EXERCISE    XIII. 
I.     Vocabulary. 


Acer,  acris,  acre, 

sharp,  severe. 

Animal,  animalis,  11. 

animal. 

Brevis,  e, 

short,  brief. 

Crudelis,  e, 

cruel. 

Dolor,  doloris,  in. 

pain,  grief. 

Dux,  duels,  m. 

leader. 

Fertilis,  e, 

fertile. 

Fortis,  e, 

brave. 

Navalis,  e, 

naval. 

Omnis,  e, 

every,  all,  whole. 

Pugna,  ae,  f. 

battle. 

Sapiens,  sapientis, 

wise. 

Singularis,  e, 

singular,  remarkable. 

Utilis,  e, 

useful. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Dolor  acer.  2.  Dolores  acres.  3.  Lex  acris.  4.  Leg- 
ibus  acribus.  5.  Hostis  crudelis.  6.  Hostem  crudelem. 
7.  Miles  fortis.  8.  Virtus  militis1  fortis.  9.  Virtute  mili- 
tum1  fortium.  10.  Ager  fertilis.  11.  In  agro  fertili.  12. 
Agros  fertiles.  13.  In  agris  fertilibus.  14.  Post  vitam 
brevem.  15.  Pugnae  navales.  16.  Post  pugnas  navales. 
17.  Singularis  virtus.  18.  Singular!  virtute.  19.  Omne 
animal.  20.  Omnia  animalia. 


i  Genitive,  according  to  Rule  XYT. 


38  INTIIODUCTOKY   LATIN   BOOK. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

I.  A  useful  citizen.     2.   Of  useful   citizens.     3.  For  a 
useful  citizen.     4.  For  useful  citizens.     5.  Of  a  useful  citi- 
zen.    6.   The  wise  judge.     7.  Wise  judges.     8.   For  the 
wise  judge.     9.  For  wise  judges.     10.  Brave  soldiers.     11. 
For  brave  soldiers.     12.  A  brave  soldier.     13.  Of  the  brave 
soldier.     14.    The  brave  leader.     15.   Brave  leaders.     16. 
The  word  of  the  brave  leader.     17.  By  the  words  of  the 
brave  leader. 

COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

160.  Adjectives  have  three  forms  to  denote  different 
degrees  of  quality.     They  are  usually  called  the  Positive, 
the  Comparative,  and  the  Superlative  degree :  altus,  altior, 
altisslmus?  high,  higher,  highest. 

Comparatives  and  superlatives  are  sometimes  best  rendered  into 
English  by  too  and  very,  instead  of  more  and  most:  doctus,  learned; 
doctior,  more  learned,  or  too  learned ;  doctissimus,  most  learned,  or 
very  learned. 

161.  The  Latin,  like  the  English,  has  two  modes  of 
comparison : 

I.  Terminational  Comparison  —  by  endings. 

II.  Adverbial  Comparison  —  by  adverbs. 

I.    TEEMINATIONAL  COMPARISON. 

162.  Adjectives  are  regularly  compared  by  adding  to 
the  stem  of  the  positive  the  endings : 

Comparative.  Superlative. 

M.  F.  N.  M.  F.  N. 

ior,     ior,     ius.        issimus,      issima,    issimum. 

xEach  of  these  forms  of  the  adjective  is  declined.  Thus  altus  and 
altissimus  are  declined  like  bonus,  148:  ahus,  a,  um;  altl,  ae,  i,  etc. ;  altis- 
simus,  a,  urn ;  altissimi,  ae,  i,  etc.  Alt  ior  is  declined  like  tristior,  1 52  :  altior, 

uhitis :  nlf.foris,  etc. 


ETYMOLOGY. COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES.  39 

EXAMPLES. 

Altus,  altior,  altissimus:  high,  higher,  higJiest. 
levis,  levior,  levissimus :  light,  lighter,  lightest. 

II.    ADVERBIAL  COMPARISON. 

170.  Adjectives  which  want  the  terminational  compari- 
son form  the  comparative  and  superlative,  when  their  sig- 
nification requires  it,  by  prefixing  the  adverbs  magis,  more, 
and  maxime,  most,  to  the  positive  : 

Arduus,  magis  arduus,  maxime  arduus. 
Arduous,  more  arduous,  most  arduous. 

MODEL    FOR    PARSING. 

^Urator  clarior,   A  more  renowned  orator. 

Clarior  is  an  adjective  (146)  in  the  Comparative  degree  (160, 
162),  from  the  positive  clarus,  which  is  of  the  First  and  Second 
Declensions  (148).  Positive,  clarus;  STEM,  clar ;  Comparative,  cla- 
rior;  Superlative,  clarissimus.  Clarior  is  an  adjective  of  the  Third 
Declension,  declined  like  tristior  (152).  Singular :  N.  clarior,  clarius; 
G.  claridris,  clarions,  etc.1  It  is  in  the  Nominative  Singular  Mascu- 
line, and  agrees  with  its  noun  orator,  according  to  Rule  XXXIII.2 

EXERCISE    XIV. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Altus,  a,  iim,  high,  lofty. 

Clarus,  a,  iim,  distinguished,  renowned. 

Inter,  prep,  with  ace.  among,  in  the  midst  of. 

Mons,  montls,  m.  mountain. 

\^       II.     Translate  into  English. 
x^x. 

1.  OrutOT  clarus.  2.  Orator  clarior. 3  3.  Orator  claris- 
simus. 4.  Oratures  clari.  5.  Oratores  clariores.3  6.  Ora- 


1  Decline  through  all  the  cases  of  both  numbers, 

2  Give  the  Rule. 

3  Declined  like  tristior,  152.     Comparatives  and  superlatives,  as  well  as 
positives,  must  agree  with  their  nouns,  according  to  Rule  XXXIII.  p.  32. 

3 


40 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 


tores  clarissimi.  7.  Beata  vita.  8.  Beatior  vita.  9.  Bea- 
tissima  vita.  10.  Donum  gratum.  11.  Donum  gratius. 
12.  Donum  gratissimum.  13.  Dona  grata.  14.  Dona 
gratiora.  15.  Dona  gratissima.  16.  Milites  fortissimi. 
17.  Liber  utilis.  18.  Libri  utiliores.  19.  Libris  utilissi- 
rais.  20.  Mons  altns.  21.  Montes  altiores. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  A  fertile  field.  2.  A  more  fertile  field.  3.  The  most 
fertile  field.  4.  Fertile  fields.  5.  More  fertile  fields.  6. 
A  useful  life.  7.  A  more  useful  life.  8.  The  most  useful 
life.  9.  Useful  lives.  10.  More  useful  lives.  11.  The 
most  useful  lives.  12.  A  pleasing  song.  13.  A  more 
pleasing  song.  14.  The  most  pleasing  song. 


NUMERALS. 

171.  Numerals  comprise    numeral    adjectives  and  nu- 
meral adverbs. 

I.   NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES. 

172.  Numeral    adjectives    comprise    three    principal 
classes : 

1.  CARDINAL  NUMBERS  : *  unus,  one  ;  duo^  two. 

2.  ORDINAL  NUMBERS  : x primus^  first ;  secundus,  second. 

3.  DISTRIBUTIVES  : *  singuli,  one  by  one ;   blni,  two  by 

two,  two  each,  two  apiece. 

,-\__-  ~TS 

174.  TABLE  OF  NUMERAL  Aojia 


^                           "^  V^              ^***^ 

CARDINALS.    - 

^x'*"^ 
^     ORDINALS. 

"N 
DISTRIBUTIVES.    ; 

1.  finite,  unit,  uniim,              / 
2.  duo,  duae,  duo, 

primtis,  first, 
sScundus,  second, 

singtili,  one  by  one. 
bmi,  two  by  two. 

;5.  tres,  triii, 

tertius,  third, 

term  (trim). 

4.  quattuor, 

quartus,  fourth, 

quaterm. 

5-  quinque, 

quintiis,  fifth, 

quini. 

G.  sex, 

sextiis, 

seni. 

i  Cardinals  denote  simply  the  number  of  objects :  unus,  one ;  duo,  two. 
Ordinals  denote  the  place  of  an  object  in  a  series:  primus,  first;  secundus. 


ETYMOLOGY.  —  NUMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 


41 


7.  sept&n, 

Septimus, 

septeni. 

8.  octo, 

octavus, 

octuni. 

9.  novCm, 

nonus, 

noveni. 

10.  dgcSm, 

dScimus, 

deni. 

11.  undecim, 

undecimus, 

undeni. 

12.  duodecim, 

duodecimos, 

duodeni. 

13.  tredgcim,  or  de'cem  Ct  tres, 

tertius  decimus, 

terni  dem. 

20.  viginti, 

vicesimtis, 

viceni. 

2,     (  viginti  uniis, 

vicesimus  primus, 

vicem  singuli. 

"  I  uniis  £t  viginti, 

uniis  ^t  vicesimus, 

singuli  et  viceni 

30.  triginta, 

tricesimtts, 

triceni. 

40.  quadraginta, 

quadragesimus, 

quadrageni. 

50.  quinquaginta, 

quinquagesimus, 

quinquageni. 

100.  centum, 

centesimus, 

centeni. 

200.  ducenti,  ae,  a,                  i 

dticentesimus, 

duceni. 

1000.  milie,                                V 

millesimus, 

singiila  milliS^ 

- — ^ — \r* — 


•N-.OF  NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES. 
1.  Cardinals. 

1 75-  On  the  declension  of  cardinals,  observe, 

1.  That  the  units,  unus,  duo,  and  tres,  are  declined. 

2.  That  the  other  units,  all  the  tens,  and  centum^  are  in 
declinable. 

3.  That  the  hundreds  are  declined.3 

4.  That  miUe  is  sometimes  declined.2 

176.  The  first  three  cardinals  are  declined  as  follows: 

1.  Untis,  oiw. 


Singular. 

Plural 

N.  uniis, 

una, 

uniim, 

uni, 

unae, 

una, 

6r.  unius, 

unms, 

unms, 

unoriim, 

unarum, 

unoriim, 

D.  uni, 

uni, 

uni, 

unis, 

unis, 

unis, 

A.  unum, 

unam, 

unum, 

unos, 

unas, 

una, 

V.  une, 

una, 

uniim, 

A.  uno, 

una, 

uno; 

unis, 

unis, 

unis. 

second.     Distributives  denote  the  number  of  objects  taken  at  a  time:  sin- 
(juli,  one  by  one ;  llni,  two  by  two. 

1  These  are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus  (148) ;  ducenti,  ae,  a,  two 
hundred. 

2  Though  only  in  the  plural,  and  only  when  used  substantively.    It  is 
tiien  declined  like  the  plural  of  mare  (50) ;  millia,  millium,  milllbus. 


4*2  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

2.  Duo,  two.  3.  Tres,  three. 


N-  duo, 

duae, 

duo, 

tres,  m. 

and/. 

tria,  n. 

G.  duorum, 

duartim, 

duorum, 

trium, 

trium, 

D.  duobus, 

duabtis, 

duobus, 

tribiis, 

tribiis, 

A.  duos,  duo, 

duas, 

duo, 

-  tres, 

tria,, 

A.  duobus, 

duabiis, 

duobus. 

tribiis, 

tribGs. 

EXERCISE     XV. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Annus,  i,  m.  year. 

Classis,  classis,  /.  fleet. 

Fortitude,  fortitudinis,  /.         fortitude,  bravery. 

Imperium,  ii,  n.  reign,  power. 

Navis,  navis,  f.  sliip. 

Proeliiim,  ii,  n.  battle. 

Vir,  vm,  m.  man,  hero. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Unus 1  liber.  2.  Duo x  libri.  3.  Liber  primus.1  4, 
Liber  secundus.  5.  Tres  libri.  6.  Tertius  liber.  7.  Tria 
bella.  8.  Post  tria  bella.  9.  Post  tertium  bellum.  10. 
Ante  quartum  bellum.  11.  Quattuor 2  anni.  12.  Post  bel- 
lum quinque  annorum.  13.  Decem2  dies.  14.  Decimus 
dies.3  15.  Decem  horae.  16.  Decima  hora.  17.  Decem 
proeJia.  18.  Decimum  proelium.  19.  Hora,  diei  decima. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

\.  Five  friends.  2.  Of  five  friends.  3.  The  fifth  year. 
4.  The  fifth  day.  5.  The  fifth  present.  6.  With  five  pres- 
ents. 7.  Eight  books.  8.  With  eight  books.  9.  The 
eighth  book.  10.  Before  the  eighth  book.  11.  The  bra- 
very of  two  soldiers.  12.  By  the  bravefy  of  two  soldiers. 

1  Numeral  adjectives  agree  with  their  nouns,  like  other  adjectives. 

2  The  indeclinable  numeral  adjectives  (175,  2)  maybe  used  without 
change  of  form  with  nouns  of  any  gender,  and  in  any  case, 

2  Dies,  it  will  be  remembered,  is  generally  masculine. 


ETYMOLOGY. PKOXOUNS.  43 

CHAPTER    III. 

PRONOUNS.      ' 

182.  The  Pronoun  is  that  part  of  speech  which  prop- 
erly supplies  the  place  of  nouns  :  ego,  I ;  tu,  thou. 

1 83.  Pronouns  are  divided  into  six  classes : 

1.  Personal  Pronouns  :  tu,  thou. 

2.  Possessive  Pronouns :  meus,  my. 

3.  Demonstrative  Pronouns :  liic,  this. 

4.  Relative  Pronouns :  qui,  who. 

5.  Interrogative  Pronouns :  quis,  who  ? 

6.  Indefinite  Pronouns :  aUquis^  some  one. 

I.    PERSONAL  PKONOUNS. 

184.  Personal  Pronouns,  so  called  because  they  desig- 
nate the  person  of  the  noun  which  they  represent,  are  ego, 
I ;  tu,  thou;  sui  (Nom.  not  used),  of  himself,  herself,  itself. 

They  are  declined  as  follows  : 

SINGULAR. 


N. 

ego 

tu 

G. 

mei 

tul 

sui 

D. 

mihi 

tibi 

sib! 

A. 

me 

te 

se 

V. 

tu 

A. 

me  ; 

te; 

se; 

PLURAL. 

N. 

nds 

VOS 

G. 

nostrum  7 
nostri      j 

vestrum  ) 
yestri      ) 

sui 

D. 

nobis 

vobis 

sib! 

A. 

nos 

VOS 

se 

V. 

VOS 

A. 

nobis. 

vobls 

se. 

1.  Substantive  Pronouns. — Personal  pronouns  are  also  called  Sub- 
stantive pronouns,  because  they  are  always  used  as  substantives. 

2.  Reflexive  Pronoun.  —  Suirfrom  its  reflexive  signification,  of  1dm- 
selfj  etc.,  is  often  called  the  Reflexive  pronoun. 


44 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN  BOOK. 


II.    POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

185.  From  Personal  pronouns  are  formed  the  Possess- 
ives  : 


meus,  ray, 
tuns,  thy,  your, 
suns,  his,  her,  its, 


noster,  our. 
vester,  your. 
suus,  their. 


They  are  declined  as  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second 
declensions ; 1  meus,  mea,  meum  ;  noster,  nostra,  nostrum  : 
but  meus  has  in  the  vocative  singular  masculine  generally 
mi,  sometimes  meus. 

III.    DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

186.  Demonstrative  Pronouns,  so  called  because  they 
specify  the  objects  to  which  they  refer,  are 

Hie,  itte,  iste,  ipse,  is,  idem. 
They  are  declined  as  follows : 

Hie,  this. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N.  liic 

haec 

hoc 

hi 

liae 

liaec 

G.  hujiis 

hujiis 

hujiis 

lioriim 

liariim 

lioriim 

D.  hulc 

hulc 

hulc 

his 

Ins 

lllS 

A.  hunc 

hanc 

hoc 

hos 

has 

haec 

V. 

A.  hoc 

hac 

hoc; 

his 

his 

Ins. 

Ille,  he  or  that. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N.  illc 

ilia 

illiid 

illl 

illae 

ilia 

G.   illlus 

illlus 

illlus 

illdrum 

i  liariim 

illdriim 

D.  illl 

illl 

illl 

illis 

illis 

illis 

A.  ilium 

ilium 

illiid 

illos 

illas 

ilia 

V. 

A.  illo 

ilia 

illo; 

illis 

illis 

illis. 

1  See  bonus  and  aeger,  148. 


ETYMOLOGY. PRONOUNS. 


45 


Iste,  that. 

Iste,  that,  is  declined  like  itte.  It  usually  refers  to  ob- 
jects which  are  present  to  the  person  addressed,  and  some- 
times expresses  contempt. 

Ipse,  self,  lie. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

J/; 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

A",  ipse 

ipsa 

ipsum 

ipsl 

.  ipsae 

ipsa 

G.  ipsius 

ipsius 

ipsius 

ipsoriim 

ipsarum 

ipsoriim 

D.  ipsl 

ipsl 

ipsl 

ipsls 

ipsls 

ipsls 

A.  ipsum 

ipsam 

ipsum 

ipsos 

ipsas 

ipsa 

V.  > 

A.  ipso 

ipsa 

ipso;   - 

ipsls 

ipsls 

ipsls. 

SINGULAR. 

Is,  he,  that. 

PLURAL. 

4- 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

^V.  is 

ea 

id 

ii 

eae 

ea 

G.  ejus 

ejus 

ejus 

eoriim 

ear  urn 

eoriim 

D.  el 

el 

el 

iis  (els) 

iis  (els) 

iis  (els) 

A.  eum 

earn 

id 

eos 

eas 

ea 

F. 

^4.  eo 

ea 

eo; 

iis  (els) 

iis  (els) 

iis  (els). 

Idem,  the  same. 
Idem,  compounded  of  is  and  dem,  is  declined  like  is,  but 
shortens  isdem  to  idem,  and  iddem  to  idem,  and  changes  m 
to  n  before  the  ending  dem  ;  thus : 


SINGULAR. 

M.  F.  N. 

N.  Idem        eadem  idem 

G.  ejusdem  ejusdem  ejusdem 

D.  eidem      eidem  eidem 

A.  eundem  eandem  idSm 
V. 

A .  eodem     eadem  eodem ; 


PLURAL. 

M.  F.  N. 

ildem          eaedem  eadem 

eorundem   earundem  eorundent 

iisde'ra          iisdem  iisdem 

eosdem        easdem  eadem 


ii*dem 


iisdem         iisdem. 


IV.     RELATIVE  PKONOUNS. 

187.  The  Relative  qui,  who,  so  called  because  it  relates 
to  some  noun  or  pronoun,  expressed  or  understood,  called 
its  antecedent,  is  declined  as  follows : 


1NTRODUCTOKY   LATIN   BOOK. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N.  qui 

quae 

quod 

qui 

quae 

quae 

G.  cujiis 

cujus 

cujus 

quorum 

quaruni 

quorum 

D.  cul 

CUl 

CUl 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

A  .   quern 
V. 

quam 

quod 

quos 

quas 

quae 

A  .   quo 

qua 

qu5; 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

quae 
cujus 
cul 
quam 

quid 
cujus 

CUl 

quid 

qui 
quorum 
quibus 
quos 

quae 
quariim 
quibus 
quas 

quae 
quorum 
quibus 
quae 

qua 

quo; 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus. 

Y.    INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

188.  Interrogative  Pronouns  are  used  in  asking  ques- 
tions.    The  most  important  are 

Quis  and  qui,  with  their  compounds. 
Quis  (who,  which,  what?)    is  generally  used   substan- 
tive! y,  and  is  declined  as  follows: 

M, 

N.  quis 

G.  cujus 

D.  cul 

A.  quern 

V. 

A.  quo 

Qui  (which,  what?)  is  generally  used  adjectively,  and  is 
declined  like  the  relative  qui. 

VI.     INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 

189.  Indefinite  Pronouns  do  not  refer  to  any  definite 
persons  or  things.     The  most  important  are 

Quis  and  qui,  with  their  compounds. 

.    190.   Quis,  any  one,  qui,  any  one,  any,  are  the  same  in 
form  and  declension  as  the  interrogatives  quis  and  qui.1 

191.  From  quis  and  qui  are  formed 

I.   The  Indefinites : 

aliquis,  aliqua,  aliquld         or  aliquod,  some,  some  one. 

quispiam,  quaepiam,  quidpiam     or  quodpiam,  some,  some  one. 

quidam,  quaedam,  quiddam      or  quoddam,  certain,  certain  one. 

quisquam,  quidquam,  any  one. 

1  But  after  si,  nisi,  ne,  and  num,  the  Feminine  Singular  and  the  Neuter 
Plural  have  quae  or  qua;  si  quae,  si  qua.  In  like  manner,  allquu  has 
aliqua  in  the  Feminine  Singular  and  in  the  Neuter  Plural. 


ETYMOLOGY.  —  PHOXOUNS.  47 

II.   jT/i?  General  Indefinites : 

quiscpe,       quaeque,  "  quidque       or  quodquc.     tvery,  every  one. 
quivis,          quacvis,      quidvis         or  quodvis,       any  one  you  please. 
quilibet,       quaellbet,  quidlibct     or  quodlib'ef,    any  one  you  please. 

EXERCISE  XVI. 

I.     Vocabulary. 

Consilium,  il,  n.  design,  plan. 

Epistola,  ae,  /.  letter. 

Ex,  j9rep.  with  all.  from. 

Insula,  ae,  /.  island. 

Parens,  parentis,  r,i.  and  /.  parent. 

Pars,  partis,  /.  part,  portion. 

Patria,  ae,  /.  country,  native  country. 

Praeclariis,  a,  iim,  distinguished. 

Pratutn,  i,  n.  meadow. 

Pro,  prep,  with  dbl.  for,  in  behalf  of. 

Qirivis,  quaevls,  quodvis,  whoever,  whatever. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Mihi,  tibi,  sibi.  2.  Ad  me,1  ad  te.  3.  Contra  nos, 
contra  se.  4.  Ante  vos,  ante  nos.  5.  Pro  vobis.1  G. 
Mea 2  vita.  7.  Patria  tua.  8.  Pro  patria  tua.2  9.  Con- 
tra patriam  tuam.  10.  Nostra  consilia.  11.  Nostris2  con- 
siliis.  12.  Vestri  patres.  13.  In  nostra  patria.  14.  Hie2 
puer,  hi  pueri.  ~^>.  Haec  corona,  hae  coronae.  16.  Hoc 
donum,  liaec  dona.  17.  Haec  nrbs  praeclara.  18.  Ex  liac 
vita.  19.  Illius  libri.  20.  In  ea  pugna.  21.  In  eodem. 
prato.  22.  Quac2  urbs? 

1  Sec  184,  1.     Substantive  pronouns  are  used  in  the  several  cases  like 
nouns,  and  are  parsed  by  the  same  rules.     Sec  Eule  XXXII.  432.     Other 
pronouns  are  sometimes  used  as  nouns,  and  parsed  in  the  same  way. 

2  The  Possessive,  the  Demonstrative,  and  the  Interrogative  pronouns,  in 
this  exercise,  are  all  used  as  adjectives,  and  agree  with  their  nouns,  like 
any  other  adjectives,  according  to  Rule  XXXIII.  438,  p.  32.     Hence  mea 
is  in  the  Nominative  Singular  Feminine,  to  agree  with  vita;  nostris,  in 
the  Dative  or  Ablative  Plural  Neuter,  to  agree  with  consiliis ;  hie,  in  the 
Nominative  Singular  Masculine,  to  agree  with  pucr, 

\ 


48  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  We,  you.  2.  You,  me,  himself.  3.  For  you,  for  me, 
.for  himself.  4.  Of  .himself,  of  you.  5.  Against  ~  you, 
against  me.  6.  My  book,  your  book,  his  book.  7.  My 
books,  your  books,  his  books.  8.  Our  parents,  your  par- 
ents, their  parents.  9.  This  letter,  that  letter*  10.  These 
letters,  those  letters.  11*  This  city,  a that  city*  >  12.  These 
cities,  those  cities.  13.  After  that  victory.  14.  The  same 
words.  15.  With  the  same  words. 


CHAPTER  IV. 
VERBS. 

192.  Verbs  in  Latin,  as   in  English,  express  existence, 
condition,  or  action :   est,  he  is ;   dormit,  he  is  sleeping ; 
legit,  he  reads. 

1 93.  Verbs  comprise  two  principal  classes : 

I.  TRANSITIVE  VERBS,  —  which  admit  a  direct  object 
of  their  action :  servum l  verberat,  he  beats  the  slave. 

II.  INTRANSITIVE  VERBS,  —  which  do  not  admit  such 
an  object :  puer  currit,  the  boy  runs. 

194.  Verbs   have    Voice,   Mood,    Tense,  Number,  and 
Person. 

I.     VOICES. 

1 95.  There  are  two  Voices : 2 

I.  THE  ACTIVE  VOICE,  —  which  represents  the  subject 
as  acting  or  existing :  pater  filium  amat,  the  father  loves 
his  son ;  est,  he  is. 

1  Here  servum,  the  slave,  is  the  direct  object  of  the  action  denoted  by 
the  verb  beats:  beats  (what?)  the  slave. 

2  Voice  shows  whether  the  subject  acts  (Active  Voice),  or  is  acted  upon 
(Passive  Voice). 


BTYMOLOGY. VERBS.  49 

II.  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE,  —  which  represents  the  sub- 
ject as  acted  upon  by  some  other  person  or  thing:  filius  a 
patre  amdtur,  the  son  is  loved  by  his  father. 

II.    MOODS. 

196.     Moods1  are  either  Definite  or  Indefinite: 
I.    The  Definite  or  Finite  Moods   make   up   the   Finite 
Verb ;  they  are : 

1.  The  INDICATIVE  MOOD,  —  which  either  asserts  some- 
thing as  SL  fact,  or  inquires  after  the  fact :  legit,  he  is  read- 
ing ;  leyitne,  is  he  reading  ? 

2.  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD,  —  which  expresses,  not  an 
actual  fact,  but  a  possibility  or  conception,  often  rendered 
by  may,  can,  etc. :  Ugat,  he  may  read,  let  him  read. 

3.  The   IMPERATIVE   MOOD,  —  which   expresses  a  com- 
mand or  an  entreaty :  lege,  read  thou. 

II.  The  Indefinite  Moods  express  the  meaning  of  the 
verb  in  the  form  of  nouns  or  adjectives ;  they  are: 

1.  The  INFINITIVE,  —  which,  like  the  English  Infinitive, 
gives  the  simple  meaning  of  the  verb,  without  any  neces- 
sary reference  to  person  or  number  :  legere,  to  read. 

2.  The  GERUND,  —  which  gives  the  meaning  of  the  verb 
in  the  form  of  a  verbal  noun  of  the  second  declension,  used 
only  in  the  genitive,  dative,  accusative,  and  ablative  singu- 
lar.    It  corresponds  to  the  English  participial  noun  in  ING  : 
amandi,  of  loving ;  amandi  causa,  for  the  sake  of  loving. 

3.  The  SUPINE,  —  which  gives  the  meaning  of  the  verb 
in  the  form  of  a  verbal  noun  of  the  fourth  declension,  used 
only  in  the  accusative  and  ablative  singular :  amdtum,  to 
love,  for  loving ;  amatu,  to  be  loved,  in  loving. 

4.  The  PARTICIPLE, — which,  like  the  English  Participle, 
gives  the  meaning  of  the  verb  in  the  form  of  an  adjective. 

1  Mood,  or  Mode,  means  manner,  and  relates  to  the  manner  in  which 
the  meaning  of  the  verb  is  expressed,  as  will  be  seen  by  observing  the 
force  of  the  several  Moods. 


60  INTRODUCTORY    LATIN   BQOIv. 

A  Latin  verb  may  have  four  participles :  two  in  the  Active,  the 
Present  and  Future,  —  amans,  loving ;  amaturus,  about  to  love : 
and  two  in  the  Passive,  the  Perfect  and  Future,  —  amdtus,  loved ; 
amandus,  deserving  to  be  loved. 

III.    TENSES. 
1 97.  There  are  six  tenses : l 

I.     THREE  TENSES  FOR  INCOMPLETE  ACTION: 

1.  Present :  amo^  I  love. 

2.  Imperfect :  amabam,  I  was  loving. 

3.  Future :  amabo,  I  shall  love. 

II.     THREE  TENSES  FOR  COMPLETED  ACTION: 

1.  Perfect :  amavi^  I  have  loved,  I  loved. 

2.  Pluperfect :  amaveram,  I  had  loved. 

3.  Future  Perfect :  amavero,  I  shall  have  loved. 

198.     REMARKS  ON  TENSES. 

1.  Present  Perfect  and  Historical  Perfect.  —  The  Latin  Perfect 
sometimes  corresponds  to  our  Perfect  with  have  (have  loved),  and 
is  called  the  Present  Perfect,  or  Perfect  Definite ;  and  sometimes  to 
our  Imperfect  or  Past  (loved),  and  is  called  the  Historical  Perfect, 
or  Perfect  Indefinite. 

2.  Principal  and  Historical.  —  Tenses  are  also  distinguished  as 

1)  Principal:  —  Present,  Present  Perfect,  Future,  and  Future 
Perfect. 

2)  Historical :  —  Imperfect,  Historical  Perfect,  and  Pluperfect. 

3.  Tenses  Wanting.  —  The   Subjunctive  wants  the  Future  and 
Future  Perfect ;  the  Imperative  has  only  the  Present  and  Future ; 
the  Infinitive,  only  the  Present,  Perfect,  and  Future. 

IV.     NUMBERS. 
1 99.  There  are  two  Numbers : 2  SINGULAR  and  PLURAL. 

1  Tense  means  time,  and  is  employed  to  designate  the  time  of  an  action 
or  event. 

2  Number  in  verbs  corresponds,  it  will  be  observed,  to  number  in  nouns, 
Sen  37. 


ETYMOLOGY. VERBS.  51 

Y.     PERSONS. 

200.  There  arc   three   Persons:1   FIRST,  SECOND,  and 
THIRD. 

CONJUGATION. 

201.  Regular  verbs  are  inflected,  or  conjugated,  in  four 
different  ways,  and  are  accordingly  divided  into  Four  Con- 
jugations,  distinguished  from  each  other  by  the 

INFINITIVE    ENDINGS. 
Conj.  I.  Conj.  II.  Conj.  III.  Conj.  IV. 

are,  ere,  ere,  ire. 

202.  Principal  Parts.  —  Four  forms   of  the  verb  —  the 
Present  Indicative,  Present  Infinitive,  Perfect  Indicative, 
and  Supine 2  —  are  called,  from  their  importance,  the  Prin- 
cipal Parts  of  the  verb. 

203.  Entire  Conjugation.  —  In  any  regular  verb, 

1.  The  VERB-STEM  may  be  found  by  dropping  the  In- 
finitive Ending:  amare /  stem,  am. 

2.  The  PRINCIPAL  PARTS  may  be  formed  from  this  stem 
by  means  of  proper  endings. 

3.  The  ENTIRE  CONJUGATION  of  the  verb  through  all  its 
parts  may  be  readily  formed  from  these  Principal  Parts  by 
means  of  the  proper  endings.3 

1  Person  in  verbs  corresponds,  it  will  be  observed,  to  person  in  nouns. 
Sec  37. 

2  In  the  Active  Voice,  all  these  four  forms  are  usually  given  as  Princi- 
pal Parts ;  but,  in  the  Passive,  .only  the  first  three. 

3  In  the  Paradigms  of  regular  verbs,  the  endings,  both  those  which 
distinguish  the  Principal  Parts  and  those  which  distinguish  the  forms 
derived  from  those  parts,  are  separately  indicated,  and  should  be  carefully 
noticed. 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 


204.  Sum,  lam. 

Sum  is  used  as  an  auxiliary  in  the  passive  voice  of  regular  verbs. 
Accordingly,  its  conjugation,  though  quite  irregular,  must  be  given 
at  the  outset. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 
Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Incl. 

sum,  esse,  •  fui, 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 
/  am. 


Supine. 

1 


turn, 
es, 
cst, 

tram, 
eras, 
erat, 

t-rd, 
eris, 
crir, 

SINGULAR. 

I  am, 
thou  art? 
Tie  is; 
IMPE 
7t 
I  was, 
thou  wast, 
he  was  ; 
FUT 
/  shall  o 
I  shall  be, 
thou  icilt  be, 
lie  will  be; 
PERI 

sumus, 

estis, 
sunt, 

RFECT. 

cos. 

eramus, 
eratis, 
erant, 

[JRE. 

r  will  be. 
erimus, 
eritis, 

erant, 

^ECT. 

PLURAL. 

we  are, 
you  are, 
they  are. 

ice  were, 
you  were, 
they  10  ere. 

we  shall  be, 
you  will  be, 
they  will  be. 

/  have  been,  was. 

fui, 
faistl, 

Cult., 

I  have  been, 
thou  hast  been, 

he  has  been; 

fulmus, 
fuistis, 
fuSrunt,  ) 
fuere,      ) 

ive  have  been, 
you  have  been, 

they  have  been. 

• 

PLUPERFECT. 

/  had  been. 

fueram, 
fueras, 

fuer  at, 

J  had  been, 
thou  hadst  been, 
he  had  been; 
FUTURE 

fu  eramus, 
fueratis,' 
fuerant, 
PERFECT. 

.  we  had  been, 
you  had  been,    . 
they  had  been. 

J  shall  or  will  have  been. 

fuerf), 
fneris, 
fuerlt, 

I  shall  have  been, 
thou  wilt  have  been, 
he  will  have  been  ; 

fu  erimus, 
fueritis, 
fuerint, 

we  shall  have  been, 
you  will  have  been, 
they  will  have  been. 

1  The  Supine  is  wanting  in  this  verb. 

2  Or,  you,  are :  thou  is  confined  mostly  to  solemn  discourse  :  in  ordinary 
English,  you  are  is  used  both  in  the  singular  and  in  the  plural. 


ETYMOLOGY. VEKB    SUM. 


53 


cssSm, 

esses, 
esset, 


fuerim, 
fueris, 
fuerlt, 


fuissem, 

fuisses, 

fuisset, 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 
/  may  or  can  be.1 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

slm, 

ElS, 

lit, 

/  may  be, 
thou  mayst  be, 
he  may  be  ; 

1  simus, 

1    SltlS, 

1  sint, 

we  may  be, 
you  may  be, 
they  may  be. 

IMPERFECT. 

I  might,  could,  would,  or  should  be. 


I  miyht  be, 
thou  mightst  be, 
he  might  be  ; 


essemus, 

essetis, 

essent, 

PERFECT. 

/  may  or  can  have  been. 


I  may  have  been, 
thou  mayst  have  been, 
he  may  have  been ; 


fuerlmus, 

fueritis, 

fuerint, 


we  might  be, 
you  might  be, 
they  might  be. 


we  may  have  been, 
you  may  have  been, 
they  may  have  been. 


PLUPERFECT. 

I  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have  been. 


I  might  have  been, 
thou  mightst  have  been, 
he  might  have  been; 


fuissemus,  we  might  have  been, 
fuissetis,  you  might  have  been, 
fuissent,  they  might  have  been. 


I  M  P  E  11  A  T  I  Y  E. 


PRES.  6s, 
FUT.     esto, 
est5, 


be  thou, 
thou  shalt  be,- 
he  shall  be; 


INFINITIVE. 


PRES.  essc, 
PERF.  fuisse, 


to  be. 

to  have  been. 


FUT.     futuriis 3  essc,  to  be  about  tobe. 


este,  be  ye. 

estote,  ye  shall  be, 

suiitS,  they  shall  be. 

PARTICIPLE. 


FUT.  futuriis,5         about  to  be. 


1  The  Subjunctive  is  sometimes  best  rendered  by  let:  sit,  he  maybe, 
may  he  be,  let  him  be. 

2  The  Future  is  sometimes  best  rendered  like  the  Present,  or  with  let: 
csto,  thou  shah  be,  or  be  thou ;  sunto,  they  shall  be,  or  let  them  be. 

3  Futurus  is  declined  like  bonus;  N.  faturus,  a,  urn,  G.  futuri,  ae,  i;  so 
in  the  Infinitive :  faturus,  a,  um  esse. 


54  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN    BOOK. 


BULE  XXXV.  — Verb  with  Subject. 

460.  A  Finite1  Verb  agrees  with  its  Subject2  in 
NUMBER  and  PERSON: 

Deus  nmndum  aedificavit,3  God  made  the  world.  Cic.  Ego  reges 
ejeci,  vos  tjrannos  introducitis,  I  have  banished  kings,  you  introduce 
tyrants.  Cic. 

1.  PARTICIPLES  IN  COMPOUND  TENSES.  —  These  agree  with  the 
subject,  according  to  Rule  XXXIII.  page  32: 

Thebani  accusati  sunt,4  The  Thebans  were  accused.  Cic. 

2.  SUBJECT  OMITTED.  —  The  subject  is  generally  omitted  — 

1)  When  it  is  a  Personal  Pronoun,  or  can  be  readily  supplied 
from  the  context : 

Discipulos  moneo,5ut  stiidia  ament,5  /  instruct  pupils  to  love6  their 
studies.  Quint. 

1  Sec  196,  I. 

2  With  4ho  Active  Voice  of  a  Transitive  Verb,  the  Subject  represents 
iho  person  (or  thing,  one  or  more)  who  performs  the  action ;  as,  Dens 
in  the  first  example,  God  made:  but,  with  the  Passive  Voice,  it  represents 
the  person  (or  thing,  one  or  more)  who  receives  the  action,  i.e.  is  acted 
upon,  as,  Tkebdnif  460,  1 :  the  Thebans  were  accused. 

3  Aedificavit  is  in  the  Third  Person  and  in  the  Singular  Number,  be- 
cause its  subject  deus  is  in  that  person  and  number.     Ejeci  is  in  the  First 
Person  Singular,  to  agree  with  its  subject  ego;  and  introducitis  in  the 
Second  Person  Plural,  to  agree  with  its  subject  vos. 

4  The  verb  accusati  sunt  is  in  the  Third  Person  Plural,  to  agree  with 
its   subject  Thebani,  according  to   Rule  XXXV. ;    but    the  participle 
accusati,  which  is  one  element  of  the  verb,  is  in  the  Nominative  Plural 
Masculine,  to  agree  with  its  noun  Thebani,  according  to  Rule  XXXIII. 

6  The  subject  of  moneo  is  ego.  It  is  omitted,  because  it  is  a  Personal 
Pronoun,  and  is,  accordingly,  fully  implied  in  the  verb,  as  the  ending  eo 
shows,  as  we  shall  soon  see,  that  the  subject  cannot  be  you,  he,  or  they, 
but  must  be  7. 

Ul — ament  means  literally  that  they  may  love.  The  subject  of  ament  is  tho 
pronoun  ii,  they,  referring  to  discipulos.  It  is  omitted,  partly  because 
it  is  implied  in  the  ending  ent,  but  more  especially  because  it  can  be  so 
readily  supplied  from  discipulos,  which  shows  who  are  here  meant  by  they 

G  To  love,  or,  more  literally,  that  they  may  love. 


ETYMOLOGY. VERB   SUM.  55 

The  Pronoun  may  be  expressed  for  emphasis  or  contrast,  as  in 
the  second  example  under  the  rule. 

I.     DIRECTIONS  FOR  PARSING  VERBS. 

In  parsing  a  verb, 

1.  Tell  whether  it  is   transitive  or  intransitive   (193), 
name  the  Conjugation  to  which  it  belongs,  give  the  Pres- 
ent Indicative  Active  and  the  Stem  (203). 

2.  Give  the  Principal  Parts  (202),  and  inflect  the  tense 
in  which  the  given  form  is  found.1 

3.  Give  the  voice,  mood,  tense,  number,  and  person. 

4.  Name  the  subject,  and  give  the  Rule  for  agreement. 

MODELS  FOR  PARSING  THE  VERB  SUM. 

1.  Sum  with  Subject. 
ISTos2  eramus,          We  were. 

Eramus  is  an  intransitive  irregular3  verb,  from  sum.  Principal 
Parts  :  sum,  esse,fui, 4.  Inflection  of  tense  (Imperfect  Indica- 
tive) :  eram,  eras,  eral,  eramus,  erdtis,  erant.  The  form  eramus  is 
found  in  the  Indicative  mood,  Imperfect  tense,  First  person,  Plural 
number,  and  agrees  with  its  subject  nos,  according  to  Rule  XXXV. : 
"  A  Finite  Verb  agrees  with  its  Subject  in  NUMBER  and  PERSON." 

2.  Sum  loithout  Subject.5 
Fui,  I  have  been. 

Fui  is  an  intransitive  irregular  verb,  from  sum.  Principal  Parts  : 
sum,  esse,  fui.  Inflection  of  tense  (Perfect  Indicative)  :  fui,  faisti, 

1  That  is,  if  the  form  occurs  in  a  given  tense  of  the  Indicative,  give 
the  several  forms  for  the  different  persons  and  numbers  in  that  tense  and 
mood.     The  teacher  may  also  find  it  convenient  to  require  the  synopsis 
of  the  mood  till  the  required  tense  is  found. 

2  Nos  is  the  Subject.   With  an  intransitive  verb,  the  Subject  represents 
the  person  (or  thing)  who  is  in  the  condition,  or  state,  denoted  by  the 
verb. 

3  Hence  it  does  not  belong  to  cither  of  the  regular  conjugations. 

4  The  Supine  is  wanting. 

6  That  is,  without  any  subject  expressed. 


56  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

fuit ;  fuimus,  fuistis,  fuerunt,  or  fuere.  The  form  ful  is  found  in 
the  Indicative  mood,  Perfect  tense,  First  person,  Singular  number, 
and  agrees  with  its  subject  ego  omitted  (though  fully  implied1  in  the 
ending  {  of  fui),  according  to  Rule  XXXY. 

EXERCISE   XVII. 
I.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Sum,  sumus,  sunt.2  2.  Es,  est,  estis.  3.  Eram,  era- 
mus.2  4.  Erat,  erant.  5.  Eris,  eritis.2  6.  Erit,  erunt. 
7.  Fui,  fueram,  fuero.  8.  Fuimus,  fueramus,  fuermius. 
9.  Fuisti,  fuistis.  10.  Fuit,  fuerunt.  11.  Fuerat,  fuerant. 
12.  Fuerit,  fuerint.  13.  Sim,  simus.  14.  Sit,  sint.  15. 
Essem,  esseimis.  16.  Esset,  essent.  IT.  Fuerim,  fuissem. 
18.  Fuerimus,  fuissemus.  19.  Fuerit,  fuerint.  20.  Fuisset, 
fuisscnt.  21.  Es,  estc. 

II.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  He3  is,  they3  are.  2.  He  has  been,  they  have  been. 
3.  He  will  be,  they  will  be.  4.  He  was,  they  were.  5.  He 
will  have  been,  they  will  have  been.  6.  He  had  been, 
they  had  been.  7.  I s  was,  you  were.  8.  We  have  been, 
you  have  been.  9.  You  may  be,  they  may  be.  10.  He 
would  be,  they  would  be.  11.  I  might  have  been,  we 
might  have  been. 

1  Sec  Rule  XXXY.,  2,  together  with  the  note. 

2  In  parsing  the  forms  contained  in  this  Exercise,  observe  the  second 
Model  just  given.     If  the  verb  is  of  the  first  person,  supply,  as  subject, 
the  personal  pronoun  (184)  of  the  first  person;  i.e.,  ego  for  the  singular, 
and  nos  for  the  plural.     If  the  verb  is  of  the  second  person,  supply  the 
personal  pronoun  of  the  second  person ;  i.e.,  ta  for  the  singular,  and  vos 
for  the  plural.     If  the  verb  is  of  the  third  person,  supply  the  demonstra- 
tive pronoun  is  (186)  for  the  singular,  and  ii  for  the  plural,  as  the  per- 
sonal pronoun  sui  is  not  used  in  the  Nominative :   hence,  ego  sum,  nos 
sumus,  ii  sunt. 

.  3  The  English  pronouns  in  this  Exercise  arc  not  to  be  rendered  by  the 
corresponding  Latin  pronouns,  as  the  latter  may  be  implied  in  the  ending 
of  the  verb,  as  in  the  Latin  forms  above :  hence,  he  is  =  est. 


ETYMOLOGY. VERB    SUM.  57 


SUM  WITH   SUBJECT  AND   ADJECTIVE. 

RULE  III  — Subject  Nominative. 

367.  The  Subject  of  a  Finite1  Yerb  is  put  in  the 
Nominative : 

Servius2  regnavit,  Servius  reigned.  Liv.  Patent  portae,  The 
rjates  are  open.  Cic.  Rex  vlcit,  The  king  conquered.  Liv. 

1.  The  Subject  is  always  a  substantive,,  a  pronoun,  or  some  word 
or  clause  used  substantively : 

Ego  reges  cjeci,  /  have  banished  kings.  Cic. 

2.  SUBJECT  OMITTED.      See  460,  2  ;  page  54. 

MODEL  FOE  PARSING  SUBJECTS. 

Rex  vicit,   The  king  conquered. 

Hex  is  a  noun  (31)  of  tlie  Third  Declension,  as  it  has  is  in  the 
Genitive  Singular  (40)  ;  of  Class  I.,  as  it  ha»  a  nominative  ending  s 
(x  =  g-s,  of  which  s  is  the  ending,  as  g  belongs  to  the  stem.  See 
50, 1.  note)  ;  STEM,  reg.  Singular :  rex,  regis,  regi,  regem,  rex,  rege. 
Plural :  reges,  regum,  regibus,  reges,  reges,  regibus.  It  is  of  the  Mas- 
culine gender,  by  35, 1.  1. ;  is  in  the  Nominative  Singular;  and  is 
the  subject  of  vicit,  according  to  Rule  III. :  "  The  Subject  of  a 
Finite  Yerb  is  put  in  the  Nominative." 

EXERCISE   XVIII. 
I.      Vocabulary. 

Cato,  Catonis,  m.  Cato,  a  distinguished  Roman. 

Crudus,  a,  iim,  unripe. 

Diligens,  Dlligentis,  diligent. 

Discipulus,  I,  m.  pupil. 

1  Sec  196, 1. 

2  In  these  examples,  the  subjects  arc  Servius,  portae,  and  rex. 


58  INTRODUCTORY    LATIN   BOOK. 

Germania,  ae,  /.  Germany. 

Jucundiis,  a,  uin.  pleasant,  delightful. 

Laudabilis,  e.  praiseworthy,  laudable 

Maturiis,  a,  iim.  ripe. 

Pomiim,  i,  n.  fruit. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Pax1  jucunda2  est.3  2.  Pax  jucunda  erit.  3.  Vita 
brevis  est.  4.  Cato  bonus  fuit.  5.  Gives  boni  fuerunt. 
6.  Virtus  laudabilis  es-t.  7.  Libri  utiles  sunt.  8.  Illi  libri 
utiles  erunt.  9.  Ille  liber  utilis  fuerat.  10.  Utilis4  fuisti. 
11.  Utiles  fuistis.  12.  Germania  fertllis  est.  13.  Agrifer- 
tiles  fuerant.  14.  Pomum  crudum  est.  15.  Poma  cruda 
sunt.  16.  Poma  matura  erunt.  17.  Miles  fortis  est.  18. 
Milites  fortes  sunt. 

III.  Translate  into  T^atin. 

1.  Tlie  pupil  is  diligent.5  2.  The  pupils  were  diligent. 
3.  The  boy  is  good.  4.  He  will  be  happy.  5.  Good  boys 
are  happy.  C.  You  may  be  happy.  7.  We  might  have 
been  happy.  8.  This  soldier  will  be  useful.  9.  These  sol- 
diers have  been  useful.  10.  Brave  soldiers  arc  useful. 
11.  You  will  be  useful.  12.  Let  us  be  useful. 

1  Pax  is  the  subject  of  est,  and  is  therefore  in  the  Nominative,  accord- 
ing to  Rule  III. 

2  Jucunda  is  an  adjective  in  the  Nominative  Singular  Feminine,  to 
iigroe  with  its  noun  pax,  according  to  Rule  XXXIII.,  page  32. 

3  Est  is  a  verb  in  the  Indicative  mood,  Present  tense,  Third  person, 
Singular  number,  and  agrees  with  its  subject  pax,  according  to  Rule 
ZXXV.,  page  54. 

••'  Utilis  agrees  with  the  omitted  subject  tut  implied  in  the  ending  of  tltf 
verb, 

5  In  translating  English  into  Latin,  the  pupil  is  expected,  in  the  ar^ 
rangcment  of  words,  to  imitate  the  order  followed  in  the  Latin  Exercises, 
lie  will  observe  that  the  subject  stands  first,  and  the  verb  last.  But  some- 
times the  verb  precedes  one  or  more  words  in  the  sentence.  Thus  the 
sentence,  Pax  jucunda  est,  might  be  Pax  est  jucunda. 


ETYMOLOGY. VERB    SUM.  5& 

SUM  WITH  PREDICATE  NOUN. 

RULE  I.— Predicate  Nouns. 

362.  A  Predicate  Noun1  denoting  the  same  person 
or  thing  as  its  subject  agrees  with  it  in  CASE  : 

Ego  sum  nuntius,1 1  am  a  messenger.  Liv.  Servius  rex  cst  declu- 
ratus,  Servius  teas  declared  king.  Liv. 

MODEL   FOR    PARSING    PREDICATE    NOUNS. 

Ego  sum  nuntius,  I  am  a  messenger. 

Nuntius  is  A  noun  (31)  of  the  Second  Declension,  as  it  has  i 
in  the  Genitive  Singular  (40) ;  STEM,  nunti.  Singular ;  nuntius, 
nuntii,  nuntio,  nuntium,  nuntie,  nuntio.  Plural ;  nuntii,  nuntiorum 
nuntiis,  nuntios,  nuntii,  nuntiis.  It  is  of  the  Masculine  Gender  by 
45;  is  in  the  Nominative  Singular,  and,  as  a  Predicate  Noun, 
agrees  in  case  with  its  subject  ego,  according  to  Rule  I. :  "  A  Predi- 
cate Noun  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing  as  its  Subject  agrees 
with  it  in  CASE." 

346.  I.  A  DECLARATIVE  SENTENCE  has  the  form  of  an 
assertion : 

Miltiades  accusatus  cst,  Miltiades  was  accused.  Nep. 

II.     An   INTERROGATVE    SENTENCE  has  the  form  of  u 
question : 
Quis  non  paupertateni  extimescit,  Who  does  not  fear  poverty1?  Cic. 

1.  INTERROGATIVE  WORDS.  —  Interrogative  sentences  generally 
contain  some  interrogative  word,  —  either  an  interrogative  pronoun, 

1  Every  sentence  consists  of  two  distinct  parts,  expressed  or  implied  : 

1.  The  SUBJECT,  or  that  of  which  it  speaks. 

2.  The  PREDICATE,  or  that  which  is  said  of  the  subject. 

Thus,  in  the  first  example  under  the  Rule,  ego,  I,  is  the  subject,  and 
sum  nuntius  is  the  predicate.  When  the  predicate  thus  consists  of  a  noun 
with  the  verb  sum,  or  of  a  noun  with  a  passive  verb,  the  noun  thus  used 
Is  called  a  predicate  noun.  Accordingly,  nuntius  in  the  first  example,  and 
rex  in  the  second,  arc  predicate  nouns. 


60  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

^v. 

adjective,  or  adverb,  or  one  of  the  interrogative  particles,  ne,  nonne^ 
num :  t 

1)  Questions  with  ne  ask  for  information :  Scrlbitne,  Is  he  writing  ? 
Ne  is  always  thus  appended  to  some  other  word. 

2)  Questions  with  nonne  expect  the  answer  yes :  Nonne  scrlbit, 
Tg  he  not  writing  ? 

8)  Questions  with  num  expect  the  answer  no :  Num  scrlbit,  Is  he 
writing  ? 

EXERCISE   XIX. 

t 

,  I.     Vocabulary.  t 

Anciis,  I,  m.  Ancus,  Roman  king. 

Conditor,  conditoris,  m.  founder. 

Demosthenes,  is,  m.  Demosthenes,  Athenian  orator. 

Ebrietas,  ebrietatis,  f.  drunkenness. 

Graecus,  a,  iim,  Greek,  Grecian. 

Graecus,  I,  m.  Greek,  a  Greek. 

Insania,  ae,/.  insanity,  madness. 

Inventor,  inventoris,  m.  inventor. 

Mater,  matris,  /.  mother. 

Mundus,  I,  m.  world,  universe. 

Nonne,  interrog.  part.  expects  answer  yes. 

Num,  interrog.  part.  expects  answer  no. 

Philosophia,  ae,/.  philosophy. 

Roma,  ae,/.  Rome. 

Romaniis,  a,  um,  Roman. 

Romanus,  I,  m.  Roman,  a  Roman. 

Romulus,  I,  m.  Romulus,  the  founder  of  Ronjau 

Scipio,  Scipionis,  m.  Scipio,  Roman  general. 

II.     Translate  into  English}* 

1.  Ancus2  fuit3  rex4.  2.  Nonne5  Romulus  rex  fuerat? 
3.  Romulus  rex  fuerat.  4.  Quis  conditor  Romae6  fuit? 
5.  Romulus  conditor  Romae  fuit.  6.  Ebrietas  est  insania. 
TJ^Patria7  est  parens  omnium  nostrum.6  f8.  Graeci7  multa 
rum  artium8  inventores  erant.  9.  Demostnenes  orator  fuit. 
*  For  Notes  to  the  references  on  this  page,  see  page  61. 


ETYMOLOGY. VEIIB    SUM.  61 

10.   Num.  hie  puer  orator  crit?      11.   Ille  puer  orator  sit. 
1 12.  Philosophia  est  mater  artium.  ^13.  Cicero  clarissimus9 
oriitor  fuit.  9 14.  Cantus  lusciniae  jucundissimus9  est. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Who10  was  the  king?11  2.  Was  not 12  Romulus  king?11 
3.  Romulus  was  king.  4.  Who  was  the  leader  of  the 
Romans  ?•%  5.  Was  not12  Scipio  the  leader  of  the  Romans? 
6.  Scipio  was  the  leader  of  the  Romans.  *  7.  Your  brother 
is  an  orator.^t  8.  This  boy  is  my  brother,  f  9.  These  boys 
will  be  diligent  pupils.  10.  These  pupils  will  be  diligent,  i 
. **~\ 

1  In  preparing  the  longer  and  more  difficult  sentences  in  this  and  in 
the  subsequent  exercises,  it  is  recommended  that  the  pupil  should  follow 
the  Suggestions  which  are  inserted  in  this  volume,  page  143,  and  which 
are  intended  to  aid  him  in  discerning  the  process  by  which  he  may  most 
readily  and  surely  reach  the  meaning  of  a  Latin  sentence. 

2  See  Rule  III.  page  57. 

3  See  Rule  XXXV.  page  54.    The  verb  sometimes  precedes  the  Predi- 
cate Noun,  as  in  this  sentence ;  and  sometimes  follows  it,  as  in  several  of 
the  following  sentences. 

4  Rex  is  a  Predicate  Noun,  denoting  the  same  person  as  its  subject 
Ancus,  and  is  therefore  in  the  Nominative,  to  agree  with  that  subject  in 
case,  according  to  Rule  I.  page  59. 

5  See  346,  II.  1  above. 

6  Genitive,  according  to  Rule  XVI.  page  22. 

7  In  this  sentence,  before  turning  to  the  Vocabulary  for  the  meaning 
of  the  words,  notice  carefully  the  endings  of  the  several  words  in  accord- 
ance with  Suggestion  IV.     What  parts  of  speech  do  you  find  ?     What 
cases  ?     What  mood,  tense,  number,  and  person  ? 

In  accordance  with  Suggestion  V.,  what  order  will  you  follow  in  look- 
ing out  the  words  in  the  Vocabulary  ? 

8  Artium  depends  upon  inventores. 

9  In  accordance  with  Suggestion  VII.,  for  what  forms  will  you  look 
in  the  Vocabulary  to   find  the  meaning   of  clarissimus  and  jucundissi- 
mus (162) ? 

>»  See  188. 

»  See  Rule  I.  >>   QTf  TSS 

12  Nonm- See  346  IL  '• 


62 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN    BOOK. 


FIRST     CONJUGATION. 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 

205.  Amo,   Hove. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind 

Pres.  Inf.                  Perf.  Ind. 

Supine. 

am  5, 

umare,            timavi, 

umatum. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

PRESENT   TENSE. 

/  love,  am  loving,  do  love. 

SINGULAR.                                                                PLURAL. 

amd, 

I  love, 

amainiks, 

we  love, 

amas, 

thou  lovest, 

amatis, 

you  love, 

amat, 

he  loves  ; 

am  ant, 

they  love. 

IMPERFECT. 

I  loved,  icas  loving,  did  love. 

umaba-m. 

I  was  loving, 

amfiljainii.*, 

we  were  loving, 

&m&tM&s. 

thou  wast  loving, 

amal^atis, 

you  were  loving, 

uniabkt. 

he  was  loving  ; 

amabant, 

they  were  loving. 

1 

FUTURE.  '     v 

/  shall  or  will  love. 

ama"b6, 

I  shall  love, 

umfibimiis, 

we  shall  love, 

uma"bis, 

thou  wilt  love, 

ama"bitis, 

you  will  love, 

ama1>it, 

he  will  love  ; 

amalmnt, 

they  will  love. 

PERFECT. 

I  loved,  have  loved. 

amavl, 

I  have  loved, 

amavimiis, 

•we  have  loved, 

amavistl, 

thou  hast  loved, 

amavistis, 

you  have  loved, 

iimavit, 

he  has  loved; 

amavenmt,  er£,  they  have  loved. 

PLUPERFECT. 

/  had  loved. 

umav^ram, 

I  had  loved, 

amav£i\amii.s, 

•we  had  loved, 

amave^-as, 

thou  hadst  loved, 

amav£r!atis, 

you  had  loved, 

amavei-at, 

he  had  loved  ; 

amav^rimt, 

they  had  loved. 

i 

FUTURE  PERFECT! 

I  shall  or  will  have  loved. 

amav£r6, 

I  shall  have  loved, 

amav^rlmiks, 

we  shall  have  loved, 

amav£ris, 

thou  wilt  have  loved, 

amiiv£i*itis, 

you  will  have  lovedt 

amav^rit, 

he  will  have  loved  ; 

amav^rint, 

they  will  have  loved. 

ETYMOLOGY. FIRST    CONJUGATION. 


femes, 
fimet, 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 
I  may  or  can  love. 

SINGULAR. 

/  may  love, 
thou  mayst  love, 
he  may  love ; 


ameuiiis, 
ametis, 
ament, 
IMPERFECT. 
/  might,  could,  ivould,  or  should  love. 


PLURAL. 

we  may  love, 
you  may  love, 
they  may  love. 


amarem, 

amares, 
amaret, 


I  might  love, 
thou  mightst  love, 
he  might  love  • 


amaremiis,  we  might  love, 


ainaretis,       you  might  love, 
amareiit,        they  might  love. 
PERFECT. 

/  may  or  can  have  loved. 
amaverim,    /  may  have  loved,         amaverlmiks,  we  may  have  loved, 


amaveris,      thou  mayst  have  loved, 
amaverlt,       he  may  have  loved  ; 


amaveritis,      you  may  have  loved, 


amav£rint,        they  may  have  loved. 
PLUPERFECT. 
I  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have  loved. 


amavissem,  /  might  have  loved, 
amavisses,     thou    mightst    have 

loved, 
amavisset,     he  might  have  loved ; 


amavisseimiis,  we     might    have 

loved, 

amavissetis,  you  might  have  loved, 
amavissent,    they  might  have  loved. 


IMPERATIVE. 


PRES.  ama, 
FUT.    amato, 
amatO, 


love  thou  ; 
thou  shah  love, 
he  shall  love ; 


INFINITIVE. 

PRES.  amare,        to  love. 
PERF.  amavisse,  to  have  loved. 
FUT.    amatfiriks J  ess£,    to  be 
about  to  love. 

G  E  E  U  N  D. 

Gen.    amanill,          of  loving, 
Dat.     ftinfifiid.6,        for  loving, 
Ace.     arnancliim,    loving, 
All.     umsiiiilo,         by  loving. 


am  ate,  love  yc.~ 

amatot£,        ye  shall  love, 
amantO,  they  shall  love. 

PARTICIPLE. 
PRES.  amans,2          loving. 

FUT.     aniaturii  s,1    about  to  love. 

SUPINE. 


Ace, 
Abl 


fimatiim, 
amatfi, 


to  lovet 

to  love,  be  loved. 


1  Decline  like  bonus,  1,48. 
4 


2  Decline  like  prudens,  153. 


64. 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIX   BOOK. 


FIRST    CONJUGATION. 

PASSIVE    VOICE. 

206.   Amor,   I  am  loved. 

PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 
Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind. 

Timor,  amari,          umfitiis  sum. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

PRESENT    TENSE. 

I  am  loved. 


SINGULAR. 

amor 


umatiir  ; 


amabar 


amamliiX 

umantiii*. 


IMPERFECT. 
/  was  loved. 


&mfigtftp|liil 
umalmntiir. 

FUTURE. 
/  shall  or  will  be  loved. 


itmatiks  siim1 
amattis  £s 
S.matfis  est  ; 


timatiis 
amatiis  ^ras 
amatiis  ^rat  ; 

amatiis  ero1 
amatiis  £rl* 
amatiis 


PERFECT. 
/  have  been  or  was  loved. 

amatl 

rimiitl  cstis 
umiitl  sunt. 
PLUPERFECT. 
I  had  been  loved. 

timatl  eramiisi 

umatl  Gratis 

iimjitl  erant. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

7  shall  or  will  have  been  loved. 

amatl  erimiks 

timatl  iritis 
fimatl 


1  Fui,  faisti,  etc.,  arc  sometimes  used  for  sum,  es,  etc. ;  thus  amdtus 
f'4  for  amdtus  sum.  So  faHram,  futras,  etc.,  for  fram,  ?ras,  etc. ;  also 
fu&ro^  fulris,  etc.,  for  fro,  tris,  etc. 


ETYMOLOGY.  —  FIRST   CONJUGATION. 


65 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 
/  may  or  can  be  loved. 


SINGULAR. 

amer 

ameris,  or  re 
ametiir  ; 


PtURAL. 

amemiir 
ameminl 

amentiir. 


IMPERFECT. 

I  might,  could,  would,  or  should  be  loved. 
amarer  amaremiii- 


amareris,  or  re 
amaretiir  ; 


amaremlnl 
rimarciitiir. 


PERFECT. 

I  may  have  been  loved. 

amatiis  sim l  amatl  slmiis 

amatiis  sis  amatl  sitis 

amatiis  sit  ;  amatl  slut. 

PLUPERFECT. 

/  might,  could,  icould,  or  should  have  been  loved. 
amatiis  cssem1  amatl  essemiis 


amatiis  esses 
amatiis  ess^t  ; 


amatl  essetis 
amatl  essent. 


(  I  M  P  E  K  A  T  I  V  Ej 

PRES.  amare,     be  thou  loved;          |      amaminl,  be  ye  loved. 
FUT.     amator,  thou  shalt  be  loved, 


amator,  he  shall  be  loved; 

INFINITIVE. 

PRES    amarl,  to  be  loved. 

PERF.  amatiis  csse,  to  have  been 

loved. 
PUT.     amatiiiaa  Irl,  to  be  about  to 

be  loved. 


amaiitor,  they  shall  be  loved. 

PARTICIPLE. 


PERF.  amatiis,  having  been  loved. 
FUT.     amancliis,  t^o  be  loved. 


1  Fugrim,  fu&ris,  etc.,  are  sometimes  used   for  sim,  sis,  etc.     So  also 
ftiissem,  fuisscs,  etc.,  for  cssem,  esses,  etc. 


66  INTRODUCTORY    LATIN   13OOK. 

MODELS    FOR   PARSING   REGULAR   VERBS. 

1.    With   Subject. 

Yos  laudavistis,     You  have  praised. 

Laudavistis  is  a  transitive  verb  (192,  193)  of  the  First  Conjuga- 
tion (201),  from  laudo ;  STEM,  laud.  Principal  Parts:  laudo,  lau- 
ddre,  lauddvi,  laudatum.  Inflection  of  Tense :  lattdfivi,  laudavisli, 
laudavit,  laudavimus,  laudavistis,  laudaverunt,  or  laudavere.  The 
form  laudavistis  is  found  in  the  Active  voice,  Indicative  mood,  Per- 
fect tense,  Second  person,  Plural  number,  and  agrees  with  its  sub- 
ject vos,  according  to  Rule  XXXV. :  "  A  Finite  Yerb  agrees  with 
its  Subject  in  NUMBER  and  PERSON." 

2.    Without  Subject. 

Laudavistis,      You  have  praised. 

This  is  parsed  like  laudavistis,  above,  except  that  it  agrees  with 
vos,  implied  in  the  ending  istisj  while  laudavistis,  above,  agrees  with 
vos  expressed. 

FIRST  CONJUGATION  — ACTIVE  VOICE. 
EXERCISE    XX. 
I.     Vocabulary. 


Yituper^  are,  avi,  atum,         to  llame. 
Laudo,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  2^>raise. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Amo,  amabam,  amabo.1  2.  Amas,  amabas,  amabis. 
3.  Amat,  amant.1  4.  Amabat,  amabarit.  5.  Amabit,  ama- 

1  The  pupil  should  carefully  compare  the  forms  grouped  together 
under  the  several  numerals,  and  observe  in  what  they  are  alike,  and  iu 
what  they  arc  unlike.  Thus  amo,  amabain,  amalx>,  have  the  letters  am 


•      ETYMOLOGY.  —  FIRST   CONJUGATION.  67 

bunt.1  G.  Amamus,  amabamus,  amabimus.  7.  Amavi, 
amaveram,  amavero.  8.  Amavit,  amaverat,  amaverit.  9. 
Amavi,  amavimus.  10.  Amaveram,  amaveramus.  11.  Amav- 
ero, amaverimus.  12.  Amem,  amarem,  amaverim,  amavis- 
sem.  13.  Amemus,  amaremus,  amaverimus,  amavissemus. 
14.  Amet,  ainent.  15.  Amaret,  amarent.  16.  Amaverit, 
amaverint.  17.  Amavisset,  amavissent.  18.  Ama,  amato, 
jimatote.  19.  Amato,  amanto. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  I  praise,  I  was  praising,  I  will  praise.  2.  He  praises, 
they  praise.  3.  He  will  praise,  they  will  praise.  4.  He 
was  praising,  they  were  praising.  5.  You  were  praising, 
you  will  praise,  you  praise.  6.  He  has  loved,  he  had  lovec\ 
he  will  have  loved.  7.  I  have  praised,  I  had  praised,  I 
shall  have  praised.  8.  He  may  love,  they  may  love.  9. 
Let  him  praise,  let  them  praise.  10.  He  would  blame,  they 
would  blame.  11.  I  should  have  praised,  we  should  have 
praised.  12.  Praise  thou,  praise  ye. 

FIRST  CONJUGATION  — PASSIVE  VOICE. 
EXERCISE    XXI. 

I.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Amor,  amabar,  amabor.  2.  Amaris,  amabaris,  amab- 
eris.  3.  Amatur,  amantur.  4.  Amabatur,  amabantur. 

(the  stem,  203)  in  common;  but  they  differ  from  each  other  in  the  end- 
ings,—  o,  dbam,  dbo.  In  the  forms  amat,  amant,  there  is  a  still  closer  re- 
semblance :  not  only  is  the  stem  am  common  to  both,  but  the  endings 
have  the  letters  at  in  common;  or,  in  other  words,  the  plural  ending  ant 
differs  from  the  singular  ending  at  only  in  inserting  n :  AT,  ANT. 

1  Here  the  pupil  will  observe  that  the  plural  ending  dbunt  differs  from 
the  singular  ending  obit,  not  only  in  inserting  n  before  t}  but  also  in 
changing  i  into  u :  ABIT,  ABUNT, 


68  IXTEODUCTOKY    LATIK   BOOK. 

5.  Amabitur,  amabuntur.  6.  Amamur,  amabamur,  amabi- 
intir.  7.  Amatus1  sum,  amatus  eram,  amatus  ero.  8.  Ama- 
tus  es,  amatus  eras,  amatus  eris.  9.  Amatus  est,  amati1 
sunt.  10.  Amatus  erat,  amati  crant.  11.  Amatus  erit, 
amati  erunt.  12.  Amer,  amarer,  amatus  sim,  amatus  essem. 
13.  Amemur,  amaremur,  amati  simus,  amati  essOmus.  14. 
Ametur,  amentur.  15.  Amaretur,  amarentur.  16.  Ama- 
tus sit,  amati  sint.  17.  Amatus  esset,  amati  essent.  18. 
Amator,  amantor. 

II.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  He  is  praised,  they  are  praised.  2.  He  was  praised, 
they  were  praised.  3.  He  will  be  praised,  they  will  be 
praised.  4.  I  am  blamed,  I  was  blamed,  I  shall  be  blamed. 
5.  You  are  loved,  you  are  praised.  6.  You  were  loved, 
you  were  praised.  7.  You  will  be  loved,  you  will  be  praised. 
8.  I  have  been  blamed,  you  have  been  praised.  9.  I  had 
been  blamed,  you  had  been  praised.  10.  I  shall  have  been 
blamed,  you  will  have  been  praised.  11.  You  may  be 
blamed,  you  might  be  blamed.  12.  He  would  have  been 
blamed,  they  would  have  been  praised.  13.  Let  him  be 
praised,  let  them  be  "praised.  14.  Be  thou  praised,  be  ye 
praised. 

1  The  learner  will  observe,  that,  when  the  verb  and  the  subject  (ex- 
pressed or  implied)  are  in  the  Singular,  the  participle  (amatus),  which 
forms  one  element  of  the  verb,  is  also  in  the  Singular ;  and  that,  when 
the  verb  and  the  subject  are  in  the  Plural,  the  participle  (amati)  is  also 
in  the  Plural. 

The  form  of  the  participle  also  varies  with  the  gender  of  the  subject, 
as  well  as  with  its  number.  Thus,  if  the  subject  is  Masculine,  the  parti- 
ciple will  be  amatus  in  the  Singular,  and  amatl  in  the  Plural ;  if  Femi- 
nine, amdta  in  the  Singular,  and  amdtac  in  the  Plural ;  and,  if  Neuter, 
amdtum  in  the  Singular,  and  amdta  in  the  Plural.  Thus  the  participle 
in  the  compound  tenses  (i.e.,  in  those  which  are  made  up  of  the  participle 
and  the  auxiliary  sum)  agrees  with  the  subject  in  gender,  number,  and  case, 
like  an  adjective,  according  to  Rule  XXXV.  1,  note. 


ETYMOLOGY. FIRST    CONJUGATION.  69 

FIRST   CONJUGATION  — BOTH  VOICES. 
EXERCISE    XXII. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Lauclo,  laudor.1  2.  Laudabo,  laudabor.2  3.  Lauda- 
bam,  laudabar.2  4.  Laudem,  lander.  5.  Laudarem,  lauda- 
rer.2  6.  Laudat,  laudatur.1  7.  Amfibat,  amabatur.  8. 
Amabit,  amabitur.  9.  Amet,  ametur.  10.  Amaret,  ama- 
retur.  11.  Laudarent,  laudarentur.  12.  Ament,  amentur. 
13.  Laudant,  laudantur.  14.  Amabant,  amabantur.  15. 
Laudabunt,  laudabuntur.  16.  Amavit,  amatus  est.  17. 
Laudaverat,  laudatus  erat.  18.  Amaverit,  amatus  erit. 
19.  Lauda,  laudare.  20.  Amato,  amator.  21.  Laudanto, 
laud  an  tor. 

II.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  He  blames,  he  is  blamed.  2.  I  was  praising,  I  was 
praised.  3.  You  will  praise,  you  will  be  praised.  4.  He 

1  In  this  Exercise,  the  pupil  should  carefully  compare  the  correspond- 
ing forms  in  the  two  Voices,  —  the  Active  and  the  Passive,  —  and  ob- 
serve the  difference  between  them.     The  Passive  laudor  differs  from  the 
Active  laudo  only  in  adding  r ;  the  Passive  laudabar  differs  from  the  Ac- 
tive lauddbam  only  in  taking  r  in  place  of  m.     Thus  we  find,  that,  in  the 
Indicative  and  in  the  Subjunctive,  the  first  person  of  the  Passive  is  formed 
from  the  first  person  of  the  Active  by  simply  adding  r ;  or,  if  the  Active 
ends  in  m,  by  substituting  r  for  m.    Again  •-  the  Passive  laudatur  differs 
from  the  Active  laudat  only  in  adding  ur.     Thus  we  find,  that,  in  the 
Indicative  and  in  the  Subjunctive,  the  third  person  of  the  Passive  is  formed 
from  the  third  person  of  the  Active  by  simply  adding  ur, 

2  Where  must  we  look  to  find  the  meaning  of  these  endings,  —  in  the 
Vocabulary,  or  in  the  Grammar  ?  and  where  to  find  the  general  meaning 
of  the  verb  ?     See  Suggestion  II.     To  find  the  meaning  of  the  verb  to 
which  laudabor  belongs,  for  what  form  must  we  look  in  the  Vocabulary  ? 
Sec  Suggestion  VII. 


70  INTRODUCTORY   LATIX   EOOK. 

will  blame,  lie  will  be  blamed.  5.  They  will  praise,  they 
will  be  praised.  C.  We  blame,  we  are  blamed.  7.  He  has 
praised,  he  has  been  praised.  8.  They  have  blamed,  they 
have  been  blamed.  9.  Pie  had  praised,  he  had  been 
praised.  10.  They  had  blamed,  they  had  been  blamed. 
11.  He  may  praise,  he  may  be  praised.  12.  He  would 
blame,  he  would  be  blamed.  13.  They  may  praise,  they 
may  be  praised. 


•NS.l  . 


FIRST  CONJUGATION  —  FIRST  AND  SECOND  DECLENSIONS, 
DIRECT  OBJECT. 

RULE  V.  — Direct  Object. 

379.  The  Direct  Object2  of  an  action  is  put  in  the 
Accusative. 

Deus  mundum  aedificavit,  God  made  the  ivorld.3  Cic.  Libera 
rein  publicam,  Free  the  republic.  Cic.  Populi  Romani  salutem  de- 
fendite,  Defend  the  safety  of  the  Roman  people.  Cic. 

1  It  is  thought  advisable  that  the  pupil  should  now  commence  a  review 
of  the  grammatical  forms  which  he  has  already  learned.    Accordingly, 
this  Exercise  will  involve  nouns  of  the  First  and  of  the  Second  Declen- 
sion.    The  pupil  should  therefore  carefully  review  those  Declensions 
(42,  45).     In  connection  with  the  subsequent  Exercises,  it  is  expected 
that  the  other  Declensions   and  the  other  Grammatical  forms  will  be 
reviewed  in  order,  as  will  be  indicated  in  the  respective  headings  which 
precede  the  several  Exercises. 

2  The  Direct  Object  of  an  action  is  generally  the  object,  person,  or  thing, 
on  which  the  action  is  directly  exerted ;  as,  salutem,  safety,  in  the  third 
example  ;  defend  (what?)  the  safety.    But  the  Direct  Object  is  sometimes 
the  effect  of  the  action,  i.e.  the  object   produced  by  it;    as,  mundum, 
world,  in  the  first  example,  —  made  the  world. 

3  In  English,  the  object  follows  the  verb ;  thus,  in  this  example,  world 
follows  made ;  but  in  Latin  the  object  usually  precedes  the  verb :   thus 
mundum  precedes  aedijlcduit.      So  also,  in  the  third  example,  salutem 
precedes  defendtte;  but  sometimes  the  object  follows  the  verb :  thus  in 
the  second  exairple,  rem  puUicam  follows  libera. 


ETYMOLOGY. FIRST    CONJUGATION.  /I 

MODEL   FOR   PARSING   DIRECT    OBJECTS. 

Deus  mundum  aedificavit,  G-od  made  the  world. 

Mundum  is  a  noun  (31)  of  the  Second  Declension,  as  it  has  i  in 
the  Genitive  Singular  %  (40) ;  STEM,  mund.  Singular:  mundus, 
mundi,  mundo,  mundum,  munde,  mundo.  Plural :  mundi,  mundurwn, 
mund  is,  mundos,  mundi,  mundis.  It  is  of  the  Masculine  gender,  by 
45  ;  is  in  the  Accusative  Singular ;  and  is  the  Direct  Object  of  the 
transitive  verb  aedificavit,  according  to  Rule  V. :  "  The  Direct  Ob- 
ject of  an  action  is  put  in  the  Accusative." 

EXERCISE    XXIII. 
I.      Vocabulary. 

Aedifico,  are,  avi,  at  urn,  to  build. 

Aro,  are,  avi,  atiim,  to  plough. 

Canto,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  sing. 

Italia,  ae,  /.  Italy. 

Llbero,  are,  avi,' atum,  to  liberate. 

Renovo,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  renew. 

.  Spero,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  hope. 

Tarquinius,  ii,  m.  Tarquinius,  Roman  king. 

Themistocles,  is,  m.  Themistocles,  Athenian  commander. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Lusciniam  laudo.1  2.  Lusciniam  laudamus.  3.  Lus- 
cinias  laudat.  4.  Luscinias  laudant.  5.  Luscinia  lauda- 
tur.  6.  Lusciniae  laudantur.  *  7.  Patriam  amamus.  8.  Pro 
patria,3  pugnabimus.  9.  Nonne3  Themistocles  patriam  lib- 
cravit?  10.  Patriam  liberavit.  ll.'J^taliam  liberaverunt. 
12.  Italia  liberiita4  est.  13.  Tarquinius  templum  aedifica- 

1  Lusciniam  is  the  Direct  Object  of  laudo,  according  to  Rule  V. 

2  See  Rule  XXXII.  page  24. 

3  See  346,  II.  1,  page  59. 

4  For  agreement  'of  participle  with  subject,  see  Rule  XXXV.  460,  1, 
page  54. 


72  rtfTRODTTCTOKY   LATIX  BOOK. 

vit.  14.  Templum  aedificubat.  15.  Templa  aedificave- 
rant.  16.  Templa  aedificuta  erant.  17.  Templum  aedifi- 
critum  erit.  18.  Pueram  laudabamus.  19.  Pueri  laudati 
stint.  -0.  jSTonnc1  bellum  renovatum  cst? 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  The  nightingale  is  singing.  2.  The  nightingales  are 
singing.  1  3.  The  nightingales  will  sing.  4.  The  boys  have 
been  praised.  5.  Did  you  not1  praise  the  boys  ?2  G.  We 
praised  the  boys.  7.  The  boys  will  be  praised.  \jl8.  Have 
we  not1  liberated  Italy?  9.  You  have  liberated  Italy. 
10.  We  will  liberate  the  country.*  11.  We  were  ploughing 
the  field.  f!2.  Will  you  plough  the  field  ?t  13.  The  field 
will  be  ploughed. 


CONJUGATION  —  THIRD  DECLENSION.* 
ADVERBS. 


EULE  LL—  Use  of  Adverbs. 

582.  Adverbs4  qualify  VERBS,  ADJECTIVES,  and  other 

ADVERBS  : 

Sapientcs  ieliciter4  vivunt,  The  wise  live  happily.  Cic.  Facile4 
doctissimus,  unquestionably  the  most  learned.  Cic.  Haud4  aliter, 
not  otherwise.  Virg. 

1  See  346,  II.  1,  page  59. 

2  The  Latin  word  for  boys  in  this  sentence  will  be  in  the  Accusative, 
according  to  Rule  V.,  and  will  precede  the  verb. 

3  The  pupil  should  now  review  the  Third  Declension  (48-54). 

4  The  Adverb  is,  therefore,  the  part  of  speech  which  is  used  to  qualify 
verbs,  adjectives,  and  other  adverbs.     Feliclter,  happily,  is  an  adverb 
qualifying  the  verb  vivunt,  live  (live  liappily).     Facile,  easily,  unquestion- 
ably, is  an  adverb  qualifying  the  adjective  doctissimus,  the  most  learned 
(cosily,  i.e.  unquestionably  the  most  learned)  .    Hand,  not,  is  an  adverb  quali- 
fying the  adverb  aliter,  otherwise  (not  otherwise).     The  adverb  in  Latin 
usually  stands  directly  before  the  word  which  it  qualifies,  as  in  these 
examples. 


ETYMOLOGY. FIRST   CONJUGATION.  73 

MODEL    FOIl   PAESIXG   ADVERBS. 

Sapicntes  fellciter  vlvunt,      The  wise  live  happily. 

Feliclter  is  an  adverb,  and  qualifies  vlvuni,  according  to  Rule  LI. : 
4<  Adverbs  qualify  VERBS,  ADJECTIVES,  and  other  ADVERBS." 

EXERCISE    XXIV. 

i 
I.      Vocabulary. 

Elo'quentiii,  ae,  /.  eloquence. 

Expugno,  are,  livl,  atum,  to  takeffake  by  storm. 

Fortiter,  adv.  bravely. 

JuventuSjfjuvcntutis,  y.  youth.  * 

Orno,  are,  avi,  atilm,  to  adorn,  le  an  ornament  tot 

Pietas,  pietatis,  /.  filial  affection,  piety,  duty. 

Pugno,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  fight. 

Serv5,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  preserve,  keep,  save. 

Void,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  fly • 

II.      Translate  into  English. 

1.  Avis  volat.  2.  Aves  volant.  3.  Nonne1  avis  cantfu 
bat?  4.  Aves  cantabant.  5.  Rex  urbem2  aedificuvit. 
6.  Urbs  aedificata3  est.  7.  Urbes  aedificatae3  erunt.  8. 
Milites  fortiter4  pugnaverunt.  9.  Scipio5  milites  laudavit. 
10.  Scipio5  militum  virtutem  laudabat.  11.  Scipionem 
laudamus.  12.  Scipio  patrem  servavit.  13.  Scipio  urbem 
cxpugnavit.  14.  Urbs  expugnata  est.  15.  Milites  patriam 
ainant.  16.  Milites5  pro  patria  pugnabant.  IT.  Pietas 
pueros  ornat.  18.  Yirtutes  civitatem  ornant. 

1  Sec  346,  II.  1,  page  59. 

3  Urbem,  direct  object  of  aedificdvit,  according  to  Rule  Y. 

3  "Why  aedifica'a  in  one  case,  and  aedijicdtae  in  the  other  ?     "Why  not 
acdificdtus  in  both  ?     Sec  Rule  XXXV.  460,  1,  page  54. 

4  Fortiter,  an  Adverb  qualifying  pugndveruntt  according  to  Rule  LI. 

*  In  what  order  will  you  look  out  the  words  in  this  sentence  ?  Sea 
Suggestion  V. 


74  INTRODUCTORY    LATIN   BOOK. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  The  birds  are  singing.  2.  Do  you  not1  love  birds?2 
3.  We  love  birds.2  4.  This  bird  will  tly.  5.  Did  you  not1 
save  the  city?  6.  The  soldiers  saved  the  city.  7.  Shep- 
herds love  the  mountains.  8.  We  love  virtue.  9.  Is  not 
virtue  loved?  10.  It  is  loved.  11.  Do  not  the  citizens 
praise  the  king?  12.  They  praise  the  king.  13.  The  king 
will  be  praised.  14.  The  virtue  of  the  king  is  praised. 

FIRST  CONJUGATION  — FOURTH  AND  FIFTH  DECLENSIONS.' 
EXERCISE    XXY. 

I.     Vocabulary. 

Convoco,  are,  avl,  atum,  to  assemble,  call  together. 

Duplico,  are,  avl,  atiim,  to  double,  increase. 

Dux,  dticis,  m.  general,  leader. 

Fides,  fidei,  /.  faith,  fidelity,  word,4  promise. 

Fugo,  are,  avl,  atiim,  to  rout. 

Homo,  hommis,  m.  man. 

Senatus,  us,  m.  senate. 

Stimiilo,  are,  livi,  atiim,  to  stimulate. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Homines5  cantum  lusciniae6  laudant.  2.  Cantus  lus- 
ciriiae  laudatur.  3.  Romulus  exercitum  fusrat.  4.  Nonne 


1  See  346,  II.  1,  page  59. 

2  Remember  that  the  object  in  Latin  usually  precedes  the  verb. 

3  The  pupil  should  now  review  these  Declensions  (116,  119). 

4  To  keep  one's  word,  fidem  servdre :  I  keep  my  word,  fidem  meam  servo, 
or  Jidem  servo,  as  the  Latin  possessives,  ?news,  my,  tuus,  your,  etc.,  when 
not  emphatic,  are  often  omitted ;  when  expressed,  they  usually  follow  their 
nouns. 

5  In  this  sentence,  what  order  will  you  follow,  in  accordance  with 
Suggestion  Y.,  in  looking  out  the  words  in  the  Vocabulary  ?     In  accord- 
ance with  Suggestion  VII.,  for  what  forms  will  you  look  in  the  Vocabu- 
lary to  find    the  meaning  of  homines  (51,  II.),  milltcs  (50,  II.),  stimulavit 
(205)? 

6  See  Rule  XVI.  page  22. 


ETYMOLOGY. FIRST    CONJUGATION.  75 

exercitum.  fugavimus?  5.  Exercitus  fugatus  est.  6.  Ex- 
crcitus  fugatus  erit.  7.  Consul  senatum.  convocavit.  8. 
Senatus  convocatus  est.  9.  Senatus  consulem  laudavit. 
10.  Spes  victoriae  milites  stimulavit.  11.  Numerum 
dieruni  duplicavi.  12.  Xumerus  dieruni  duplicatus  est. 


III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  The  boy  has  kept  his  word.1  2.  Will  you  not  keep 
your  word?  3.  We  will  keep  our  word.  4.  The  consul 
praised  the  fidelity  of  the  citizens.  5.  Will  not  the  fidelity 
of  the  citizens  be  praised  ?  6.  Will  not  the  citizens  praise 
the  fidelity  of  the  army  ?  7.  They  have  praised  the  fidelity 
of  the  army.  8.  Did  not  the  general  praise  the  army? 
9.  He  praised  the  army,  10.  The  army  will  be  praised. 


FIRST   CONJUGATION  —  ADJECTIVES.2 


EXERCISE    XXYI. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Amplio,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  enlarge. 

Condemno,  are,  avi,  atiim,  to  condemn. 

Hannibal,  Hannibalis,  m.  Hannibal,  Carthaginian  general. 

Innocens,  mnocentis,  _  innocent. 

Nobilis,  e,  noble. 

Novus,  a,  iim,  new. 

Occupo,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  occupy. 

Pumciis,  a,  urn,  Carthaginian,  Punic. 

1  Sec  note  4,  preceding  page. 

2  The  pupil  should  now  review  Adjectives  (146-162). 


76  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN    BOOK. 

II.      Translate  into  English. 

1.  Rex  urbem  novam1  ampliabat.  2.  Urbem  novam  am- 
pliabunt.  3.  Hex  urbem  pulchram l  ampliaverat.  4.  Urbs 
pulchra  servata2  cst.  5.  Hannibal  multas  civitates  occu- 
pavit.  G.  Juclices  hominem  innocentissimum 3  condemna- 
vGrunt.  7.  Num.  Punicum  bellum  renovatum  est?  8. 
Nonnc  Punicum  bellum  renovatum  est  ?  9.  Punicum  bel- 
lum renovatum  cst.  10.  Roman!  nobilissimas3  urbes  ex- 
pugnaverunt. 

*r-         III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Will  not  the  brave  soldiers  save  the  city?  2.  The 
brave  soldiers  will  save  the  beautiful  city.  3.  The  noble 
city  will  be  saved.  4.  We  praise  good  boys.  5.  Good 
boys  will  be  praised.  6.  Do  you  not  praise  diligent  pupils  ? 
7.  Diligent  pupils  are  praised.  8.  The  citizens  praise  the 
brave  soldiers. 

FIRST   CONJUGATION  —  PKONOUNS.* 
EXERCISE    XXVII. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Aliquis,  uliqua,  illiquid  or  aliquod,  some  one,  somebody. 

Delecto,  are,  avl,  atiim,  to  delight. 

Dlligentia,  ac,  /.  diligence. 

Non,  adv.  not. 

Saluto,  are,  avl,  atiim,  to  salute. 

Suus,  a,  iim,  7iis,  her,  its,  their. 


1  See  Rule  XXXIII.  p.  32. 

2  Why  servata  rather  than  servdtus  ?     See  Rule  XXXV.  460,  1,  p.  54. 

3  In  accordance  with  Suggestion  VII.,  for  what  form  will  you  look  lit- 
the  Vocabulary  ?     See  162. 

4  The  pupil  should  now  review  Pronouns  (182J91). 


ETYMOLOGY.  —  FIRST    CONJUGATION.  77 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Quis  bane1  urbem  servabit?  2.  Hanc  urbem  pul- 
chram  servabimus.  3.  Quis  te 2  salutav.it  ?  4.  Pater  meus1 
te  salutat.  5.  Haec1  vita  te  delectat.  6.  Philosophia  nos2 
clelectat.  7.  Omnia  animalia  se2amant.  8.  Fratres  tui1 
laudantur.  9.  Fratres  mei  laudati  sunt.  10.  Puer  paren- 
tes suos3  amat.  11.  Pueri  boni  parentes  suos3  amant.  12. 
Parentes  nostros  amafrxus.  v 

\;          **. 

^       III.     Transt&te  into  Latin. 

1.  Do  you  blame  me?  ^£.  We  do  not4  blame  you. 
3.  Whom  do  you  blame  ?  4.  We  blame  your  brother. 
5.  This  book  delights  me.  G.  These  books  delighted  us. 
7.  Did  not5  your  father  praise  you?  8.  He  praised  us. 
9.  Did  not5  some  one  praise  your  diligence  ?  10.  Our  par- ' 
cnte  praised  our  diligence.  11.  Did  your  brother  blame 
you?  12.  He  did  not4 blame  me.  13.  He  blamed  himself. 
14.  He  will  be  blamed. 


1  These  Pronouns    arc  all  used  as  adjectives,  and  agree  with  their 
nouns  like  any  other  adjectives,  according  to  Rule  XXXIII.  p.  32.    Pro- 
nouns thus  used  as  adjectives  generally  precede  their  nouns;  but  the 
Possessive  Pronouns,  meus,  tuns,  etc.  (185),  generally  follow  their  nouns, 
as  in  this  Exercise. 

2  Personal  Pronouns,  it  will  be  remembered,  are  used  as  substantives 
(184).    They  are  accordingly  governed  like  any  other  substantives.     See 
Rule  V.  p.  70.    Observe  that  the  object  precedes  the  verb. 

3.The  pupil  will  observe  that  suos  in  the  tenth  sentence  must  be  ren- 
dered his,  while  in  the  eleventh  it  must  be  rendered  their.  Thus  the 
meaning  of  the  Possessive  suns  depends  in  part  upon  the  number  of  the 
word  to  which  it  refers.  It  must  be  rendered  his  (her,  its)  when  that 
word,  as  puer  in  the  tenth  sentence,  is  in  the  Singular ;  but  it  must  be 
rendered  their  when  that  word,  as  pueri  in  the  eleventh  sentence,  is  in  the 
Plural. 

4  When  a  verb  with  a  direct  object  has  also  an  adverb  qualifying  it, 
the  usual  order  is  Object,  Adverb,  Verb ;  but  the  adverb  non,  not,  may 
stand  either  before  or  after  the  object. 

5  Xonnc. 


INTRODUCTORY    LATIN   BOOK. 


Pres.  Ind. 

moned, 


SINGULAR. 

moneG 
mones 


SECOND     CONJUGATION. 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 

207.  Moneo,  I  advise. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 
Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind.  Supine. 


monebani 
monebas 
monel>at  ; 


monel>6 
monebis 
mon€"bit  ; 


inoniil 
monuistl 
monuit  ; 


monuerani 
munu^i-as 
monuerat  ; 

munuero 
monu^rls 
monuerit; 


monere,          monui,          monltiim. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

PRESENT    TENSE. 
/  advise. 

PLURAL. 

monemiks 
munetis 
moncnt. 
IMPERFECT. 
/  was  advising. 

monetoamiis 
monebatis 
monebant. 
FUTURE. 
/  shall  or  will  advise. 

monel>imii.s 
monel>itls 
monebitnt. 
PERFECT. 
I  advised  or  have  advised. 

munuiniuLS 
munulstis 
monuenint, 
PLUPERFECT. 
/  had  advised. 

munueramiis 
monueratls 
monu^rant. 
FUTURE   PERFECT. 
/  shall  or  will  have  advised. 

monu^rimiis 

monu^rftis 

monu&rint. 


ETYMOLOGY. SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


79 


SINGULAR. 

monccliu 
moneas 
moneat ; 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 
/  may  or  can  advise. 


PLURAL. 

moiicaiii.iks 

moneatls 

raoneant. 


IMPERFECT. 
/  miglit,  could,  would,  or  should  advise. 


monerem 
moneres 


monuerim. 


moneretls 

monerent. 

PERFECT. 
/  may  have  advised. 

mo  nue  rlin  ii  s 


munu£rint. 
PLUPERFECT. 
/  migld,  could,  would,  or  should  have  advised. 

mtmuissemus 
monuisses  momiissetis 

monuiss£t ;  montiissent. 

IMPERATIVE. 


PRES.  mone,          advise  thou  ; 
PUT.     mon«3tO9  thou  shall  advise, 
monetO,  he  shall  advise; 

INFINITIVE. 

PRES.  mon^re,       to  advise. 
PERF.  monuiss£,   to  have  advised. 
FCT.     monttwriis    ess^,   to   be 
about  to  advise. 

GERUND. 

Gen.  inonendl,         of  advising, 

Dat.  monenclO,       for  advising, 

Ace.  monencliiiia,  advising, 

Abl.  munend65        by  advising. 


advise  ye. 

,   ye  shall  advise, 
monentO,      they  shall  advise 

PARTICIPLE. 

PRES.  monens,  advising. 

PUT.     munitfiriis,  about  to  advise. 


SUPINE. 


Ace.     monitti.an,  to  advise, 

Abl.      monitft,  to  advise,  be  advised. 


80 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 

PASSIVE    VOICE. 

208.  Moneor,  I  am  advised. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 
Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind. 

m5ne8r,  moneri,  monitus  sum. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 
/  am  advised. 

PLURAL. 

inonemiir 
monemiiil 


SINGULAR. 

monedr 
moneris,  or  re 
monetiir  ; 


monentiiir. 


mouebar 
monel>aris,  or  r«S 
monebatu.!'  ; 


IMPERFECT. 
/  was  advised. 


monebamiir 
monebaminl 
munel>an.tti.r. 


FUTURE. 

/  shall  or  will  be  advised. 

monebdr  |  monebimiir 

inoneberis,  or  re  monebimini 

monebitilr ;  monebiintiir. 

PERFECT. 

I  have  been  or  was  advised. 

monltils  siim1  monitl  siimiks 

monitiis  ^s  monitl  estis 

monitiis  est  ;  monitl  sunt. 

PLUPERFECT. 
7  had  been  advised. 

monitits  eram1  monitl 

monitiis  eras  monitl 

momtiis  erat  ;  monitl 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 
7  shall  or  will  have  been  advised. 


monitiis  ero1 
monitiis  erls 
monittts 


monitl  erimiis 
monitl  erltls 
monitl 


1  Sec  206,  foot-notes. 


ETYMOLOGY. SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


81 


SINGULAR. 

monear 


monearls,  or  i-e 
moneatiii- ; 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 
/  may  or  can  be  advised. 

PLURJLL. 

moneamiir 
moneaminl 
moneantiir. 


IMPERFECT. 


ight,  could,  would,  or  should  be  advised. 
moneremiir 
monei-eminl 

monerentiii'. 


monerer 
monereris,  or  re 
monere'tiir  ; 

PERFECT. 

/  may  have  been  advised. 
mom  tils  slm1  monitl 

monitiis  sis  monitl  sltis 

monitiis  sit  ;  monitl  sint. 

PLUPERFECT. 

/  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have  been  advised. 
monitiis  essent1  monitl  essemiig 

monitiis  esses  monitl  essetis 

monitiis  esset  ;  monitl  essent. 

IMPERATIVE. 

PRES.  monere,     be  thou  advised ;    \  moneinin.1,  be  ye  advised. 
FUT.     monetor,  thoii  shalt  be  ad- 
vised. 


monetor,  he  shall  be   ad- 
vised; 

INFINITIVE. 

PRES.  monerl,  to  be  advised, 
PERF.  monitiis  esse,  to  have  been 

advised, 
FUT.     monitiiiu.  Irl,  to  be  altout 

to  be  advised. 


monentor,    they  shall  I*  advised. 


P  A  II  T  I  C  I  P  L  K. 


PERF.  monittis,         advised, 
FUT.     inunencltis,  to  be  advisc/l. 


1  See  206,  foot-notes. 


82  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

SECOND   CONJUGATION  — ACTIVE  VOICE. 

EXERCISE    XXVIII. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Moneo,  moncrc,  monui,  mom  turn,  to  advise. 

PareO,  pfirere,  parui,  pEritum,  to  obey. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Moneo,  monCbam,  monebo.1  2.  Mones,  inonetis.  3. 
Monet,  monent.  4.  Monemus,  monebamus,  monebimus. 
5.  Monebant,  monebunt.  6.  Monui,  monueram,  monuero. 
7.  Monuimns,  monueramus,  monuerimus.  8.  Monuit,  mon- 
uerunt.  9.  Monuerat,  monuerant.  10.  Monuerit,  monue- 
rint.  11.  Moneam,  monorem,  monuerim,  monuissem.  12. 
Moneat,  moneant.  13.  Moneret,  monerent.  14.  Monuerit, 
monuerint.  15.  Monuisset,  monuissent. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  You  advise,  you  were  advising,  you  will  advise. 
2.  He  obeys,  they  obey.  3.  He  was  obeying,  they  were 
obeying.  4.  He  will  advise,  they  will  advise.  5.  He  has 
obeyed,  he  had  obeyed,  he  will  have  obeyed.  6.  They  have 
advised,  they  had  advised,  they  will  have  advised.  7.  I 
have  advised,  we  have  advised.  8.  I  had  advised,  I  had 
obeyed.  9.  He  may  advise,  he  may  obey. 


1  The  pupil  should  carefully  compare  the  forms  grouped  together  un- 
der the  several  numerals,  and  observe  wherein  they  differ  from  eaeh  other 


ETYMOLOGY. SECOND    CONJUGATION.  83 

FIRST   AND   SECOND   CONJUGATIONS  — ACTIVE  VOICE. 

EXERCISE    XXIX. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Canto,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  sing. 

Spcro,  are,  avi.  atiim,  to  hope. 

II.      Translate  into  English. 

1.  Sperat,  paret.1  2.  Sperant,  parent.  3.  Speramus,  pa- 
rtjmus.  4.  Sperabat,  parebat.  5.  Sperabant,  parebant. 
G.  Sperabam,  parebam.  7.  Sperabarnus,  parebamus.  8. 
Sperabimus,  parebimus.  9.  Sperabo,  parebo.  10.  Speravi, 
parui.  11.  Speraveram,  parueram.  12.  Speravero,  paruero. 
13.  Speravimus,  parmmus.  14.  Sperav6rat,  paruerat.  15. 
Speraverint,  paruerint.  16.  Sperate,  parete. 

III.      Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  I  sing,  I  advise.  2.  I  was  singing,  I  was  advising. 
3.  I  will  sing,  I  will  advise.  4.  He  will  hope,  he  will  obey. 
5.  They  will  hope,  they  will  o"bey.  G.  They  w^ere  singing, 
they  were  advising.  7.  They  sing,  they  advise.  8.  He  has 
hoped,  he  has  obeyed.  9.  They  have  hoped,  they  have 
obeyed.  10.  He  had  sung,  he  had  obeyed.  11.  They  had 
sung,  they  had  obeyed.  12.  We  had  hoped,  we  had  ad- 
vised. 13.  We  would  sing,  we  would  obey. 

1  In  this  Exercise,  the  pupil  should  carefully  compare  the  correspond- 
ing forms  in  the  two  Conjugations,  —  the  First  and  the  Second,  —  and 
should  carefully  observe  the  difference  between  them. 


84  INTJIODUCTOKY    LAT1X   BOOK. 


SECOND    CONJUGATION-- ACTIVE  VOICE. 
OTHER  PAIITS  OF  SPEECH. 

ExKitcisis    XXX. 

I.      Yoccibulary. 

Aurum,  I,  n.  yold. 

Flos,  floris,  m.  flower. 

Habeo,  habere,  liubul,  habit iim,  to  have,  hold. 

Mereo,  merere,  menu,  meritiim,  to  deserve,  merit. 

Philosophus,  I,  m.  philosopher. 

Pondus,  ponderis,  n.  weight,  7nass. 
Praebeo,  praebere,  praebui,  pracbitum,         to  furnish,  give. 

Praemium,  il,  n.  reward. 

Taceo,  taccre,  tacul,  taciturn,  to  le  silent. 

Terreo,  terrere,  tcrrui,  territum,  to  friohten,  terrify. 

II.      Translate  into  English. 

1.  Pucr  libruni  liabet.  2.  Pucri  libros  liabent.  C.  Libros 
utiles1  habemus.  4.  Librum  utileni  habuisti.  5.  Nonnc 
bonum1  amlcum  habebis?  G.  Bonum  amicuni  habijbo.  7. 
Bonos  amicos  habuimus.  8.  Rex  amlcos  habebat.  9.  Ilex 
auruni  habebat.  10.  Hex2  magnum  ami  pondus3  habuerat. 
11.  Gloriam  veram  habcbitis.  12.  Vcr  praebet  flores.  13. 
Yer  praebebit  flores.  14.  Philosophus  tacebat.  15.  Dis- 
cipulus  praemium  meret. 

1  Observe  that  the  Latin  adjective  may  either  precede  or  follow  iU 
noun ;  though  it  seems  more  frequently  to  follow,  unless  it  is  emphatic. 

2  In  this  sentence,  endeavor,  in  accordance  with  Suggestion  IV.,  to 
discover  the  subject,  verb,  and  object,  hefore  looking  out  the  words  in  the 
Vocabulary.     In  what  order  will  you  look  out  the  words  in  accordance 
with  Suggestion  V. '? 

3  When  *a  noun  is  qualified  by  both  an  adjective  and  a  genitive,  as 
pondus  by  magnum  and  auri,  the  adjective  usually  precedes  both  nouns, 
and  is  followed  by  the  genitive,  ass  in  this  example:  magnum  auri  pondus. 


ETYMOLOGY SECOND    CONJUGATION.  85 

III.      Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Who  lias  my  book?  2.  I  have  your  book.  3.  Which 
book  have  you?  4.  I  have  three1  book's.  5.  My  brother 
lias  ten  books.  G.  The  king  had  a  golden  crown.  7.  Did 
he  not  have  many  friends?  8.  He  had  many  friends. 
9.  You  will  have  true  friends.  10.  The  pupils  arc  silent.2 
11.  Will  you  not  be  silent?  12.  We  will  be  silent. 

SECOND    CONJUGATION— PASSIVE  VOICE. 
EXERCISE    XXXI. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Moneor,  monGbar,  monebor.  2.  Monemur,  moncbri- 
mur,  monebimur.  3.  Moneatur,  moneantur.  4.  Monerc- 
tur,  monerentur.  5.  Monitus  cst,  moniti  sunt.  6.  Monitus 
erat,  moniti  erant.  7.  Monitus  erit,  moniti  erunt.  8.  Monc- 
tor,  monentor.  9.  Monet,  monctur.  10.  Monent,  monen- 
tur.  11.  Monebat,  Monebatur.  12.  Monebant,  moneban- 
tur.  13.  Monebit,  monebitur.  14.  Monebunt,  monebuntur. 
15.  Monemus,  monemur.  16.  Monebfimus,  Monebamur. 
17.  Monebimus,  monebimur. 

II.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  He  is  advised,  they  are  advised.  2.  I  was  terrified, 
we  were  terrified.  3.  He  will  be  advised,  they  will  be  ad- 
vised. 4.  You  have  been  terrified,  I  have  been  terrified. 
5.  He  had  been  advised,  he  had  been  terrified.  6.  I  shall 
have  been  advised,  I  shall  have  been  terrified.  7.  I  advise, 
I  am  advised.  8.  I  was  advising,  I  was  advised.  9.  I  shall 
advise,  I  shall  be  advised.  10.  They  terrify,  they  are  ter- 
rified. 11.  They  were  terrifying,  they  were  terrified.  12. 
They  will  terrify,  they  will  be  terrified. 

1  Place  the  Numeral  before  the  noun. 

2  Are  silent  is  to  be  rendered  by  the  Latin  verb  taceo. 

1   «l   V    *2  *  v  fe*  *  *    £j 


86  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

FIRST  AND  SECOND   CONJUGATIONS  — PASSIVE  VOICE. 
EXERCISE    XXXII. 

N 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Admonco,  admonere,  admonm,  admomtum,  to  admonish. 

Amo,  arc,  avi,  atiim,  to  love. 

Invlto,  are,  avi,  atiim,  to  invite. 

Laudo,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  praise. 

Terreo,  terrere,  terrul,  territum,  to  terrify. 

Vitupero,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  Name. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Invitatur,  terretur.  2.  Invitantur,  terrentur.  3.  In- 
vitamur,  terremur.  4.  Invitabamur,  terrebamur.  5.  In- 
vitabatur,  terrebatur.  6.  Invitabantur,  terrebantur.  7. 
Invitabuntur,  terrebuntur.  8.  Invitabitur,  terrebitur.  9.  In- 
vitabor,  terrebor.  10.  Invitatus  sum,  territus  sum.  11. 
Invitati  sumus,  territi  sumus.  12.  Invitatus  est,  territus 
est.  13.  Invitati  sunt,  territi  sunt.  14.  Invitati  erant,  ter- 
riti erant.  15.  Invitatus  erat,  territus  erat. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  I  am  invited,  I  am  admonished.  2.  You  are  invited, 
you  are  admonished.  3.  He  was  praised,  he  was  advised. 
4.  They  were  praised,  they  were  advised.  5.  You  will  be 
invited,  you  will  be  admonished.  6.  He  has  been  blamed, 
he  has  been  terrified.  7.  They  had  been  loved,  they  had 
been  admonished.  8.  They  will  have*  been  invited,  they 


ETYMOLOGY. SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


87 


will  have  been  admonished.  9.  I  may  be  invited,  I  may 
be  admonished.  10.  I  should  be  invited,  I  should  be  ad- 
monished. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION  — PASSIVE  VOICE. 
OTHER  PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 

EXERCISE    XXXIII. 


I.      Vocabulary. 

Apud,  prep,  with  ace. 

Exerceo,  exereere,  exercul,  exercitum, 

Prater,  fratris,  m. 

Miigister,  miigistri,  m, 

M&noria,  ae,/. 

Puer,  pueri,  m. 

Quis,  quae,  quid,1 

Recte,.  adv. 

Tuus,  a,  iim, 


near,  before,  among. 

to  exercise,  train. 

brother. 

master,  teacher. 

memory. 

boy. 

who,  which,  what? 

rightly. 

your,  yours. 


II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Quis  monetur?  2.  Xonne  puer  monetur?  3.  Puer 
recte  monetur.  4.  Pugri  recte  monentur.  5.  Discipuli 
recte  moniti  sunt.  6.  DiscipQlus  recte  monitus  est.  7. 
Frater  tuus  recte  admomtus  erit.  8.  Fratres  tui  recte  ad- 
moniti  ei*unt.  9.  Nonne  admomti  sumus?  10.  Recte 
admoniti  sumus.  11.  Memoria  exercetur.  12.  Memoria 


1  For  the  declension  of  the  Interrogative  Pronoun  quis,  see  1 88. 
o 


88  IXTKODUCTOKY    LATIN   BOOK. 

exerceatur.1     13.  Memoria  exercebitur.    14.  Discipuli  apud 
niagistros  exercentur. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Were  not  the  boys  terrified  ?  2.  They  were  terrified. 
3.  Let2  the  pupils  be  admonished.  4.  They  have  been  ad- 
monished. 5.  Who  will  be  advised  ?  6.  These  boys  will 
be  advised.  7.  Has  your  memory  been  exercised  ?  8.  My 
memory  has  been  exercised.  9.  Was  not  the  general  terri- 
fied? 10.  The  general  himself 3  was  not  terrified.  11.  The 
soldiers  were  terrified. 


FIRST  AND  SECOND   CONJUGATIONS  — MISCELLANEOUS 
EXAMPLES. 

EXERCISE    XXXIY. 

I.     Vocabulary. 

Camillas,  I,  m.  Camillus,  Roman  general. 

Exspeeto,  are,  avl,  atum,  to  await,  expect. 

Hostis,  is,  m.  and  /.  enemy. 

Ingens,  ingentis,  huge,  large,  great. 

Legio,  legionis,  /.  legion,  body  of  soldiers. 

Non,  adv.  not. 

Numerus,  1,  m.  number. 

Opto,  are,  avl,  atum,  to  wish  for,  desire. 

Pecunia,  ae,/.  money. 

1  Exerceatur;  the  Subjunctive  is  sometimes  best  rendered  by  let.     See 
196.  I  2. 

2  J^et  be  admonished  is  to  be  rendered  into  Latin  by  a  single  verb  in  the 
Subjunctive.     See  196, 1.  2. 

3  Himself  =  ipsc.     See  186, 


ETYMOLOGY. SECOND    CONJUGATION.  89 

Philosophus,  I,  m.  philosopher. 

Praeceptor,  pracccptoris,  m.  teacher. 

Proelium,  il,  n.  battle.  , 

Romanus,  I,  m.  Roman,  a  Roman. 

Supero,  are,  avl,  atum,  to  conquer. 

Verecundia,  ae,  f.  modesty. 


II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Camillas  hostes  superavit.  2.  Hostes  superati  sunt. 
3.  Omnes  discipiili  paruerant.1  4.  Roman!  hostem  exspecta- 
bant.  5.  Roman! 2  ingentem  hostium  numerum3  exspecta- 
verant.1  G.  Hostes  proelium  exspectabant.  7.  Praeceptor 
tacebat.  8.  Discipuli  tacebant.  9.  Verecundia  juventutem 
ornat.  10.  Philosophus  pecuniam  non  habet;  11.  Philos- 
ophi  pecuniam  non  optant. 


III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Are  you  expecting  me  ?  2.  We  are  expecting  you. 
3.  Did  you  not  await  the  enemy?4  4.  We  awaited  the 
enemy.  5.  Have  you  not  a  good  memory  ?  6.  I  have  a 
good  memory.  7.  Will  the  soldiers  obey  ?  8.  The  brave 
soldiers  will  obey.  9.  Camillus  had  an  army.  10.  He 
praised  the  army.  11.  Did  you  advise  the  boy?  12.  We 
advised  the  boys.  13.  Were  not  the  enemy  put  to  flight  ?5 
14.  They  were  put  to  flight. 

1  In  accordance  with  Suggestion  VII.  3,  for  what  form  will  you  look 
in  the  Vocabulary  ?     See  205,  207. 

2  Apply  to  this  sentence  Suggestions  IV.  and  V. 

3  Ingentem  hostium  numgrum,  for  arrangement  see  note  on  pondus,  Exer- 
cise XXX. 

4  Put  the  Latin  word  in  the  plural. 

5  Put  to  flight  is  to  be  rendered  by  a  single  Latin  verb. 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 


THIRD     CONJUGATION. 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 

209,  Kego,   I  rule. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 
Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind. 

rego,  regere,  rexi, 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 


Supine. 

rectthu. 


SINGULAR. 


r£gel>am 
rggebas 


r£gam 
reges 


rexl 
rexisti 
rexlt  § 


rex^ras 
rex£rat ; 


PRESENT   TENSE. 
I  rule. 


rex^rfs 
rex^rit  ; 


PLURAL. 

regimiis 
regltis 


FUTURE. 

/  shall  or  will  rule. 


IMPERFECT 
/  was  ruling. 

regebamtts 

regUJlmnt. 

regemiis 

regent. 
PERFECT. 
/  rw/ec/  or  Aat'e  ?*u/ec/. 

ruxintuN 
rcxistis 
rexemnt,  or 
PLUPERFECT. 
/  had  ruled. 

rex£ramiis 


rex^rant. 


FUTURE  PERFECT. 
7  shall  or  will  have  ruled. 


rcx^rint. 


ETYMOLOGY. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


91 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


SINGULAR. 

rggam 

regas 


PRESENT. 
/  may  or  can  rule. 


PLURAL. 

regain  iis 
regatis 


IMPERFECT. 

/  might,  could,  would,  or  should  rule. 


reg£retis 
regerct ;  regerent. 

PERFECT. 
/  may  have  ruled. 

rex^rim.  rexerfmiis 

rex£rfs  rexerltis 

rex£rit ;  rex£rint« 

PLUPERFECT.    • 

I  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have  ruled. 
rcxiss£m  rexissemiis 

rexisses  rexissetXs 

rexissent* 

IMPERATIVE. 


PRES.  reg^9      rulethou; 

FUT.    regitOj  thou  shall  rule, 
regitO,  he  shall  rule ; 

INFINITIVE. 

PRES.  reg£r£,      to  rule. 
PERF.  rexiss£9     to  have  ruled. 
FUT.    rectftrws  ess^,  to  be  about 
to  rule. 

GERUND. 

Gen.  regendl,.  of  ruling, 

Dat.  rcgendd,  for  ruling, 

Ace.  regentliim,  ruling, 

All.  regend.6,  by  ruliny. 


rule  ye. 
ye  shall  rule, 
r£gmit6,     they  shall  rule. 

PARTICIPLE. 
PRES.  rdgens,        ruling. 

FUT.     rcctftriis,    about  to  rule. 
SUPINE. 


Ace.     rectiim,  to  rule, 

Abl.      rccttt,       to  rule,  be  ruled. 


92  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   COOK. 

THIRD     CONJUGATION. 

PASSIVE    VOICE. 

210.  Regor,  I  am  ruled. 

PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 
Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  perf.  Ind. 

regor,  regi,  rectus  sum, 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

PRESENT   TENSE. 
I  am  ruled. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

rggdr  regimiir 

regeVas,  cr  r£  regimlnl 

regatitr ;  regitntitr. 


regfcbar 
reg«Bl>aris,  or 
r6gel>atikr  ; 


IMPERFECT. 
/  ivas  ruled. 


regetoamlnl 
r6getoantti.r. 


FUTURE. 

I  shall  or  will  be  ruled. 

rggar  regemitr 

rggeris,  or  rtS  reg£mXnI 

rSgetiir ;  regentiir. 

PERFECT. 

/  have  been  or  was  ruled. 
rectiis  siim  x  rectl 

rectiis  es  rectl 

rectiis  cst ;  rcctl 

PLUPERFECT. 
/  had  been  ruled. 

rectiis  eram1  recti  eranriis 

rectiis  eras  rectl  eralis 

rectiis  erat  ;  rectl 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 
/  shall  or  will  have  been  ruled. 


rectiis  er6  l 

rectiis  eris 
rectiis 


rectl  erimiis 
rectl  erltas 
rectl 


1  See  206,  foot-notes. 


ETYMOLOGY. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


SUBJUNCTIVE.* 

PRESENT. 
/  may  or  can  be  ruled. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

rggamiir 

regaris,  or  re 
rSgatiir ; 

IMPERFECT. 

/  might,  could,  would,  or  should  be  ruled. 

rggerer 

regereris,  or  re" 

rgge"retiir ;  regereiititr. 

PERFECT. 

/  may  have  been  ruled. 
rectits  sim  L  rectl 

rcctiis  sis  rcctl  sltis 

rectiis  sit  ;  rectl  sin* . 

PLUPERFECT. 

/  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have  been  ruled. 


rectits  essem  1 
rcctiis  esses 
rcctiis  esset  ; 


rcctl  cssemiks 

rcctl  ess^tlsf 
rectl  cssent. 


IMPERATIVE. 
PRES.  rogere",    be  thou  ruled;         \  regimiiil,  be  ye  ruled. 

FUT.     regitdr,  thou  shalt  be  ruled, 
rcgitor,  he  shall  be  ruled ; 

INFINITIVE. 

PRES.  r€gl,  to  be  ruled. 

PERF.  rcctiis  esse,  to  have  been 

ruled. 
FUT.     rectiini  Irl,  to  be  about  to 

be  ruled. 


'9  ye  shall  be  ruled. 

PARTICIPLE. 

PERF.  rectiis,          ruled. 
FUT.     regend.iis,  to  be  ruled. 


1  See  206,  foot-notes. 


04  rNTEODUCTOHY   LATIN  BOOK. 

-THIRD   CONJUGATION— ACTIVK  VOICE. 
EXERCISE    XXXV, 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Diico,  ere,  duxi,  ductum,  to  lead. 

Rego,  ere,  rcxi,  rectum,  to  rule,  govern. 

II.      Translate  into  English. 

1.  Rego,  regebam,  regain.  2.  Regmius,  regcbfimus,  re- 
genius.  3.  Regitis,  regis.  4.  Regebas,  regebatis.  5.  Rege- 
bant,  regebat.  6.  Reget,  regent.  7.  Rexerunt,  rexit.  8. 
Rexi,  rexeram,  rexero.  9.  Reximus,  rexeriimus,  rexerimus. 
10.  Regas,  regeres,  rexeris,  rexisses.  11.  Regatis,  regeretis, 
rexeritis,  rexissetis.  12.  Regam,  regrimus.  13.  Regere- 
mus,  regerem.  14.  Rexerit,  rexerint.  15.  Rexissent,  rex- 
isset.  16.  Rege,  regite. 

III.      Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  He  leads,  he  was  leading,  he  will  lead.  2.  He  rules, 
he  was  ruling,  he  will  rule.  3.  They  lead,  they  rule.  4. 
They  were  leading,  they  were  ruling.  5.  They  will  lead, 
they  will  rule.  6.  You  have  led,  you  have  ruled.  7.  He 
had  led,  he  had  ruled.  8.  They  had  led,  they  had  ruled. 
9.  He  will  have  led,  he  will  have  ruled.  10.  They  may 
lead,  they  may  rule.  11.  He  would  lead,  he  would  rule. 
12.  They  would  lead,  they  would  rule.  13.  AYe  should 
have  led,  we  should  have  ruled. 


ETYMOLOGY.  —  THIRD    CONJUGATION.  95 

FIRST,  SECOND,  AND  THIRD  CONJUGATIONS  —  ACTIVE 

VOICE. 

EXERCISE    XXXVI. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Dico,  dicer  e,  dixi,  dictum,  to  say,  tell,  ^eak. 

Voco,  are,  uvi,  atum,  to  call. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Vocat,  tacet,  elicit.1  2.  Vocant,  tacent,  dicunt.  3. 
Vocabant,  tacebant,  dicebant.  4.  Vocabo,  tacebo,  dicain. 
5.  Vocavimus,  tacuimus,  dixinius.  G.  Vocavi,  tacui,  dixi. 
7.  Vocaverunt,  tacuerunt,  dixerunt.  8.  Vocaverat,  tacue- 
rat,  dixerat.  9.  Vocaverint,  tacuerint,  dixerint.  10.  Vo- 
ccm,  taceam,  dicam.  11.  Vocarent,  tacercnt,  diccrent.  12. 
VocFitc,  tacete,  dicitc. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  I  invite,  I  admonish,  I  lead.  2.  We  call,  we  are  silent, 
we  speak.  3.  We  were  inviting,  we  were  admonishing,  we 
were  leading.  4.  I  shall  call,  I  shall  be  silent,  I  shall  speak. 
5.  He  has  invited,  he  has  been  silent,  he  has  led.  6.  He 
had  praised,  he  had  obeyed,  he  had  ruled.  7.  They  had 
blamed,  they  had  advise'd,  they  had  spoken.  8.  He  may 
call,  he  may  admonish,  he  may  rule. 

1  In  this  Exercise,  the  pupil  should  carefully  compare  the  correspond- 
ing forms  in  the  three  Conjugations  here  represented,  —  the  First,  the 
Second,  and  the  Third,  —  and  should  carefully  observe  the  difference  be- 
tween them.  The  advantages  of  such  a  course  are  twofold:  first,  it 
teaches  the  pupil  to  distinguish  the  several  Conjugations  from  each  other, 
which  is  one  of  the  most  important  lessons  to  be  learned  in  the  study  of  the 
language;  and,  secondly,  it  tends  to  form  in  him,  thus  early,  the  habit 
of  close  and  accurate  observation,  the  habit  of  marking  differences  and  of 
tracing  resemblances  in  kindred  forms,  which  is  of  vital  importance  in 
the  whole  course  of  classical  study. 


96  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

THIRD  CONJUGATION— ACTIVE  VOICE. 
OTHER  PARTS  or  SPEECH. 

EXERCISE    XXXVII. 
I.      Vocabulary. 

Animus^  1,  m.  mind,  passion. 

Benc,  adv.  well. 

Defectio,  defectionis,  /.  eclipse. 

Disertc,  adv.  clearly,  eloquently. 

Educo,  educere,  eduxi,  eductum,  to  lead  forth. 

Indlco,  indicere,  indixl,  indicium,  to  declare. 

Latme,  adv.  in  Latin. 

Praedlco,  praedicere,  praedixl,  praedictum,    to  predict,  foretell. 

Sapienter,  adv.  wisely. 

Thales,  is,  m.  Tholes,  a  philosopher. 

Tullus,  I,  m.  Tullus,  a  Roman  name. 

Verum,  I,  n.  truth. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Bene  dixisti.  2.  Nonne  Cicero  in  senatu  dixerat? 
3.  Cicero  cliserte  dicebat.  4.  Oratores  diserte  dicent.  5. 
Philosophus  sapienter  dixit.  6.  Philosopbi  sapienter  dixe- 
rant.  7.  Oratores  Latin e  dixerunt.  8.  Caesar  legiones 
eduxit.  9.  Hannibal  exercitum  in  Italiam  duxit.  10.  Quis 
bellum  indixit?  11.  Tullus  bellum  indixit.  12.  Thales 
defectionem  solis  praedixit. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Wbo  will  speak  the  truth?  2.  Have  we  not  spoken 
the  truth?  3.  You  have  spoken  the  truth.  4.  Will  not 
the  general  lead  fortb  the  army  ?  5.  He  has  led  forth  the 
army.  6.  Do  you  not  govern  your  mind  ?  7.  We  govern 
our  minds.  8.  Did  you  predict  this  war  ?  9.  We  did  not 
predict  the  war.  10.  Who  has  declared  war?  11.  The 
Romans  have  declared  war. 


ETYMOLOGY. THIRD   CONJUGATION.  97 

THIRD  CONJUGATION  — PASSIVE  VOICE. 
EXERCISE    XXXVIII. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Regor,  regebar,  regar.  2.  Regimur,  regebamur,  rege- 
mur.  3.  Regar,  regamur.  4.  Regeretur,  regerentur.  5. 
Rectus  est,  rectus  erat,  rectus  erit.  6.  Recti  sunt,  recti 
erant,  recti  erunt.  7.  Regit,  regitur.  8.  Regunt,  reguntur. 

9.  Regebat,  regebatur.    10.  Regebant,  regebantur.    11.  Re- 
get,  regetur.      12.  Regent,  regentur.      13.  Regimus,  regi- 
mur.    14.  Regebamus,  regebamur.    15.  Regemus,  regemur. 

II.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  He  is  ruled,  they  are  ruled.  2.  I  am  ruled,  I  am  led. 
3.  We  are  ruled,  we  are  led.  4.  He  was  ruled,  they  were 
ruled.  5.  He  will  be  ruled,  they  will  be  ruled.  6.  We 
have  been  ruled,  we  have  been  led.  7.  I  lead,  I  am  led. 
8.  We  lead,  we  are  led.  9.  We  were  ruling,  we  were  ruled. 

10.  He  was  leading,  he  was  led.     11.  They  may  rule,  they 
may  be  ruled. 

FIRST,  SECOND,  AND  THIRD   CONJUGATIONS - 
PASSIVE  YOICE. 

EXERCISE    XXXIX. 

I.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Yocor,  moneor,  ducor.  2.  Yocamur,  monemur,  du- 
cimur.  3.  Yocatur,  monetur,  ducitur.  4.  Yocabatur, 
monebatur,  ducebatur.  5.  Yocabantur,  monebantur,  duce- 
bantur.  6.  Vocabuntur,  monebuntur,  ducentur.  7.  Voca- 


98  INTRODUCTORY    LATIN   BOOK. 

tus  es,  m  on  it  us  es,  ductus  es.  8.  Vocati  estis,  moniti  estis. 
ducti  estis.  9.  Vocatus  eram,  monitus  eram,  ductus  cram. 
10.  Vocatus  erit,  monitus  Grit,  ductus  erit. 

II.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  He  is  invited,  lie  is  admonished,  he  is  led.  2.  We 
were  called,  we  were  advised,  we  were  ruled.  3.  He  will 
be  called,  he  will  be  advised,  he  will  be  ruled.  4.  He  may 
be  invited,  he  may  be  admonished,  he  may  be  led.  5.  He 
has  been  called,  he  has  been  advised,  he  has  been  led.  6. 
They  have  been  called,  they  have  been  advised,  they  have 
been  led. 

THIRD   CONJUGATION  — PASSIVE  VOICE. 
OTHER  PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 

EXERCISE    XL. 
I.     Vocabulary. 

Mundiis,  I,  m.  world. 

Semper,  adv.  always,  ever. 

Verum,  I,  n.  truth. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Mundus  regitur.  2.  Omnis  hie  mundus  semper  rectus 
est.  3.  Hie  mundus  semper  regetur.  4.  Haec  civitas  bene 
regitur.  5.  Hae  civitiites  bene  reguntur.  6.  Civitates  rec- 
tae  sunt.  7.  Animus  regatur.  8.  Exercitus  in  Italiam 
ductus  est.  9.  Multi  exercitus  in  Italiam  ducti  erant.  10. 
Bellum  indictum1  erat.  11.  Multa  bella  indicta1  sunt. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Was  not  the  army  led  forth  ?  2.  The  army  was  led 
forth.  3.  Has  not  this  state  been  well  governed?  4.  This 

1  Why  indictum  in  one  example,  and  indicta  injhe  other  ?  Why  not 
rather  indictus  in  both  ?  See  Rule  XXXV.  1,  page  54. 


ETYMOLOGY. THIRD   CONJUGATION.  99 

state  has  been  well  governed.  5.  Will  not  the  truth  be 
spoken?  6.  The  truth  has  been  spoken.  7.  Let1  the  truth 
always  be  spoken.  8.  Would  not  war  have  been  declared  ? 
9.  War  would  have  been  declared. 


FIRST,  SECOND,  AND   THIRD   CONJUGATIONS  — 
MISCELLANEOUS  EXAMPLES. 

EXERCISE    XLI. 

I.     Vocabulary. 

Gallus,  I,  ??i.  Gallus  i  a  proper  name. 

Hirundo,  hirundinis,  f.  swallow. 

Luna,  ae,  /.  moon. 

Nuntio,  arc,  fw,  atum,  to  proclaim ,  announce' 

Sensus,  us,  m.  feeling,  perception. 

Supplicium,  ii,  ??.  punisJiment. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Hirundines  adventum  veris  nuntiant.  2.  Hirundines 
adventum  veris  nuntiaverant.  3.  Discipuli  laudabuntur. 
4.  Gallus  defectiones  soils  praedixit.  5.  Defectiones  lunae 
praedixit.  6.  Defectiones  lunae  praedicuntur.  7.  Omne 
animal  sensus  habet.  8.  -Pueri  tacebant. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  This  boy  has  not  observed  the  law.  2.  Good  citizens 
will  observe  the  laws.  3.  Let  the  laws  be  observed.  4. 
Who  has  your  book  ?  5.  That  boy  has  my  book.  6.  You 
shall,  have  my  book.  7.  What  did  you  say  ?  8.  I  spoko 
the  truth.  9.  The  truth  would  have  been  spoken. 

1  Let  be  spoken,  render  by  the  Latin  Subjunctive.     See  196,  I.  2. 


100 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 


Pres.  Ind. 

audio, 


FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 

211.  Audio,  I  hear. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 
Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind. 

audire,  audivi, 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 


Supine. 

auditum. 


SINGULAR. 

audio 
audls 
audit ; 


audiebam. 

audiebas 
audiebat  ; 


audiam. 

audies 


audivi 
audivisti 
audivlt  ; 


audiverat  ; 

audiv£r6 
audiv£rfs 
audiv^rit  ; 


PRESENT   TENSE. 
7  hear. 


IMPERFECT. 
/  was  hearing. 


PLURAL. 

a  udi  111  ins 

audltis 

audiunt. 


audiebamiis 

audiebatis 
audieba/nt. 


FUTURE. 

/  shall  or  will  hear. 


audiemiis 

audietis 

audient. 


PERFECT. 
I  heard  or  have  heard. 


audivistis 
audivemnt,  or 
PLUPERFECT. 
/  had  heard. 

audiverfniiu.* 
audiv^ratis 
audiverant. 
FUTURE  PERFECT. 
/  shall  or  will  have  "heard. 

audiveriniiis 


audiv^rint. 


ETYMOLOGY.  —  FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


101 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


PRESENT. 
I  may  or  can  hear. 

SINGULAR.                                                           PLURAL. 

audiam 
audias 
audiat  ; 

audiamiis 
audiatis 

a  ud  ia  lit. 

IMPERFECT. 

/  might,  could,  ivould,  or  should  hear. 
audlrem. 
audlres 
audiret  ; 


audiretis 
audlrent. 


PERFECT. 
I  may  have  heard. 

audiverim  audiverlmiis 

audive'rls  audiverftis 

audive'rit ;  audive'rint. 

PLUPERFECT. 

I  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have  heard. 
audivissem  audivisse'miis 

audivisses  audivissetis 

audivisset ;  audivissent. 

IMPERATIVE. 


PRES.  aiidi,         hear  thou  ; 

PUT.     audit 6,  thou  shall  hear, 
audit 6,  he  shall  hear  ; 

INFINITIVE. 

PRES.  audir£,         to  hear. 
PERF.  audivisse,  to  have  heard. 
PUT.     auditttriis   ess^,   to  be 
about  to  hear. 

GERUND. 

Gen.  audientll,  of  hearing. 

Dat.  audiendLo,  for  hearing. 

Ace.  audiendti.m,  hearing. 

AIL  audientlO,  by  hearing. 


hear  ye. 
audltote,    ye  shall  hear, 
audiunt69  they  shall  hear. 

PARTICIPLE. 

PRES.  audieiis,        hearing. 
PUT.     auditfiriis,     about  to  hear. 

SUPINE. 


Ace.     auditiiin,  to  hear. 

Abl.      auditft,       to  hear,  be  heard. 


102 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN  BOOK. 


FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

PASSIVE    VOICE. 

21 2.   Audior,   I  am  heard. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind. 


Pres.  Ind. 

audior, 


audiii,  auditiis  sum. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

PRESENT    TENSE. 
/  am  heard. 


SINGULAR. 

audior 

audlris,  or  re 
audltiir  ; 


PLURAL. 
audlmiir 
audlm.in.1 
audinntiir. 


IMPERFECT. 
/  was  heard. 

audiel>ar  audiefoamiir 

audiefoaris,  or  re  audiebaminX 

audiel>atiir ;  audiebantiir. 

FUTURE. 
/  shall  or  will  be  heard. 


audiar 

audierls,  or  re 
audietitr ; 


audieiniir 
audieminX 
audientiir. 


PERFECT. 
/  have  been  heard. 


audittis  siim  l 
atiditiis  &s 
auditiis  est ; 


auditl 
auditl  estis 
auditl 


PLUPERFECT. 

I  had  bem  heard. 


auditiis  eram  l 
audittts  eras 
auditiis  erat  ; 


auditl  e'ramiis 
auditl  Gratis 
auditl  ersint. 


FUTURE  PERFECT. 

/  shall  or  will  have  been  heard. 


auditiis  ero  l 
auditiis  ^ris 
auditiis  £rit  5 


auditl 

auditl  e"rltls 

auditl 


See  206,  foot-notes, 


ETYMOLOGY. FOURTH    COXJUG ATIOX. 


103 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 
7  may  or  can  be  heard. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

audiar  audiamiir 

audiarls,  or  re  audiamliil 

audiatiir ;  audiantiir. 

IMPERFECT. 

I  might,  could,  would,  or  should  be  heard. 

audlr£r  audlremiir 

audlrerls,  or  re"  audlremln.1 

audlretiir ;  audlrentiir. 
PERFECT. 


/  may  have  been  heard. 


auditii-S  sim. 1 
audlttts  sis 
a  uditiis  sit  ; 


auditl 
auditl  sitis 
auditl  sint. 


PLUPERFECT. 


/  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have  been  heard. 


auditiis  cssem  1 

auditiis  esses 
auditiks  ess^t ; 


auditl  essemiks 
auditl  essetls 
auditl  essent. 


IMPERATIVE. 

PJEES.  audlr^,    be  thou  heard ;          \  audimlni,      be  ye  heard. 
TUT.    auditor,  thou  shalt  be  heard, 


audltdr,  he  shall  be  heard  ; 


audiuntor,  they  shall  be  heard. 


INFINITIVE. 


PRES.  audirl, 


to  be  heard. 


PERF.  auditiis  ess^S,  to  have  been 

heard. 
FUT.    auditiim.  Irl,  to   be  about 

to  be  heard. 


PARTICIPLE. 


PERF.   auditiis,          heard. 
FUT.     audlend-iks,  to  be  heard. 


1  See  206,  foot-no te$. 


104  INTRODUCTORY  LATIX  BOOK. 

FOURTH    CONJUGATION.  — ACTIVE  VOICE. 

EXERCISE    XLIL 

I.     Vocabulary. 

Custodio,  Ire,  ivi,  Itiim,  to  guard. 

Dormio,  ire,  Ivi,  Itum,  to  sleep. 

Eriidio,  ire,  ivi,  iturn,  to  instruct,  refine,  educate. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Audis,  audiebas,  audies.  2.  Auditis,  audiebatis,  audi- 
Gtis.  3.  Audio,  audlraus.  4.  Audiebam,  audiebamus.  5. 
Audiam,  audiemus.  6.  Audivimus,  audiveramus,  audiveri- 
mus.  7.  Audivi,  audiveram,  audiverq.  8.  Audlvit,  audi- 
verunt.  9.  Audiam,  audlrem,  audiverim,  audivissem.  10. 
Audiamus,  audiremus,  audiverimus,  audivissemus.  11.  Au- 
dlto,  auditote. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  I  hear,  I  guard.  2.  We  hear,  we  guard.  3.  He  was 
hearing,  they  were  sleeping.  4.  He  was  sleeping,  they 
were  hearing.  5.  He  will  hear,  they  will  hear.  6.  We 
have  slept,  you  have  heard.  7.  I  had  heard,  I  had  guarded. 
8.  He  may  hear,  they  may  sleep.  9.  They  may  hear,  he 
may  sleep.  10.  He  might  hear,  they  might  sleep.  11.  He 
might  sleep,  they  might  hear. 

FIRST,    SECOND,    THIRD,    AND    FOURTH    CONJUGA- 
TIONS.—ACTIVE  VOICE. 

EXERCISE    XLIIL 

I.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Invitat,  admonet,  ducit,  custodit.  2.  Invitant,  admo- 
nent,  ducunt,  custodiunt.  3.  Invitabant,  admonebant,  du- 


ETYMOLOGY. FOURTH    CONJUGATION.  105 

cebant,  custodiebant.  4.  Invitabat,  admonebat,  ducebat, 
custodiebat.  5.  Invitaveram,  admonueram,  duxeram,  au- 
diveram.  6.  Invitaveramus,  admonueramus,  duxeramus, 
audiveramus.  7.  Invitaverim,  admonuerim,  duxerim,  cus- 
todiverim.  8.  Invitaverunt,  admonuerunt,  duxerunt,  audi- 
verunt. 

II.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  We  invite,  we  admonish,  we  lead,  we  instruct.  2.  I 
was  inviting,  I  was  admonishing,  I  was  leading,  I  was  in- 
structing. 3.  We  were  praising,  we  were  obeying,  we  were 
speaking,  we  were  instructing.  4.  He  will  blame,  he  will 
advise,  he  will  speak,  he  will  instruct.  5.  I  have  invited, 
you  have  obeyed,  he  has  led,  they  have  guarded. 


FOURTH    CONJUGATION.  —  ACTIVE  VOICE. 
OTHER  PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 

EXEKCISE    XLIV. 
I.     Vocabulary. 

Arete,  adv.  closely,  soundly. 

Munio,  ire,  Ivi,  Itum,  to  fortify. 

Sermo,  sermonis,  m.  discourse,  conversation. 

Thrasybulus,  I,  m.        '  Thrasybulus,  Athenian  general. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Gives  urbem  custodiebant.  2.  Urbem  custodiemus. 
3.  Milites  templum  custodiunt.  4.  Verum  audltis.  5.  Ye- 
rum  audlte.  6.  Verum  audiveramus.  7.  Yerba  tua  audl- 
mus.  8.  Yerba  mea  audivlsti.  9.  Orationem  tuam  audivi. 
10.  Sermonem  audiebam.  11.  Pueri  arete  dormiunt.  12. 
Pueri  cantum  lusciniae  au^liebant.  13.  Thrasybulus  urbem 
munlvit. 


106  INTRODUCTORY  LATIN  BOOK. 


III.      Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Do  you  not  hear  us  ?  2.  We  hear.  you.  3.  Who 
heard  the  oration?  4.  We  heard  the  oration.  5.  The 
pupils  heard  the  conversation.  6.  They  did  not  hear  your 
oration.  7.  The  citizens  are  fortifying  the  city.  8.  Who 
Avill  guard  this  beautiful  city  ?  9.  The  brave  soldiers  will 
guard  the  city.  10.  Will  you  guard  the  temple  ?  11.  We 
will  guard  the  temple. 


FOURTH  CONJUGATION.  — PASSIVE  VOICE. 

EXERCISE    XLV. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Audimur,  audiebfimur,  audiemur.  2.  Audiutur,  audi- 
antur.  3.  Audlrer,  audiremur.  4.  Audltus  sum,  audlti 
sumus.  5.  Audlti  eramus,  audltus  eram.  6.  Audltus  erit, 
audlti  erunt.  7.  Audit,  auditur.  8.  Audiunt,  audiuntur. 
9.  Audiet,  audietur.  10.  Audlrem,  au direr.  11.  Audio- 
bam,  audiebar.  12.  Audiebat,  audiebatur.  13.  Audlvit, 
audltus  est.  14.  Audiverat,  audltus  erat. 

II.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  I  am  instructed,  we  are  instructed.  2.  He  will  be  in- 
structed, they  will  be  instructed.  3.  They  have  been 
heard,  they  have  been  instructed.  4.  They  had  been 
heard,  he  had  been  instructed.  5.  He  was  instructing,  he 
was  instructed.  6.  They  are  instructing,  they  are  in- 
structed. 7.  We  have  heard,  you  have  been  heard.  8. 
You  have  instructed,  we  have  been  instructed.  9.  I  have 
heard,  you  have  been  heard. 


ETYMOLOGY.  —  FOUKTil    CONJUGATION.  107 


FIRST,    SECOND,    THIRD,    AND    FOURTH     CONJUGA- 
TIONS.—PASSIVE  VOICE.  ' 

EXERCISE    XLVI. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Invitaris,  admoneris,  educeris,  custodiris.  2.  Invitan- 
tur,  admonentur,  educuntur,  custodiuntur.  3.  Invitatur, 
admonetur,  educitur,  custodltur.  4.  Invitabitur,  admoneb- 
itur,  educetur,  custodietur.  5.  Invitabatur,  admonebatur, 
cducebatur,  custodiebatur.  6.  Invitatus  sum,  admonitus 
sum,  eductus  sum,  custoditus  sum.  7.  Invitati  erant,  ad- 
moniti  erant,  educti  erant,  custoditi  erant.  8.  Invitati 
essemus,  educti  essemus.  9.  Admonitus  esses,  custoditus 
esses. 

II.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  He  is  called,  he  is  terrified,  he  is  led  forth,  he  is 
guarded.  2.  They  are  called,  they  are  terrified,  they  are 
led  forth,  they  are  guarded.  3.  They  will  be  loved,  they 
will  be  advised,  they  will  be  led,  they  will  be  heard.  4.  I 
have  been  blamed,  I  have  been  admonished,  you  had  been 
ruled,  you  had  been  guarded.  5.  You  had  been  blamed,  I 
had  been  admonished.  6.  You  have  been  ruled,  I  have 
been  guarded. 

FOURTH    CONJUGATION.  — PASSIVE  VOICE. 
OTHER  PAKTS  or  SPEECH. 

EXERCISE    XLVIL 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Bellum,  I,  n.  war. 

Benigne,  adv.  kindly. 

Civilis,  e.  civil. 


108  INTRODUCTORY  LATIN  BOOK. 

Egregie,  adv.  excellently. 

Filius,  ii,  m.  son. 

Finio,  ire,  ivi,  itum,  to  finish,  bring  to  a  close. 

Legatio,  legationis,  f.  embassy. 

Vox,  vocis,  /.  voice. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Yox  audlta1  est.  2.  Voces  audiuntur.  3.  Cantuslus- 
ciniae  audltur.  4.  Cantus  lusciniarum  audietur.  5.  Urbs 
mumta  erat.  6.  Urbes  munientur.  7.  Templum  custodie- 
tur.  8.  Templa  custodiuntur.  9.  Legatio  benigne  audlta 
est.  10.  Haec  legatio  benigne  audietur.  11.  Yerba  tua 
benigne  audientur.  12.  Filii  regis  egregie  crudiuntur. 
13.  Bellum  civile  finitum1  est. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Was  not  the  orator  heard?  2.  The  renowned  orator 
was  kindly  heard.  3.  Let  the  city  be  fortified.2  4.  Let  the 
temples  be  guarded.  5.  The  city  has  been  fortified.  6.  The 
temples  will  be  guarded.  7.  Let  the  war  be  brought  to  a 
close.  8.  Let  the  boys  be  instructed.  9.  Let  the  words  of 
the  instructor  be  heard. 

FIRST,    SECOND,    THIRD,    AND    FOURTH    CONJUGA- 
TIONS. —  MISCELLANEOUS  EXAMPLES. 

EXERCISE    XLVIII. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Atheniensis,  is,  m.  and  /.  an  Athenian. 

Cams,  canis,  m.  and  f.  dog. 

C515,  colere,  colul,  cultiim,  to  practise,  cultivate. 

Cum,  prep,  with  abl.  with. 

1  Why  audlta  and  finitum t  instead  of  auditus  and  finltus  ?     See  Hulc 
XXXV.  1,  p.  54. 

2  Let  be  fortified  is  to  be  rendered  into  Latin  by  a  single  verb  in  the 
Subjunctive.     Sec  196,  I.  2. 


ETYMOLOGY. FOURTH    CONJUGATION.  109 

Firmo,  are,  avi,  atiim,  to  strengthen. 

Grex,  gregis,  m.  herd,  flock. 

Illustro,  are,  avi,  atiim,  to  illumine. 
Jungo,  jungere,  junxi,  junctum,         to  join. 

Labor,  laboris,  m.  labor. 

Modestia,  ae,  /.  modesty. 

Ovis,  ovis,  f.  sheep. 

Portus,  us,  m.  port,  harbor. 

Prudentia,  ae,  /.  prudence. 

Terra,  ae,  /.  earth. 

Valetudo,  valetudinis,  /.  health. 

Varietas,  varietatis,  f.  variety. 

Violo,  are,  avi,  atiim,  violate. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Sol  terrain  illustrat.  2.  Modestia  pueros  ornat.  3. 
Discipuli  memoriam  exercent.  4.  Discipuli  tui  memoriani 
exercebant.  5.  Canes  gregem  custodiebant.  6.  Greges 
ovium  custodiuntur.  7.  Praecep tores  juvehtutem  erudient. 

8.  Labor  valetudinem  tuam  firmabit.     9.  Varietas  nos  de- 
lectat.     10.  Athenienses  portum  nmniverunt.     11.  Philo- 
sophia  nos  erudlvit. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Good  men  love  virtue.  2.  Virtue  will  always1  be 
loved.  3.  Let  virtue  be  always  practised.  4.  We  will 
always  practise  virtue.  5.  The  soldiers  are  violating  the 
laws  of  the  state.  6.  They  will  be  punished.  7.  Will 
you  instruct  these  boys  ?  8.  We  will  instruct  good  boys. 

9.  Who2  led  this  army  into  Italy?     10.  Hannibal  led  the 
army  into  Italy. 

1  For  the  syntax  of  adverbs,  and  for  their  place  in  the  Latin  sentence, 
sec  Rule  LI.  and  note  4,  p.  72. 

2  Which  form  of  the  Interrogative  should  be  ..used,  quts  or  qui?     See 

183. 


110  INTRODUCTORY  LATIN  BOOK. 


VERBS  IN  IO   OF  THE  THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

213.  Verbs  in  io  are  generally  of  the  fourth  conjuga- 
tion ;  and  even  the  few  which  are  of  the  third  are  inflected 
with  the  endings  of  the  fourth  wherever  those  endings 
have  two  successive  vowels,  as  follows : 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 

214.  Capio,     I  take. 

PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 
Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind.  Supine. 

capio,  capere,  cepi,  captum. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 
PRESENT.  TENSE. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

capiS,  capis,  capit ;  |  capimfis,  capitis,  capiunt. 

IMPERFECT. 
capiebam,  -iebas,  -iebat ;  |  capiebamus,  -iebatis,  -iebant. 

FUTURE. 
capiam,  -ies,  -i^t ;  |  capiemus,  -ietis,  -lent. 

PERFECT. 
cepi,  -isti,  -it ;  |  cepimiis,  -istis,  -erunt,  or  erS. 

PLUPERFECT. 
cepSram,  -eras,  -erat ;  |  ceperamus,  -eratis,  -erant. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 
cep6r5,  -€r!s,  -€rit ;  |  cepgrimus,  -iritis,  -erint. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
PRESENT. 

capiam,  -ias,  -iat ;  |  capiamiis,  -iatis,  -iant. 

IMPERFECT. 
cap^rem,  -£res,  -Sret ;  |  capgremtts,  -Cretis,  -erent. 

PERFECT. 
cepSrim,  -eris,  -Srft ;  |  cepSrimiis,  -Critis,  -£rint. 

PLUPERFECT. 
cepiss^m,  -isses,  -iss^t ;  |  cepissemtis7-issctls,  -issent. 


ETYMOLOGY. VER*BS    IN   IO.  Ill 


IMPERATIVE. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

PRES.  cape;  |  capitg. 


PUT.     capit5, 
capitO; 


capitote, 
capiunt5. 


INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

PRES.  capgrg.  PRES.  capiens. 

PERF.  cepissS. 

PUT.     captures  ess£.  PUT.     captures. 

GERUND.  SUPINE. 

Gen.  capiendi. 

Dot.  capiendo. 

Ace.  capiendiim. 

Abl.  capiendo. 


Ace.      captttm. 
Abl.      captu. 


PASSIVE    VOICE. 

215.  Capior,     I  am  taken. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Inf.  Perf.  Ind. 

capitfr,  capi,  captus  sum. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

capior,  capgris,  capittir  ;  |  capimtir,  capimlni,  capiuntttr. 

IMPERFECT. 
capiebar,  -iebaris,  -iebatttr ;         |  capiebamur,  -iebamlni,  -iebanttir. 

FUTURE. 
capiar,  -ieris,  -ietiir ;  |  capiemttr,  -iemim,  -ientur. 

PERFECT. 
capttts  siim,  es,  est ;  |  capti  stimus,  estis,  sunt. 

PLUPERFECT.  - 
capttis  eram,  €ras,  Srat ;  |  capti  Sramiis,  Gratis,  €rant, 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

capttis  gr5,  grfs,  Srtt ;  |  capti  grimtts,  Srltls,  grunt. 

6 


112  INTRODUCTORY    LATIN  BOOK. 

S  UBJUNCTI  VE. 
PRESENT. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

capiar,  -iaris,  -iatur ;  |  capiamtir,  -iamini,  -iantttr. 

IMPERFECT. 
cap£rer,  -ereris,  -Srettir ;  [  capereraur,  -firemim,  -grenttir, 

PERFECT. 
capttis  sim,  sis,  sit ;  |  capti  simiis,  sitls,  sint. 

PLUPERFECT. 
captus  esstfm,  esses,  essSt ;          |  capti  essemus,  essetis,  essent 

IMPERATIVE. 
PRES.  capCrC;  capimim. 

FUT.    capitor, 

capitor ;  capiuntor. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

PRES.  capi. 


PERF.  capttts  essd. 
FUT.    capttim  iri. 


PERF.  capttis. 
FUT.    capiendtts.1 


EXERCISE   XLIX. 
I.     Vocabulary. 

A,  ub,  prep,  with  abl.  from,  by. 

Accipio,  accipere,  accept,  acceptiim,        to  receive. 

Bellum,  i,  n.  war. 

Capio,  capere,  cepl,  captum,  to  take,  capture. 

Carthago,  Carthagmis,  /.  Cartilage,  city  in  Africa. 

Cornelius,  ii,  m.  Cornelius,  a  proper  name. 

Gallus,  I,  m.  Gaul,  a  Gaul* 

1  The  pupil  will  observe  that  the  conjugation  of  Capio  is  somewhat 
peculiar,  combining  certain  characteristics  of  the  fourth  Conjugation  with 
others  of  the  Third.    He  should  now  carefully  compare  it  with  the  con- 
jugation of  Rego  and  with  that  of  Audio,  and  note  with  accuracy  both 
the  differences  and  the  resemblances. 

2  The  Gauls  were  a  people  inhabiting  the  country  of  ancient  Gaul, 
embracing  modern  France. 


ETYMOLOGY. —  VERBS   IN   IO.  113 

Jacio,  jiicere,  jeci,  jactiim,  to  cast,  throiv,  liurl. 

Lapis,  lapidis,  m.  stone. 

Lux,  lucis,  /.  light. 

Murus,  1, 7w.  wall. 

Publius,  ii,  m.  Publius,  a  proper  name. 

Regulus,  I,  m.  Regulus,  Roman  general 

Teliim,  I  ,  n.  javelin. 

Troja,  ae,  /.  Troy,  city  in  Asia  Minor, 

II.     Translate  into  JZnglish. 

1.  Graeci  Trojara  capiebant.  2.  Trojam  ceperunt.  3. 
Troja  capta1  est.  4.  Troja  cap t a  erat.  5.  Regulus  ipse 
captus  est.  6.  Belli  duces  capientnr.  7.  Haec  urbs  capie- 
tur.  8.  Illam  urbem  capiemus.  9.  Roma  a  Gallis2  capta 
erat.  10.  Galli  Romam  ceperant.  11.  Scipio  multas  civita- 
tes  cepit.  12.  Luna  lucem  a  sole  accipit.  13.  Lucem  a 
sole  accipimus.  14.  Tuam3  epistolam  accepi.  15.  Milites 
tela  jaciebant. 

•    III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  We  were  taking  the  city.  2.  The  city  will  be  taken. 
3.  The  city  has  been  taken.  4.  The  cities  will  be  taken. 
5.  The  cities  have  been  taken.  '  6.  Who  *  took  Carthage  ? 
7.  Publius  Cornelius  Scipio  took  Carthage.  8.  Have  you 
not 5  received  my  letter  ?  9.  I  have  received  your  letter. 
10.  Have  you  not  received  five  letters?  11.  We  have 
received  ten  letters. 

1  For  the  agreement  of  the  participle  in  the  compound  tenses  with  the 
subject,  see  Rule  XXXV.  1,  page  54. 

2  See  Rule  XXXII.,  page  24. 

3  What  is  the  usual  place  of  the  Possessive  Pronoun  ?     See  page  77, 
note  1.    In  this  sentence,  tuam  precedes  its  noun  because  it  is  emphatic. 

4  Which  form  of  the  Interrogative  Pronoun  should  be  used,  qitis  or 
qui?     See  188. 

5  Which  Interrogative  Particle   should  be  used  ?      See  346,  II.  1, 
page  59. 


114  1NTKODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

PART   THIRD. 
SYNTAX. 


CHAPTER    I. 
SYNTAX    OF    SENTENCES, 

SECTION  I. 
CLASSIFICATION   OF   SENTENCES. 

343.  SYNTAX  treats  of  the  construction  of  sentences. 

344.  A  sentence  is  thought  expressed  in  language. 

345.  In  their  STKUCTUKE,  sentences  are  either  Simple, 
Complex,  or  Compound: 

I.  A  SIMPLE  SENTENCE  expresses  but  a  single  thought : 
Deus  mundum  aedif  icavit,  God  made  the  world.  Cic. 

II.  A  COMPLEX   SENTENCE   expresses   two    (or  more) 
thoughts,  so  related  that  one  is  dependent  upon  the  other : 

Donee  eris  felix,  multos  numerabis  amicos;  So  long  as  you  are 
prosperous,  you  will  number  many  friends.  Ovid. 

1.  CLAUSES. — In  this  example,  two  simple  sentences,  (1)  "  You  will 
be  prosperous,"  and  (2)  "  You  will  number  many  friends/'  are  so  united 
that  the  first  only  specifies  the  time  of  the  second  :  You  will  number  many 
fiiendsy  (when  ?)  so  long  as  you  are  prosperous.  The  parts  thus  united  are 
called  Clauses  or  Members. 

III.  A  COMPOUND  SENTENCE  expresses  two  or  more  in- 
dependent thoughts : 

Sol  ruit,  et  montcs  umbrantur,  The  sun  descends,  and  the  mountains 
are  shaded.  Virg. 

346.  In  their  USE,  sentences  are  either  Declarative,  In- 
terrogative,  Imperative,  or  Exclamatory. 


SYNTAX. SENTENCES.  115 

I.  A  DECLARATIVE  SENTENCE  lias  the  form  of  an  asser- 
tion : 

Miltiades  accusatus  est,  Miltiades  was  accused.  Nep. 

II.  An   INTERROGATIVE    SENTENCE  has  the  form  of  a 
question : 

Quis  non  paupertatem  extimescit,  Who  does  not  fear  poverty  ?  Cic. 

1.  INTERROGATIVE  WORDS.  —  Interrogative  sentences  generally  con- 
tain some  interrogative  word,  —  either  an  interrogative  pronoun,  adjective, 
or  adverb,  or  one  of  the  interrogative  particles,  ne,  nonne,  num : 

1 )  Questions  with  ne  ask  for  information :   Scribitne,  Is  he  writing  ? 
Ne  is  always  thus  appended  to  some  other  word. 

2)  Questions  with  nonne  expect  the  answer  yes:  Nonne  scrlbit,  Is  he 
not  writing  ? 

3)  Questions  with  num  expect  the  answer  no :  Num  scrlbit ,  Is  he  writing  ? 

III.  An  IMPERATIVE  SENTENCE  has  the  form  of  a  com- 
mand, exhortation,  or  entreaty : 

Justitiam  cole,  Cultivate  justice.  Cic. 

IV.  An  EXCLAMATORY  SENTENCE  has  the  form  of  an  ex- 
clamation : 

Reliquit  quos  viros,  What  Jieroes  lie  lias  left !  Cic. 

SECTION    II. 

SIMPLE  SENTENCES. 

ELEMENTS  OF  SENTENCES. 

347.  The  simple  sentence  in  its  most  simple  form  con- 
sists of  two  distinct  parts,  expressed  or  implied  : 

1.  The  SUBJECT,  or  that  of  which  it  speaks. 

2.  The  PREDICATE,  or  that  which  is  said  of  the  subject: 
Cluilius  moritur,  Cluilius  dies.  Liv. 

Here  Cluilius  is  the  subject,  and  moritur  the  predicate. 

348.  The  simple  sentence  in  its  most  expanded  form 
consists  only  of  these  same  parts  with  their  various  modi- 
fiers: 


116  INTRODUCTORY  LATIN  BOOK. 

In  his  castris  Cluilius,  Albanus  rex,  muritur ;  Cluilius,  the  Albait 
king,  dies  in  this  camp.  Liv. 

Here  Cluilius,  Albanus  rex,  is  the  subject  in  its  enlarged  or  modified 
form,  and  in  Jus  castris  moritur  is  the  predicate  in  its  enlarged  or  modified 
form. 

349.  PRINCIPAL  AND  SUBORDINATE.  —  The  subject  and 
predicate,  being  essential  to  the  structure  of  every  sen- 
tence, are  called  the  Principal  or  Essential  elements ;  bnt 
their  modifiers,  being  subordinate  to  these,  are  called  the 
Subordinate  elements. 

350.  SIMPLE  AND  COMPLEX.  —  The  elements,  whether 
principal  or  subordinate,  may  be  either  simple  or  complex : 

1.  Simple,  when  not  modified  by  other  words. 

2.  Complex,  when  thus  modified.1 

SIMPLE  SUBJECT. 

351.  The  subject  of  a  sentence  must  be  a  noun,  or  some 
word  or  words  used  as  a  noun : 

Rex2  decrevit,  The  Icing  decreed.  Nep.  Ego2  ad  te  scrlbo,  / 
write  to  you.  Cic. 

SIMPLE  PREDICATE. 

353.  The  simple  predicate  must  be  either  a  verb  or  the 
copula  sum  with  a  noun  or  adjective : 

Miltiades  est  accusatus,3  Miltiades  was  accused.  Nep.  Tu  es  tes- 
tis,  You  are  a  witness.  Cic.  Fortuna  caeca  est,  Fortune  is  "blind.  Cic. 

1.  Like  Sum,  several  other  verbs  sometimes  unite  with  a  noun  or 
adjective  to  form  the  predicate.  A  noun  or  adjective  thus  used  is 
called  a  Predicate  Noun  or  Predicate  Adjective.* 

1  Thus,  in  the  example  given  above,  the  simple  subject  is  Cluilius ; 
the  complex,  Cluilius,  Albanus  rex;  the  simple  predicate,  morftur ;  tho 
complex,  in  his  castris  moritur. 

2  In  these  examples,  the  noun  rex  and  the  pronoun  ego,  used  as  a  noun, 
arc  the  subjects. 

3  In  the  first  of  these  examples,  the  predicate  is  the  verb,  est  accusatus; 
in  the  second,  the  noun  and  copula,  est  testis ;  and  in  the  third,  the  adjec- 
tive and  copula,  caeca  est. 

4  Thus  testis,  in  the  second  example,  is  a  Predicate  Noun,  and  caeca,  in 
the  third,  is  a  Predicate  Adjective. 


SYNTAX.  —  NOUNS.  117 

CHAPTER    II. 
SYNTAX    OF    NOUNS. 

SECTION  I. 
AGREEMENT  OF  NOUNS. 

UTTLE  I.  — Predicate  Nouns.1 

8680  A  Predicate  Noun2  denoting  the  same  person 
or  thing  as  its  Subject  agrees  with  it  in  CASE  : 

Ego  sum  nuntius,2  /  am  a  messenger.  Liv.     Servius  rex  cst  dec- 
laratus,  Servius  teas  declared  king.  Liv. 

EXERCISE  L. 
I.     Vocabulary. 

Amnis,  amnis,  m.  river. 

Creo,  are,  avl,  atum,  to  create,  make,  elect. 

Graecia,  ae,  /.  Greece. 

Imperator,  imperatoris,  m.          commander. 

Latinus,  I,  m.  Latinus,  Italian  king. 

Lavlnia,  ae,  /.  Lavinia,  a  proper  name-. 

Maliim,  I,  n.  evil. 

Nomino,  are,  avl,  atum,  to  call,  name. 

Numa,  ae,  m.  Numa,  Roman  king. 

Rhenus,  I,  m.  the  Rhine,  river  in  Europe. 

Servius,  ii,  m.  Servius,  Koman  king. 

Stultitia,  ae,  /.  folly. 

Turn,  adv.  then,  at  that  time. 

1  In  illustrating  in  the  subsequent  pages  the  leading  principles  of  the 
Latin  Syntax,  we  shall  take  up  the  most  common  Rules  in  the  order  in 
which  they  stand  in  the  Grammar.     In  doing  so,  we  shall  repeat  in  their 
proper  places  those  Rules  which  we  have  had  occasion  to  anticipate  in  the 
previous  Exercises. 

2  See  35?,  1 ;  also  Rule  I.  note,  p.  59. 


118  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Cicero  consul l  fu.it.2  2.  Cicero  orator  fuit.  3.  Cic- 
ero turn3  erat2  orator  clarissimus.4  4.  Puer  orator  erit. 
5.  !N"uma  erat  rex.  6.  Numa  rex l  creatus  est.  7.  Cato 
imperator  fuit.  8.  Cato  magnns  imperator  fuit.  9.  Scipio 
consul  creatus  est.  10.  Scipio  consul  fuerat.  11.  Stultitia 
est  malum.  12.  Gloria  est  fructus  virtutis.  13.  Graecia 
artium 5  mater  nominatur. 


III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  The  Rhine  is  a  large  river.  2.  Rome  was  a  beautiful 
city.  3.  Cato  was  a  wise  man.  4.  Your  father  is  a  wise 
man.  5.  Lavinia  was  the  daughter  of  the  king.  6.  Lati- 
nus  was  king.  7.  Lavinia  was  the  daughter  of  Latinus. 
8.  Tullia  was  the  daughter  of  Servius. 


APPOSITIVES. 

RULE  H  — Appositives. 
363.  An  Appositive6  agrees  with  its  Subject  in  CASE  : 

Cluilius  rex6  moritur,  Cluilius  the  king  dies.  Liv.   Urbes  Carthago6 
atque  Numantia,  the  cities  Carthage  and  Numantia.  Cic. 

1  Predicate  Noun.     See  Rule  I.    For  Model  for  parsing  Predicate 
Nouns,  see  p.  59. 

2  For  the  place  of  the  verb  with  Predicate  Nouns,  see  note  on  fuit 
under  Exercise  XIX. 

3  Adverb  qualifying  erat.     See  Rule  LI.  p.  72. 
*  See  162  ;  also  Rule  XXXIII.  p.  32. 

5  Artium  depends  upon  mater.     See  Rule  XVI.  p.  22. 

6  See  363,  note,  p.  15;  also  Model,  p.  16.     Rex,  Carthdyo,  and  Nu- 
mantia are  all  Predicate  Nouns. 


SYNTAX.  —  APPOSITIVES.  119 

EXERCISE  LI. 

I.     Vocabulary. 

Alexander,  Alexandri,  m.  Alexander,  the  Great. 

Conjux,  conjiigis,  m.  and  f.  wife,  husband. 

Epirus,  I,  f.  EpiruSj  country  in  Greece. 

Eruditus,  a,  urn,  learned,  instructed  in. 

Hanno,  Hannonis,  m.  Ilanno,  Carthaginian  general. 

Justus,  a,  urn,  just,  upright. 

Macedonia,  ae,  /.  Macedonia,  Macedon. 

Nepos,  nepotis,  m.  grandson. 

Paulus,  1,  m.  Paulus,  Roman  consul. 

Philippus,  I,  m.  Philip,  king  of  Macedon. 
Pyrrhus,  I,  m.                              ,  Phyrrhus,  king  of  Epirus. 

Vulnero,  are,  avi,  atuni,  to  wound. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Cicero,  eruditissimus  homo,1  consul2  fuit.  2.  Nuxna, 
justissimus  vir,  erat  rex.  3.  Ancus,  N"umae  nepos,1  rex  fait. 
4.  Hanno  dux  captus  est.3  5.  Pyrrhus,  Epiri  rex,  vulnera- 
ttis  est.  G.  Philippus,  rex  Macedoniae,  Athenienses  supera- 
vit.  7.  Paulus  consul1  regem  superavit.  8.  Philosophia, 
mater  bonarum  artium,  nos  eriidit. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Tullia,  the  daughter1  of  Servius,  was  the  wife3  of 
Tarquin.  2.  Servius,  the  father  of  Tullia,  was  a  king.  3. 
Scipio,  the  leader  of  the  Romans,  took  Carthage.  4.  Sci- 
pio  the  general  was  praised.  5.  Philip,  king  of  Macedonia, 
was  the  father  of  Alexander.  6.  Alexander,  the  son  of 
Philip,  was  king  of  Macedonia. 

1  Appositive.     Sec  Rule  II.     For  Model  for  parsing  Appositives,  see 
p.  16. 

2  Predicate  Noun.     Sec  Rule  I. 

3  Sec  214. 

1IVBESITY 


120  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

SECTION   II. 
NOMINATIVE. 

364.  CASES. — Nouns  have  different  forms  or  eases  to 
mark  the  various  relations  in  which  they  are  used.  These 
cases,  in  accordance  with  their  general  force,  may  be  ar- 
ranged and  characterized  as  follows  : 

I.  Nominative,  Case  of  the  Subject. 

II.  Vocative,  Case  of  Address. 

III.  Accusative,  Case  of  Direct  Object. 

IV.  Dative,  Case  of  Indirect  Object. 

V.     Genitive,  Case  of  Adjective  Relations. 

VI.     Ablative,  Case  of  Adverbial  Relations.1 

EULE  III  — Subject  Nominative. 

367.  The  Subject  of  a  Finite  verb  is  put  in  the 
Nominative : 

Servius  regnavit,  Servius  reigned.  Liv.  Patent  portae,  The  gates 
are  open.  Cic.  Hex  vicit,  The  king  conquered.  Liv. 

1.  The  Subject  is  always  a  substantive,  a  pronoun,  or  some  word 
or  clause  used  substantively  : 

Ego  reges  ejeci,  /  have  banished  kings.  Cic. 

2.  SUBJECT  OMITTED.  —  See  460,  2,  p.  54. 


EXERCISE    LII. 

I.     Vocabulary. 

Libertas,  llbertatis,  /. 

liberty. 

Opulentus,  a,  urn, 

rich,  opulent. 

Quotldie,  adv. 

daily. 

Vitiimi,  ii,  n. 

fault,  vice. 

Oppidum,  i,  n. 

towny  city. 

1  This  arrangement  is  adopted  in  the  discussion  of  the  cases,  because 
vt  is  thought  it  will  best  present  the  force  of  the  several  cases,  and  their 
relation  to  each  other. 


SYNTAX. VOCATIVE.  121 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Italia^  liberata2  est.  2.  Urbs  Roma  liberata  erat.  8. 
Haec  urbs  clarissima  liberabitur.  4.  Haec  urbs  opulentissi- 
ma  est  eapta.  5.  Virtus  quotidie  laudatur.  6.  Virtutes 
semper  laudabuntur.  7.  Sapientia  semper  est  laudata. 
8.  Libertas  semper  laudabitur.  9.  Omnia  hostiuru  oppida 
expugnata  sunt. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Was  not  Philip  wounded  ?  2.  Philip,  king  of  Mace- 
donia, was  wounded.  3.  Many  soldiers  were  wounded. 
4.  Did  not  the  soldiers  fight  bravely?  5.  The  soldiers 
fought  bravely.  6.  Will  not  the  laws  be  observed  ?  7. 
The  laws  have  been  observed.  8.  They  will  be  observed. 

SECTION   III. 

VOCA  TIVE. 

RULE  IV.  — Case  of  Address. 

369.  The  Name  of  the  person  or  thing  addressed  is 
put  in  the  Vocative  : 

Perge,  Laeli,3  Proceed,  Laelius.  Cic.  Quid  est,  Catilina,5  Why 
is  it,  Catiline  ?  Cic.  Tuum  est,  Servi,3  regnum.  The  kingdom  is 
yours,  Servius.  Liv. 

EXERCISE  LIU. 

I.     Vocabulary. 

Auditor,  audltoris,  m.  hearer,  auditor. 

Carus,  a,  um,  dear. 

Juvenis,  is,  m.  and  /.  a  youth,  young  man. 

Legatus,  I,  m,  ambassador. 

Saliito,  are,  avi,  atwn,  to  salute. 

1  Subject  of  liberata  est.     See  Kule  III.     For  Model  for  parsing  Sub* 
jects,  see  p.  57. 

2  Why  liberata  rather  than  Uberdtus  ?     See  Rule  XXXV.  1,  p.  54. 

3  Laeliy  Catilina,  and  Servi  are  all  in  the  Vocative  by  thjs  Rule.    Ladi 
is  for  Laelie ;  and  Servi,  for  Servie. 


122  INTRODUCTORY    LATIN   BOOK. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Te,  fScipio]-  salutamus.  2.  Vos,  amid  *  carissimi,2 
saluto.  3.  Vos,  audit  ores  omnes,  salutamus.  4.  Verba 
mea,  judices,  audite.  5.  Haec  verba,  legati,  audite.  6. 
Vos,  milites,  lianc  urbem  clarissimam  custodlte.  7.  Mili- 
tes I  fortissimi,  patriam  vestram  liberate.  8.  Vestram.  vir- 
tut  em,  j  uven  es,  laudamus. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Boys^  hear  the  words  of  your  father.  2.  Judges, 
you  shall  hear  the  truth.  3.  Father,  have  we  not  spoken 
the  truth  ?  4.  You,  boys,  have  spoken  the  truth.  5.  Sol- 
diers, you  have  fought  bravely.  6.  You,  brave  soldiers, 
have  saved  your  country.  7.  Pupils,  I  praise  your  dili- 
gence. 

SECTION    IV. 

A  CCUSATIVE. 

RULE  V.— Direct  Object. 

371.  The  Direct  Object3  of  an  action  is  put  in  the 
Accusative  : 

Deus  mundum  aedificavit,  God  made  the  icorld.*  Cic.  Libera 
r«m  publicam,  Free  the  republic.  Cic.  Populi  Komani  salutem 
dcfendite,  Defend  the  safety  of  the  Roman  people.  Cic. 

1  In  the  Vocative,  according  to  Rule  IV.    No  special  Model  for  parsing 
is  deemed  necessary,  as  all  nouns  are  parsed  substantially  in  the  same 
way ;  though  different  Rules  arc,  of  course,  assigned  for  different  cases. 
See  Directions  for  Parsing,  p.  15  ;  also  Model,  p.  16. 

The  Vocative  is  not  often  the  first  word  in  the  sentence,  though  it  is 
sometimes  thus  placed,  as  in  the  seventh  sentence  in  this  Exercise. 

2  See  162. 

8  See  note  on  Direct  Object,  p.  70. 

4  See  note  on  the  position  of  the  Object  in  the  Latin  sentence,  p.  70. 


SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE.  123 

EXERCISE    LIY. 
I.      Vocabulary. 

Flaminius,  il,  m.  Flaminius,  Roman  general. 

Marcelliis,  I,  m.  Marcellus,  Roman  general. 

Poeniis,  Ji,  urn,  Carthaginian. 

Poenus,  I,  m.  a  Carthaginian. 

Sanctiis,  a,  iim,  lioly,  sacred. 

Sicilia,  ae,  f.  Sicily,  the  island  of. 

Spolio,  are,  avl,  Htum,  to  rob,  spoil,  despoil. 

SyrHcusae,  arum,  f.  plur.  Syracuse,  city  in  Sicily. 

II.      Translate  into  English. 

1.  Alexander  multas  icrbes1  expugnavit.  2.  Italia  pul- 
chras  urbes  habuit.  3.  Hostes  templa  spoliabant.  4.  Tem- 
pla  sanctissima  spoliaverunt.  5.  Hannibal  Flaminium1 
consulem 2  superavit.  6.  Poeni  Sicilian!  occupaverant.  7. 
Marcellus  3  magnam  liujus  insulae  4  partem  cepit.  8.  Mar- 
cellus  Syracusas,1  nobilissimam  urbem,2  expugnavit. 

III.      Translate  into  I^atin. 

1.  Do  you  not5  love  your  parents  f l  2.  We  love  our 
parents.  3.  You  practise  virtue.  4.  Our  pupils  will  prac- 
tise virtue.  5.  Did  not  Rome  have  beautiful  temples  ?  6. 
Rome  had  beautiful  temples.  7.  Have  not  the  enemy 6 
taken  the  city?  8.  They  have  taken  the  beautiful  city: 
9.  They  will  plunder  all  the  temples. 

1  Direct  Object,  in  the  Accusative,  according  to  Rule  Y.     Tor  Model 
for  parsing,  see  p.  71. 

2  Appositive.     See  Rule  II.  363. 

3  Apply  to  this  sentence  Suggestions  IV.  and  V. 

4  Hujus  insulae,  of  this  island ;  i.e.,  of  Sicily.    Observe  the  position  of 
the  Genitive  between  the  adjective  magnam  and  its  noun  partem.     See 
note  onpondus,  Exercise  XXX.  II.  10. 

5  See  346,  II.  1. 

6  The  Latin  word  must  be  in  the  plural. 


124  INTRODUCTORY  LATIN  BOOK. 

ACCUSATIVE  OF  TIME  AND  SPACE. 
RULE  VIII. — Accusative  of  Time  and  Space. 

378.  DURATION  OF  TIME,  and  EXTENT  OF  SPACE,  are 
expressed  by  the  Accusative  : 

Romulus  septem  et  trlginta  regnavit  annos,1  Romulus  reigned 
thirty-seven  years.  Liv.  Quinque  millia  passuum  ambulare,  To  walk 
five  miles.  Cic.  Pedes  octoginta  distare,  To  be  eighty  feet  distant. 
Cacs.  Nix  quattuor  pedes 1  alta,  Snow  four  feet  deep.  Liv. 

EXERCISE    LY. 
I.     Vocabulary. 

Agger,  aggeris,  in.  mound,  rampart. 

Ambulo,  are,  avi,  Fttum,  to  walk. 

Centum,  hundred. 

Gladiiis,  ii,  m.  sword. 

Lacedaemonius,  ii,  m.  a  Lacedaemonian,  Spartctti. 

Latiis,  a,  urn,'  broad,  wide. 

Longiis,  a,  iim,  long. 

Mensis,  mensis,  m.  month. 

Nox,  noctis,  /.  night. 

Octoginta,  eighty. 

Pes,  pedis,  m.  foot. 

Quinquaginta,  fifty  • 

Regno,  are,  avi,  atiim,  to  reign. 

Vigilo,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  watch,  be  awake. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Lacedaemonii  pacem  sex  annos2  servaverunt.  2. 
Magnam  noctis  partem2  vigilaveram.  3.  Puer  octo  horas 

1  Annos  denotes  Duration  of  Time,  while  millia  and  pedes  denote  Ex- 
tent of  Space.    They  are  all  in  the  Accusative  by  this  Rule. 

2  In  the  Accusative   denoting  Duration  of  Time.     See  Rule  VIII. 
No  special  Model  for  parsing  is  necessary.     The  pupil  will  be  guided  by 
previous  directions  and  Models. 


SYNTAX.  —  ACCUSATIVE.  125 

dormivit.  4.  Latinus  multos  annos  regnavit.  5.  In  Italia 
sex  menses  fuimus.  6.  In  ilia  urbe  decem  dies  fuimus.  7. 
Agger  octoginta  pedes l  latus  fuit.  8.  Hie  gladius  sex 
pedes  longus  est. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Did  you  not  walk  two  hours?  2.  We  walked  three 
hours.  3.  Did  you  not  sleep  six  hours?  4.  We  slept 
eight  hours.  5.  The  soldiers  guarded  the  city  ten  months. 
6.  Were  you  not  in  the  city  four  months  ?  7.  We  were 
in  the  city  five  months.  8.  The  mound  was  fifty  feet  high. 


ACCUSATIVE  OF  LIMIT. 
RULE  IX.— Accusative  of  Limit. 

379.  The  Name  of  a  Town  used  as  the  Limit  of 
motion  is  put  in  the  Accusative  : 

Nuntius  Romam  redit,  The  messenger  returns  to  Rome.  Liv. 
Plato  Tarentum2  venit,  Plato  came  to  Tarentum.  Cic.  Fugit  Tar- 
qmmos,2  He  fled  to  Tarquinii.  Cic. 

EXERCISE    LVL 

I.    '  Vocabulary. 

Athenae,  arum,  f.  plur.  Athens,  capital  of  Attica. 

Fugio,  fugere,  fugi,  fugitum,  to  flee,  fly,  run  away. 

Lysander,  Lys&ndrl,  m.  Lysander,  Spartan  general. 

Miltiades,  is,  m.  Miltiades,  Athenian  general. 

Navigo,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  sail,  sail  to. 

1  In  the  Accusative,  denoting  Extent  of  Space. 

2  Romam,  Tarentum,  and  Tarquinios  are  all  names  of  towns  used  as  the 
Limit  of  Motion ;  i.e.,  the  motion  is  represented  as  ending  in  those  towns. 
They  are  in  the  Accusative,  according  to  Rule  IX. 


126  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

Reduco,  reducere,  reduxi,  reductum,  to  lead  back. 

Kevoco,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  recall. 

Sparta,  ae,  f.  Sparta,  capital  of  Laconia. 

Tarentum,  I,  n.  Tarentum,  Italian  town. 

Thebanus,  a,  urn,  Theban. 

Thebaniis,  I,  m.  a  Theban. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Cicero  Romam l  revocatus  est.  2.  Consules  Romam 
revocati  sunt.  3.  Hannibal  Carthaginem l  revocatus  erat. 
4.  Lysander  Athenas1  navigavit.  5.  Pyrrhus  Tarentum 
fugatus  est.  6.  Consul  regem  Tarentum  fugavit.  7.  The- 
bani  exercitum  Spartam  ducunt.  8.  Miltiades  exercitum 
Atlienas  reduxit. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Who  fled  to  Carthage?2  2.  Did  not  the  enemy  flee 
to  Carthage  f  3.  They  fled  to  Carthage.  4.  "Will  not  the 
army  be  led  back  to  Rome  ?2  5.  The  army  has  been  led 
back  to  Rome.  6.  The  commander  led  the  army  to  Athens. 

SECTION  V. 

DATIVE. 

382.  The  Dative  is  the  Case   of  the  Indirect  Object, 
and  is  used, 

I.  With  Verbs. 
II.  With  Adjectives. 
III.  With  their  Derivatives,  —  Adverbs  and  Substantives. 

DATIVE  WITH  VERBS. 

383.  INDIRECT  OBJECT.  —  A  verb  is  often  attended  by 
t»  noun  designating  the  object  indirectly  affected  by  the 

1  In  the  Accusative,  according  to  Rule  IX. 

2  The  Latin  word  will  be  in  the  Accusative,  in  accordance  with  Rule 
IX. 


SYNTAX.  —  DATIVE.  127 

action,  —  that  TO  or  FOR  which  something  is  or  is  done. 
A  noun  thus  used  is  called  an  Indirect  Object., 

EULE  XII.— Dative  with  Verbs. 

384.  The  INDIRECT  OBJECT  is  put  in  the  Dative  : 

I.  With  INTRANSITIVE  and  PASSIVE  Verbs  : 

Tempori l  cedit,  He  yields  to  the  time.  Cic.  Sibi  timuerant,  They 
had  feared  for  themselves.  Caes.  Labori  student,  They  devote  them- 
selves to  labor.  Caes.  Nobis l  vita  data  est,  Life  has  been  granted  to 
us.  Cic.  Numitori  deditur,  He  is  delivered  to  Numitor.  Liv. 

II.  With   TRANSITIVE   Verbs,  in  connection  with   the 
ACCUSATIVE  : 

Pons  iter  hostibus  2  dedit,  The  bridge  gave  a  passage  to  the  enemy. 
Liv.  Leges  civitatibus  suis  seripserunt,  They  prepared  laws  for  their 
states.  Cic. 

EXERCISE    LVII. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Carthaginiensis,  e,  Carthaginian. 

Carthaginiensis,  is,  m.  and  f.  a  Carthaginian. 

Conon,  Conoms,  m.  Conon,  Athenian  gen'l. 

Debeo,  debere,  debui,  debitum,  to  owe. 

Displiceo,  displicere,  displicui,  displicitum,    to  displease. 

Dono,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  give. 

Gens,  gentis,  f.  race. 

Gratia,  ae,  /.  favor,  gratitude,  thanks. 

Laboro,  are,  avi,  atiim,  to  strive  for. 

1  TempSriy  sibi,  and  labori  are  in  the  Dative  with  the  Intransitive  verbs 
cedit,  timuerant  (intransitive  here),  and  student;  while  nobis  and  Numitor  I 
are  in  the  Dative  with  the  Passive  verbs  data  est  and  deditur. 

2  Hostibus  is  in  the  Dative,  in  connection  with  the  Accusative  iter,  with 
the  Transitive  verb  dedit.    In  the  same  way,  civitatibus  is  in  the  Dative, 
in  connection  with  the  Accusative  leges,  with  the  Transitive  verb  scripse- 
runt. 


128  INTRODUCTORY    LATIN    BOOK. 

Monstro,  arc,  avi,  utum,  to  show,  point  out. 

Placet),  placere,  placui,  pliicituin,  to  please. 

Senectus,  senectutis,  /.  old  age. 

Sententia,  ae,  /.  opinion. 

Servio,  servire,  servlvl,  servltum,  to  serve. 

Via,  ae,  /.  way,  road. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Gives  legibus *  parent.  2.  Multae  Italiae  civitates 
Romania  parebant.  3.  Haec  sententia  Caesdri1  placuit. 
4.  Ilia  sententia  Caesari  clisplicuit.  5.  Milites  gloriae 
laborant.  G.  Hoc  consilium  Caesari  nuntiatum  est.  7. 
Nostra  consilia  hostibus  nuntiata  sunt.  8.  Tibi 2  magnam 
gratiam  habemus.  9.  Habeo  senectuti  magnam  gratiam. 
10.  Conon  pecuniam  civibus  donavit.  11.  Pastor  puero 
viam  monstravit.  12.  Tibi  viam  monstrabo.  13.  Roman! 
Carthaginiensibus  bellum  indixerunt. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Did  I  not  obey  my  3  father  ? l  2.  You  obeyed  your 
father.  3.  We  will  obey  the  laws  of  the  state.  4.  Do  not 
the  citizens  serve  the  king?  5.  They  have  served  the 
king.  6.  Will  you  not  serve  the  state  ?  7.  We  will  servo 
the  state.  8.  Will  you  not  tell  me  (to  me 4)  the  truth  ? 5 
9.  I  have  told  you  (to  you)  the  truth.  10.  Will  you  show 

1  Indirect  Object,  in  the  Dative,  according  to  Rule  XII.  I. 

2  Indirect  Object,  in  the  Dative,  in  connection  with  the  Accusative 
gratiam  with  the  Transitive  verb  habemus,  according  to  Eule  XII.  II. 

.In  the  arrangement  of  Objects,  the  Indirect  generally  precedes  tho 
Direct,  as  in  this  sentence ;  though  the  order  is  sometimes  reversed,  as  in 
the  tenth  sentence  in  this  Exercise. 

s  In  examples  like  this,  the  Possessive  pronoun  may  either  be  ex- 
pressed or  omitted,  as  it  is  often  omitted  in  Latin  when  not  emphatic. 

4  Dative.     Sec  Rule  XII.  II. 

5  Accusative.     Sec  Rule  XII.  II. 


SYNTAX. DATIVE.  129 

me  (to  me)  the  way?  11.  We  will  show  you  the  way. 
12.  Did  they  declare  war  against  the  Romans?  13. 
They  had  declared  war  against  the  Romans. 


DATIVE   WITH  ADJECTIVES. 
EULE  XIV.— Dative. 

391.  With  Adjectives,  the  OBJECT  TO  WHICH  the  qual- 
ity is  directed  is  put  in  the  Dative  : 

Patriae  solum  omnibus1  carum  est,  The  soil  of  their  country  is 
dear  to  all.  Cic.  Id  aptum  est  tempori,  This  is  adapted  to  the  time. 
Cic.  Omni  aetati  mors  est  communis,  Death  is  common  to  every  age. 
Cic.  Canis  similis  lupo  est,  A  dog  is  similar  to  a  wolf.  Cic.  Naturae 
accommodatum,  Adapted  to  nature.  Cic.  Graeciae  utile,  Useful  to 
Greece.  !Nep. 

1.  ADJECTIVES  WITH  DATIVE.  —  The  most  common  are 
those  signifying : 

Agreeable,  easy,  friendly,  like,  near,  necessary,  suitable,  subject, 
useful,  together  with,  others  of  a  similar  or  opposite  meaning,  and 
verbals  in  I  ills. 

EXEKCISE    LVIII. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Amlcus,  a,  urn,  friendly. 

Hispania,  ae,  /.  Spain. 

Multitude,  multitudinis,  f.  multitude. 

Saguntum,  I,  n.  Saguntum,  city  in  Spain. 

Similis,  e,  like. 

Soliim,  I,  n.  soil. 

Veritas,  veritatis,  /.  verity,  truth. 

1  Dative,  showing  to  whom  the  soil  is  dear,  —  dear  TO  ALL.  In  the  same 
way  in  these  examples,  tcmptiri  is  used  with  aptum,  aetdti  with  communis, 
lupo  with  similis,  naturae  with  accommodatum,  and  Graeciae  with  little. 


130  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Parentes  nobis l  cari  sunt.  2.  Patria  nobis  cara  est. 
3.  Patria  tibi l  erit  carissima.  4.  Patriae  solum  nobis  caruni 
est.  5.  Hannibal  exercitui  carus  fuit.  6.  Yictoria  Roma- 
nis  grata  fuit.  7.  Libertas  multitudmi  grata  est.  8.  Veri- 
tas  nobis  gratissima  est.  9.  Jucunda  mihi  oratio  fuit.  10. 
Saguntum  Romanis  amicum  fuit.  11.  Hannibal  Sagun- 
tum,2 Hispaniae  civitatem 3  Romanis 4  amicam,5  expugnavit. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Will  not  these  books  be  useful  to  you?  2.  They  are 
useful  to  us.  3.  They  will  be  useful  to  you.  4.  This  law 
has  been  useful  to  the  state.  5.  Will  not  this  book  be  ac- 
ceptable to  you  ?  6.  That  book  will  be  acceptable  to  me. 
7.  This  book  will  be  most  acceptable 6  to  my  brother. 

SECTION  VI. 

GENITIVE. 

393.  The  Genitive  in  its  primary  meaning  denotes 
source  or  cause ;  but,  in  its  general  use,  it  corresponds  to 
the  English  Objective  with  o/1,  and  expresses  various  ad- 
jective relations. 

GENITIVE    WITH    NOUNS. 

EULE  XVI— Genitive. 

395.  Any  Noun,  not  an  Appositive,  qualifying  the 
meaning  of  another  noun,  is  put  in  the  Genitive : 

1  Dative,  according  to  Rule  XIV. 

2  Accusative.     See  Rule  V. 

3  Appositive,  in.  agreement  with  Saguntum.     See  Rule  II. 

4  Dative  with  amlcam.     See  Rule  XIV. 

5  Amlcam  agrees  with  civitdtem.     See  Rule  XXXIII.  p.  32. 

6  See  162. 


SYNTAX. GENITIVE.  131 

CatCnis1  orationes,  Cato*s  orations.  Cic.  Castra  hostium,  The 
camp  of  the  enemy.  Liv.  Mors  Hamilcaris,  The  death  of  Hamilcar. 
Liv.  Sec  363. 


EXERCISE   LIX. 

I.  Vocabulary. 

Communis,  e,  common. 

Conscientia,  ae,  /.  consciousness. 

Dulcis,  e,  sweet,  pleasant. 

Honor,  honoris,  m.          honor. 

Orbis,  orbis,  m.  circle,  world. 

Orbis  terrarum,2  the  world. 

Parviis,  a,  urn,  small. 

Principium,  ii,  n.  beginning. 

Rectum,  I,  n.  rectitude,  right. 

Socrates,  is,  m.  Socrates,  Athenian  philosopher. 


II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Justitia  virtutum 3  reglna  est.  2.  Sapientia  est  mater 
omnium  bonarum  artium.  3.  Soci&tes'p&reiisphilosophiae 
fuit.  4.  Virtus  veil  honoris4  mater  est.  5.  Patria  com- 
munis5  est  omnium  nostrum6  parens.  6.  Homa  orbis7 
terrarum  caput  fuit.  7.  Omnium  rerum  principia  parva 
sunt.  8.  Conscientia  recti  est  praemium  virtutis  duleissi- 
mum. 


1  Catonis  qualifies  orationes,  and  is  in  the  Genitive,  in  accordance  with 
the  Rule. 

2  Literally  the  circle  of  lands. 

3  Genitive,  depending  upon  reglna.     Rule  XVI. 

4  Genitive,  depending  upon  mater. 

5  Communis  agrees  with  parens.     See  Rule  XXXIII.  p.  32. 

6  Genitive,  depending  upon  parens. 

1  Orbis  depends  upon  eaput,  and  terrarum  upon  orbis. 


132  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN"   BOOK. 

III.      Translate  into  T^atin. 

1.  Tho  orations  of  Cicero  arc  praised.  2.  The  courage 
of  the  soldiers  saved  the  city.  3.  The  crown  of  the  'king 
was  golden.  4.  The  sword,  of  the  general  was  beautiful. 
5.  The  son  of  the  consul  violated  the  laws  of  the  state. 
G.  The  citizens  will  observe  the  laws  of  the  state. 

GENITIVE    WITH    ADJECTIVES. 

RULE  XVII  — Genitive. 

399.  Many  Adjectives  take  a  Genitive  to  complete 
their  meaning : 

Avidus  laudls,1  Desirous  of  praise.  Cic.  Otil  ciipidus,  Desirous  of 
leisure.  Liv.  Amans  sui  virtus,  Virtue  fond  of  itself.  Cic.  Eff  iciens 
voluptlitls,  Productive  of  pleasure.  Cic.  Gloriae  memor,  Mindful  of 
glory.  Liv. 

1.  FOKCE  OF  THIS  GENITIVE.  —  The  genitive  here  retains 
its  usual  force,  —  of,  in  respect  of,  —  and  may  be  used  after 
adjectives  which  admit  this  relation. 

2.  ADJECTIVES  WITH  THE  GENITIVE.  —  The  most  com- 
mon are 

1)  Verbals  in  ax,  and  participles  in  aiis  and  ens  used 
adjectively. 

2)  Adjectives  denoting  desire,  knowledge,  skill,  recollec- 
tion, participation,  mastery,  fulness,  and  their  contraries. 

EXERCISE   LX. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Amans,  amantis,  loving,  fond  of. 

Avidus,  a,  um,  desirous  of,  eager  for. 

1  Laudis  completes  the  meaning  of  avidus;  desirous  (of  what?)  of 
praise.  It  is  in  the  Genitive,  by  this  Rule.  In  the  same  way,  otii  com- 
pletes the  meaning  of  cupidus  •  sui,  of  amans ;  vohiptdtif,  of  efficient ;  and 
gloriae,  of  memor. 


SYNTAX. A 1IL  ATI  VE .  1 33 

Certumen,  certiimmis,  n.  contest,  strife,  battle. 

Ciipidus,  a,  urn,  desirous  of. 

Fons,  fontis,  m.  fountain. 

Laus,  laudis,  f.  praise. 

Novitiis,  no  vi  tat  is,  f.  novelty. 

Perltus,  a,  um,  skilled  in. 

Piscis,  piscis,  m.  fisli. 

Plenus,  a,  um,  full. 

Voluptas,  voluptatts,  /.  pleasure. 

II.      Translate  into  English. 

1.  Roman!  avidi  gloriae l  fuerunt.  2.  Homines  novitatis 
nvidi  sunt.  3.  ISTuma  pads  l  erat  amantissimus.2  4.  Pa- 
triae  amantissimi  sumus.  5.  Consul  gloriae  cupidus  erat. 
G.  Cicero  gloriae  cupidissimus 2  fuit.  7.  Milites  crant 
avidissimi  certaminis.  8.  Fons  piscium  plenissimus  est. 
9.  Atlienicnses  belli  navalis  peritissimi  fuerunt. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Boys  are  fond  of  praise.  2.  Arc  you  not  fond  of 
praise  f  3.  "We  are  fond  of  praise.  4.  Were  not  the 
Athenians  fond  of  pleasure?  5.  They  were  always  fond 
of  pleasure.  G.  They  are  desirous  of  glory.  7.  Are  you 
not  desirous  of  a  victory?  8.  We  arc  desirous  of  a  vic- 
tory. 

SECTION  VII. 
ABLATIVE. 

412.  The  Ablative  in  its  primary  meaning  is  closely  re- 
lated to  the  Genitive  ;  but,  in  its  general  use,  it  corresponds 
to  the  English  Objective  with  from,,  by,  in^  with,  and  ex- 
presses various  adverbial  relations.  It  is  accordingly  used 
with  Verbs  and  Adjectives ;  while  the  Genitive,  as  the  case 
of  adjective  relations,  is  most  common  with  ISTouns.  See 
393. 

1  Genitive,  completing  the  meaning  of  the  adjective.     See  llule  XVIL 

2  See  162. 


134  INTRODUCTORY   LATIN  BOOK. 

ABLATIVE   OF   CAUSE,  MANNER,  MEANS. 

RULE  XXL  — Cause,  Manner,  Means. 

414.  Cause,  Manner,  and  Means1  are  denoted  by  the 
Ablative : 

Ars  utilitate  laudatur,  An  art  is  praised  because  of  its  usefulness. 
Cic.  Gloria  ducitur,  He  is  led  by  glory.  Cic.  Duobus  modis  fit,  It 
is  done  in  two  ways.  Cic.  Sol  omnia  luce  collustrat,  The  sun  illu- 
mines all  things  with  its  light.  Cic.  Apri  dentibus  se  tutantur,  Boars 
defend  themselves  with  their  tusks.  Cic.  Aeger  erat  vulneribus,  He 
was  ill  in  consequence  of  his  wounds.  Nep.  Laetus  sorte  tua,  Pleased 
with  your  lot.  Hor. 

1.  APPLICATION  OF  RULE.  —  This  Ablative  is  of  very 
frequent  occurrence,  and  is  used  both  with  verbs  and  ad- 
jectives. 

2.  ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE.  —  This    designates    that  by 
which,  by  reason  of  which,  because  of  which,  in  accord- 
ance with  lohich,  any  thing  is  or  is  done. 

3.  ABLATIVE  OF  MANNER.  —  This  Ablative  is  regularly 
accompanied  by  some  modifier,  or  by  the  preposition  cum  ; 
but  a  few  ablatives,  chiefly  those  signifying  manner,  —  more, 
ordine,  ration*,  etc.,  —  occur  without  such  accompaniment : 

Vi  summa,  With  the  greatest  violence.  Nep.  More  Persarum,  In 
the  manner  of  the  Persians.  ~N"ep.  Cum  silentio  audire,  To  hear  in 
silence.  Liv.  Id  ordine  f  acere,  To  do  it  in  order,  or  properly.  Cic. 

i  It  is  not  always  possible  to  distinguish  between  Cause,  Manner,  and 
Means.  Sometimes  the  same  Ablative  may  involve  both  Cause  and 
Means,  or  both  Means  and  Manner.  Still  the  pupil  should  be  taught  to 
determine  in  each  instance,  as  far  as  possible,  what  is  the  real  force  of 
the  Ablative.  Thus  in  the  examples,  utilitate  denotes  cause,  because 
of  its  usefulness ;  gloria,  means,  with  perhaps  the  accessory  notion  of 
cause ;  modis,  manner ;  luce,  means  ;  dentibus,  means  ;  vulneribus,  cause, 
with  perhaps  the  accessory  notion  of  means ;  aricl  sorte,  cause  and  means. 


SYNTAX. ABLATIVE.  135 

4.  ABLATIVE  OF   MEANS.  —  This  includes  the   Instru- 
ment and  all  other  Means  employed. 

5.  ABLATIVE  OF  AGENT.  —  This  designates  the  Person 
by  whom  anything  is  done  as  a  voluntary  agent,  and  takes 
the  preposition  a  or  ab: 

Occisus  est  a  Thebanis,  He  was  slain  by  the  Thelans.1    Nep. 

EXERCISE    LXI. 

I.      Vocabulary. 

Muniis,  muneris,  n.*  reward,  gift. 

Natura,  ae,  /.  nature. 

Pellis,  pellis,  /  skin,  hide. 

Quotidianus,  a,  lim,  daily. 

Scythae,  arum,  m.  plur.  Scythians. 

Triumpho,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  triumph. 

TJsus,  us,  m.  use. 

Yestio,  ire,  ivi,  itiim,  to  clothe. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Consul  virtute 2  laudtitus  est.  2.  Urbs  natura 3  mu- 
nita  erat.  3.  Haec  urbs  arte  munietur.  4.  Muneribus* 
delectamur.  5.  Roma  Camilli  virtute  est  servata.  6.  Ca- 
millus  hostes  magno  proelio  superavit.  7.  Scipio  patrem 
singular!  virtute  servavit.  8.  Scipio  ingenti  gloria4  tri- 
umphavit.5  9.  Scythae  corpora  pellibus  vestiebant, 

1  By  comparing  this  example  with  those  under  the  Rule,  the  second 
for  instance,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  Latin  construction  distinguishes  the 
person  by  whom  any  thing  is  done  from  the  means  by  which  it  is  done, 
designating  the  former  by  the  Ablative  with  a  or  ab  (a   Thebdms,  by 
the  Thebans),  and  the  latter  by  the  Ablative  without  a  preposition  ;  gloria,, 
by  glory. 

2  Ablative  of  Cause,  according  to  Ru.le  XXI. 

3  Ablative  of  Means. 

4  Ablative  of  Manner, 

5  The  privilege  of  entering  Rome  in  grand  triumphal  procession  was 
sometimes  awarded  to  eminent  Roman  generals  as  they  returned  from 
victory.     Triumphavit  here  refers  to  such  a  triumph. 


136  INTRODUCTORY  LATIN  BOOK. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Are  not  the  fields  adorned  with  flowers  ?  *  -  2.  The 
fields  are  adorned  with  beautiful  flowers.  3.  Have  you  not 
strengthened  your  memory  l>y  use  ?  4.  I  have  strengthened 
my  memory  by  daily  use.  5.  You  will  be  praised  for  (be- 
cause of)  your  diligence.2  6.  Our  pupils  have  been  praised 
for  their  diligence.  7.  The  general  saved  the  city  by  his 
valor.  8.  Rome  was  saved  by  the  valor  of  the  Roman 

soldiers. 

i 

ABLATIVES   WITH   COMPARATIVES. 

RULE  XXIII.— Ablative  with  Comparatives. 

417.  Comparatives  without  QUAM  are  followed  by 
the  Ablative : 

Nihil  est  amabilius  virtute,3  Nothing  is  more  lovely  than  virtue.  Cic. 
Quid  est  melius  bonitate,3  What  is  letter  than  goodness  ?  Cic. 

1.  COMPARATIVES  WITH  QUAM*  are  followed  by  the  Nom- 
inative, or  by  the  case  of  the  corresponding  noun  before 
them: 

Hibernia  minor  quam  Britannia  existimatur,  Hibernia  is  consid- 
ered smaller  than  Britannia.  Caes.  Agris  quam  urbi5  terribilior, 
More  terrible  to  the  country  than  to  the  city.  Liv. 

1  Ablative  of  Means.     Rule  XXI. 

2  Ablative  of  Cause. 

.  3  Virtute  and  bonitate  are  both  in  tlie  Ablative,  by  this  Rule ;  the  former 
after  the  comparative  amabilius,  and  the  latter  after  the  comparative  me- 
lius. 

4  Quam  is  a  conjunction,  meaning  than.     Conjunctions  are  mere  con- 
nectives, used  to  connect  words  or  clauses. 

5  Agris  and  urbi,  the  one  before  and  the  other  after  quam,  are  both  in 
the  same  construction,  in  the  Dative,  depending  upon  terribilior  according 
to  Rule  XIV.  391 . 


SYNTAX. ABLATIVE.  137 

EXEKCISE    LXII. 
I.      Vocabulary. 

Argentiim,  I.  n.  silver. 

Avaritia  ae./.  avarice. 

Bomtas,  bomtatis,  /.  goodness,  excellence. 

Eloquens,  eloquentis,  eloquent. 

Ferrum,  I,  n.  iron. 

Foedus,  a,  um,  detestable. 

Pretiosiis,  a,  iim,  valuable. 

Quam,  conj.  than. 

Scientia,  ae,/.  knowledge. 

Turris,  turris,/.  tower. 

II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.  Virtus  mihi1  gloria2  est  carior.  2.  Patria  mihi  vita- 
mea  est  carior.  8.  Quid  est  jucundius  amicitia?  4.  Quid 
foedius  est  avaritia  ?  5.  Aurum  argento  pretiosius  est. 
6.  Animus  corpore  est  nobilior.  7.  Turris  altior  erat  quam 
murus.3  8.  Quid  multitudini x  gratius  quam  libertas  est  ? 
9.  Pater  tuns  est  sapientior  quam  tu.4  10.  Quis  eloquen- 
tior  fuit  quam  Demosthenes  ? 

III.      Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Silver  is  more  valuable  than  iron?  2.  Virtue  is  more 
valuable  than  gold.  3.  Wisdom  is  more  valuable  than 
money.  4.  Will  not  wisdom  be  more  useful  to  you  than 
gold  ?  5.  Wisdom  will  be  more  useful  to  me  than  gokL 
6.  Goodness  is  more  valuable  than 5  knowledge.  7.  Good- 

1  See  Rule  XIV.  391. 

2  Ablative,  depending  upon  the  comparative  without  quam,  according 
to  Rule  XXIII. 

3  In  the  same  case  as  turris,  the  corresponding  noun  before  quam.     It 
is  the  subject  of  erat  understood. 

4  Subject  of  es  understood. 

5  In  this  and  the  following  examples  use  quam,  according  to  417,  1. 


138  INTRODUCTORY  LATIN  BOOK. 

ness  is  dearer  to  us  than  glory.  8.  The  Romans  were 
braver  than  the  Gauls.  9.  The  soldiers  were  braver  than 
the  general. 

ABLATIVE   OF  PLACE. 

420.  This  Ablative  designates 

I.  The  PLACE  IN  WHICH  any  thing  is  or  is  done : 

II.  The   PLACE   FROM  WHICH   any   thing  proceeds,   in- 
cluding Source  and  Separation, 

RULE  XXVI.— Ablative  of  Place. 

421.  I.  The  PLACE  IN  WHICH  and  the  PLACE  FROM 
WHICH  are  generally  denoted  by  the  Ablative  with  a 
Preposition.     But 

II.  NAMES  OF  TOWNS  drop  the  Preposition,  and  in 
the  Singular  of  the  First  and  Second  declensions  desig- 
nate the  PLACE  IN  WHICH  by  the  Genitive  : 

I.  Hannibal  in  Italia1  fuit,  Hannibal  was  in  Italy.  Nep.     In  nos- 
tris  castris,  In  our  camps.  Caes.     In  Appia  via,  On  the  Appian  Way. 
Cic.     Ab  urbe  proficiscitur,  He  departs  from  the  city.  Caes.     Ex 
Africa,  From  Africa.   Liv. 

II.  Athenis 2  fuit,  He  was  at  Athens.  Cic.     Baby  lone  mortuus  est, 
He  died  at  Babylon.  Cic.     Fiigit  Corintho,  He  fled  from  Corinth. 
Cic.     Romac  2  fuit,  He  was  at  Rome.  Cic. 

EXERCISE    LXIII. 

I.     Vocabulary. 

A,  ab,  prep,  with  all.  from,  ly. 

Babylon,  Babyloms,/.  Babylon,  the  city  of. 

1  In  Italia,  in  castris,  and  in  via  designate   the  PLACE  IN  WHICH  ; 
while  ab  urbe  and  ex  Africa  designate  the  PLACE  FROM  WHICH.     They 
are  in  the  Ablative  with  a  preposition. 

2  Athenis,  Babylone,  and  Corintho,  being  names   of  towns,  omit   the 
preposition ;   while  Eomae,  also  the  name  of  a  town,  is  in  the  Genitive, 
as  it  is  in  the  Singular  of  the  First  deelensionT 


SYNTAX. ABLATIVE.  139 

Corlnthus,  I,/.  Corinth^  city  in  Greece. 

Dionysij^,  ii,  m.  Dionysius,  tyrant  of  Syracuse. 

Habito,  are,  avi,  atum,  to  dwell,  reside. 

Hortus,  I,  m.  garden. 

Laetitia,  ae,/.  joy. 

Luciis,  I,  7?2.  grove. 

Regio,  rugionis,/*.  region,  territory. 

Senator,  senatoris,  in.  senator. 

Trlginta,  thirty. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

'1.  Hannibal  in  Hispania1  fuit.  2.  Latlnus  in  Italia 
regnavit.  3.  Latlnus  in  illis  regionibus  regnabat.  4.  Gives 
ab  urbe2  fugiebant.  5.  Themistocles  e  Graecia  fugit.  6. 
Sex  menses 3  Athenis 4  fui.  7.  Alexander  Babylbne  erat. 

8.  Dionysius  tyrannus  Syracusis  fugit.     9.    Themistocles 
Athenis   fugit.      10.    Athenis    habitabat.      11.    Romulus 
JRomae 5  regnavit.     12.  JRomae  ingens  laetitia  fuit. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Is  not  your  father  in  Italy  %  2.  My  father  is  in 
Greece.  3.  Were  you  not  in  Greece  ?  4.  We  resided  in 
Greece  three  years.  5.  Who  is  in  the  garden  ?  6.  My 
brother  is  in  the  garden.  7.  The  pupils  were  walking  in 
the  fields.  8.  The  nightingales  are  singing  in  the  groves. 

9.  Your  father  resided  many  years  at  Athens.     10.  Did  he 
not  reside  at  Carthage  ?      11.    He  resided  four  years  at 
Carthage.     12.  Did  you  not  receive  my  letter  at  Home  ? 
13.  I  received  your  letter  at  Corinth. 

1  Ablative  of  PLACE  IN  WHICH,  with  the  preposition  in.     See  Rula 
XXXII. 

2  Ablative  of  PLACE  FROM  WHICH,  with  the  preposition  ab. 

3  See  Rule  VIII. 

4  In  the  Ablative,  without  a  preposition,  because  it  is  the  name  of  a 
town. 

5  In  the  Genitive,  because  it  is  the  name  of  a  toicn,  and  is  in  the  Singu* 
lar  of  the  First  declension. 


140 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN"  BOOK. 


ABLATIVE    OF    TIME.         ^ 
ETJLE  XXVin,— Time. 

426.  The  TIME  of  an  Action  is  denoted  by  th&  Ab* 
lative : 

Oetogesimo  anno1  est  mortuus,  He  died  in  his  eightieth  year.  Cic. 
Vere  convenere,  They  assembled  in  the  spring.  Liv.  Natali  die  suo, 
On  his  birth-day.  Nep.  Hicme  et  aestate,  In  winter  and  summer.  Cic. 

1.  DESIGNATIONS  OF  TIME. —  Any  word  so  used  as  to  involve 
the  time  of  an  action  or  event  may  be  put  in  the  ablative :  hello, 
in  the  time  of  war ;  pugna,  in  the  time  of  battle  ;  ludis,  at  the  time 
of  the  games ;  memoria,  in  memory,  i.e.,  in  the  time  of  one's  recuF- 
lection. 

EXERCISE    LXIV. 
I.      Vocabulary. 


Brutus,  I,  m. 

Deflagro,  are,  avi,  atiim, 

Diana,  ae,/. 

Ephesius,  a,  iim, 

Hiems,  hiemis,/. 

Natalis,  e; 

Natalis  dies, 

Pompeiiis,  ii,  m. 

Persae,  arum,  m.  plur. 

Scribo,  scrlbere,  scrips!,  scrlptum, 

Tempus,  temporis,  n. 


Brutus ,  a  Roman  patriot. 

to  burn,  be  consumed. 

Diana,  a  goddess. 

Ephesian,  of  Ephesus. 

winter. 

belonging  to  one's  birth,  natal. 

birth-day. 

Pompey,  Roman  general. 

Persians. 

to  write. 

time. 


II.     Translate  into  English. 

1.   Natiili  die2  tuo  scripsisti  epistolam.     2.   Eodem  die 
epistolam  tuam  accepi.3     3.  Pompeius  urbem  tertio  mense 

1  Anno,  vere,  die,  hieme,  and  aestate  are  all  in  the  Ablative,  hy  this  Rule. 

2  Ablative  of  Time,  according  to  Rule  XXVIII. 

3  From  accipio. 


SYNTAX. ABLATIVE.  141 

cepit.  4.  Eodem  die  Persae  superati  sunt.  5.  Pompeius 
illo  tempore  miles  fuit.  6.  Illo  anno  Dianae  Ephesiae  tern- 
plum  deilagravit.  7.  Occasu  soils  hostes  fugati  sunt.  8. 
Illo  die  Brutus  patriam  servavit. 

III.     Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Were  you  not  in  Athens1  at  that  time?  2.  We  were 
at  Corinth2  at  that  time.  3.  Do  you  not  reside  in  the  city 1 
in  winter  ?  4.  We  reside  in  this  beautiful  city  in  the  win- 
ter. 5.  The  city  was  taken  at  sunset.  6.  Were  you  not 
in  the  city  at  that  hour  ?  7.  I  was  in  the  city  at  that  time. 
8.  Were  you  not  in  Rome 2  on  your  birth-day  ?  9.  I  was 
in  that  city  on  my  birth-day. 

SECTION  VIII. 

CASES  WITH  PREPOSITIONS. 

RULE  XXXII  — Cases  with  Prepositions. 

432.  The  Accusative  and  Ablative   may  be  used 
with  Prepositions : 

Ad  amlcum3  scrips!,  /  have  written  to  a  friend.  Cic.  In  curiam, 
Into  the  senate-house.  Liv.  In  Italia,  In  Italy.  Nep.  Pro  castris, 
Before  the  camp. 

433.  The  ACCUSATIVE  is  used  with 

Ad,  adversus  (adversum),  ante,  apud,  circa,  circum,  circiter,  cis, 
citra,  contra,  erga,  extra,  infra,  inter,  intra,  juxta,  ob,  penes,  per, 
pone,  post,  praeter,  prope,  propter,  secundum,  supra,  trans,  ultra, 
Versus : 

Adurbem,  To  the  city.  Cic.    Adversus  deos,  Toward  the  gods.  Cic. 

434.  The  ABLATIVE  is  used  with 

A  or  ab  (abs),      absque,      coram,      cum,      de, 
e  or  ex,  prae,          pro,  sine,      tenus : 

1  Ablative  of  Place.     See  Kulc  XXVI. 

2  Genitive  of  Place.     See  Kule  XXVI.  II. 

3  The  Accusative  amlcum  is  here  used  with  the  preposition  ad;  curiam, 
with  in;  the  Ablative  Italia,  with  in.     See  435,  1. 


142  rNTKODUCTOKY    LATLtf   BOOK. 

Ab  urbe,  From  the  city.  Caes.  Coram  conventu,  In  tJte  presence 
of  the  assembly.  Nep. 

435.  The  ACCUSATIVE  or  ABLATIVE  is  used  with 
In,         sub,         subter,         super: 

In  Asiam  profugit,  He  Jled  into  Asia.  Cic.  Hannibal  in  Italia 
fuit,  Hannibal  was  in  Italy.  Nep. 

1.  In  and  Sub  take  the  Accusative  in  answer  to  the  question 
whither,  the  Ablative  in  answer  to  where:  In  Asiam,  (whither?) 
into  Asia  ;  In  Italia,  (where  ?)  in  Italy. 

EXERCISE    LXV. 

I.  Vocabulary. 

Adversus,  prep,  with  ace.  against. 

DlnucS,  are,  avl,  atum,  to  fight. 

Per,  prep,  with  ace.  of,  through. 

Prosperc,  adv.  successfully. 

Provoco,  are,  Fivl,  atum,  to  challenge. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Lacedaemonii  hostes  ad  proeliwn  provocabant.  2. 
Scipio  contra  Hannonem,  ducem  Carthaginiensium,  pros- 
pere  pugnat.  3.  Caesar  adversus  Pompeium  dimicavit. 
4.  Yeritas  per  se l  mihi  grata  est.  5.  Virtus  per  se  laudab- 
ilis  est.  6.  Persae  a  Graecis 2  superati  sunt.  7.  Cicero 
de  amicitid  scripsit. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Will  not  the  army  be  led  back  to  the  city?  2.  It  has 
been  led  back  to  the  city.  3.  Will  you  not  write  to  me  ? 
4.  I  will  write  to  you.  5.  Friendship  is  valuable  of  itself. 
6.  Have  you  not  received  five  letters  from  me  f  7.  I  have 
received  four  letters  from  you.  8.  I  have  received  two 
letters  from  your  brother. 

1  Per  se,  literally  through  itself:  render  in  itself  or  of  itself. 

2  A  Graecis,  by  the  Greeks.     See  414,  5.~ 


SUGGESTIONS   TO   THE   LEARNER, 


I.  THE  preparation  of  a  Heading  Lesson  in  Latin  in- 
volves, 

1.  A  knowledge  of  the  Meaning  of  tlio  Latin. 

2.  A  knowledge  of  the  Structure  of  the  Latin  Sentences. 

3.  A  translation  into  English. 

MEAXIXG  OF  THE  LATIN. 

II.  Remember  that  almost  every  inflected  word  in  a 
Latin  sentence  requires  the  use  of  both  the  Dictionary  and 
the  Grammar  to  ascertain  its  meaning. 

The  Dictionary  gives  the  meaning  of  the  word,  without  reference  to  its 
Grammatical  properties  of  case,  number,  mood,  tense,  etc. ;  and  the  Gram- 
mar, the  meaning  of  the  endings  which  mark  these  properties.  Tho 
Dictionary  will  give  the  meaning  of  mensa,  a  table,  but  not  of  mensarum, 
of  tables  :  the  Grammar  alone  will  give  the  force  of  the  ending  arum. 

III.  Make  yourself  so  familiar  with  all  the  endings  of 
inflection,  with   their   exact  form  and  force,  whether  in 
declension  or  conjugation,  that  you  will  not  only  readily 
distinguish  the  different  parts  of  speech  from  each  other, 
but  also  the  different  forms  of  the  same  word,  with  their 
exact  and  distinctive  force. 

TV.  In  taking  up  a  Latin  sentence, 

1.  Notice  carefully  the  endings  of  the  several  words,  and 
thus  determine  which  words  are  nouns,  which  verbs,  etc. 

2.  Observe  the  force  of  each  ending,  and  thus  determine 
case,  number,  voice,  mood,  tense,  etc. 

This  will  be  found  to  be  a  very  important  step  toward  the  mastery  of 
the  sentence.  By  this  means,  you  will  discover  not  only  the  relation  of 
the  words  to  each  other,  but  also  an  important  part  of  their  meaning, 

• — that  which  they  derive  from  their  endings. 

143 

>A      OF  THIS  ^ 


144  INTEODUCTOKY    LATl^T   BOOK. 

V.  The  key  to  the  meaning  of  any  simple  sentence  (345, 
I.)  will  be  found  in  the  simple  subject  and  predicate ;  i.e., 
in  the  Nominative  and  its  Verb.     Hence,  in  looking  out 
the  sentence,  observe  the  following  order.     Take 

1.  The  Subject,  or  Nominative. 

The  ending  will,  in  most  instances,  enable  you  to  distinguish  this  from 
all  other  words,  except  the  adjectives  winch  agree  with  it.  These  may  be 
looked  out  at  the  same  time  with  the  subject. 

Sometimes  the  subject  is  not  expressed,  but  only  implied,  in  the 
ending  of  the  verb.  It  may  then  be  readily  supplied,  as  it  is  always  a 
pronoun  of  such  person  and  number  as  the  verb  indicates  :  as,  audio,  I 
hear,  the  ending  io  showing  that  the  subject  is  ego  ;  auditis,  you  hear,  the 
ending  itis  showing  that  the  subject  is  vos. 

2.  The  Verb,  with  Predicate  Noun  or  Adjective,  if  any. 

This  will  be  readily  known  by  the  ending.  Now,  combining  this  with 
the  Subject,  you  will  have  an  outline  of  the  sentence.  All  the  other 
words  must  now  be  associated  with  these  two  parts. 

-  3.  The  Modifiers  of  the  Subject;  i.e.,  adjectives  agreeing 
with  it,  nominatives  in  apposition  with  it,  genitives  de- 
pendent upon  it,  etc. 

But  perhaps  some  of  these  have  already  been  looked  out  in  the  attempt 
to  ascertain  the  subject. 

In  looking  out  these  words,  bear  in  mind  the  meaning  of  the  subject 
to  which  they  belong.  This  Avill  greatly  aid  you  in  selecting  from  the 
dictionary  the  true  meaning  in  the  passage  before  you, 

4.  The  Modifiers  of  the  Verb,  i.e.  (1)  Oblique  cases, 
accusatives,  datives,  etc.,  dependent  upon  it,  and  (2)  Ad- 
verbs qualifying  it. 

Bear  in  mind  all  the  while  the  force  of  the  case  and  the  meaning  of  the 
verb,  that  you  may  be  able  to  select  for  each  word  the  true  meaning  in 
the  passage  before  you. 

VI.  In  complex  and  compound  sentences  (345,  II.,  III.), 
discover  first  the  connectives  which  unite  the  several  mem- 
bers, and  then  proceed  with  each  member  as  with  a  simple 
sentence. 


SUGGESTIONS    TO    THE   LEARNER.  145 

VII.  In  the  use  of  Dictionary  and  Vocabulary,  remem- 
ber that  you  are  not  to  look  for  the  particular  form  which 
occurs  in  the  sentence,  but  for  the  Nona.  Sing,  of  nouns, 
adjectives,   and  pronouns,   and  for  the  First  Pers.   Sing. 
Pres.  Indie.  Act.  of  verbs.     Therefore, 

1.  In  Pronouns,  make   yourself  so   familiar  with  their 
declension,  that  any  oblique  case  will  at  once  suggest  the 
Nom.  Sing. 

If  vobis  occurs,  yon  must  remember  that  the  Nom.  Sing,  is  tu. 

2.  In  Nouns  and  Adjectives,  make  yourself  so  familiar 
with  the  case-endings,  that  you  will  be  able  to  drop  that  of 
the  given  case,  and  substitute  for  it  that  of  the  Nom.  Sing. 

Thus  menstZws;  stem  mens,  Nom.  Sing,  mensis,  which  you  will  find 
in  the  Vocabulary.  So  urbm/wr&,  urbs. 

3.  In  Verbs,  change  the  ending  of  the  given  form  into 
that  of  the  First  Pers.  Sing,  of  the  Pres.  Indie.  Act. 

Thus  arndbat;  stem  am,  First  Pers.  Sing.  Pres.  Indie.  Act.  amo,  which 
you  will  find  in  the  Vocabulary.  So  amswerunt ;  First  Pers.  Pcrf.  amdvi, 
Perf.  stem  amav,  Verb  stem  am ;  amo. 

To  illustrate  the  steps  recommended  in  the  preceding  suggestions,  we 
add  the  following 

Model. 

VIII.  Themistocles  imperator  servitute  totam  Graeciam 
liberavit. 

1.  Without  knowing  the  meaning  of  the  words,  you  will  discover 
from  their  forms, 

1)  That  Themistocles  and  imperator  are  probably  nouns  in  the 
Nom.  Sing. 

2)  That  servitute  is  a  noun  in  the  Abl.  Sing. 

3)  That  totam  and  Graeciam  are  either  nouns  or  adjectives  in  the 
Accus.  Sing. 

4)  That  liberavit  is  a  verb  in  the  Act.  voice,  Indie,  mood,  Perf. 
tense,  Third  Person,  Singular  number. 

2.  Now,  turning  to  the  Vocabulary  for  the  meaning  of  the  words, 
you  will  learn, 


146  INTRODUCTORY  LATIN  BOOK. 

1)  That  Themistocles  is  the  name  of  an  eminent  Athenian  gen- 
eral :  THEMISTOCLES. 

2)  That  liberOj  for  which  you  must  look,  not  for  Ubcravit,  meani 
to  liberate :  LIBERATED. 

Themistocles  liberated. 

3)  That  imperator  means  commander :  THE  COMMANDER. 

Themistocles  the  commander  liberated. 

4)  That  Graeciam  is  the  name  of  a  country  :  GREECE. 

Themistocles  the  commander  liberated  Greece. 

5)  That  totus  means  tlie  whole,  all :  ALL. 

Themistocles  the  commander  liberated  all  Greece. 
G)  That  servitus  means  servitude  :  FROM  SERVITUDE. 

Themistocles  the  commander  liberated  all   Greece  from 
servitude. 

STRUCTURE  OP  THE  LATIN  SENTENCE. 
IX.  The  structure  of  a  sentence  is  best  shown  by  ana- 
lyzing* it,  and  ty  parsing  the  words  which  compose  it. 

Parsing. 

XVII.2  In  parsing  a  word, 

1.  Name  the  Part  of  Speech  to  which  it  belongs. 

2.  Inflect "  it,  if  capable  of  inflection. 

3.  Give  its  gender,  number,  case,  voice,  mood,  tense, 
person,  etc.4 

4.  Give  its  Syntax,  and  the  Rule  for  it.5 

TRANSLATION. 

XIX.  In  translating,  render  as  literally  as  possible  with- 
out doing  violence  to  the  English. 

1  It  has  not  been  thought  advisable   to   enter  upon   the  subject  of 
analysts  at  this  early  stage  of  the  course.     That  will  be  presented  in  the 
Reader,  which  follows  this  work. 

2  These   suggestions   arc   taken,  without   change,  from  the   Reader. 
Accordingly,  the  numerals  are  made  to  correspond  to  those  in  that  work. 

3  Inflect;  i.e.,  decline,  compare,  or  conjugate. 

4  That  is,  such  of  these  properties  as  it  possesses. 

5  For  Models  for  Parsing,  see  pp.  16,  22,  237  S3>  55>  57;  59>  C6>  71> 
and  73. 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


For  Explanation  of  Abbreviations  and  References,  see  p.  ix. 


A. 

A,  &b,  prep,  with  abl.    From,  by. 

AccipiO,  accipCre,  accepi,  acceptum. 
To  receive. 

Acer,  acris,  acre.  Sharp,  severe, 
valiant. 

Acies,  aciei,  f.  Order  of  battle,  bat- 
tle-array, army. 

Ad,  prep,  with  ace.  To,  towards, 
near. 

Administro,  are,  avi,  iitum.  Toad- 
minister,  manage. 

Admoneo,  admonere,  admonui,  ad- 
mo  ni  turn.  To  admonish. 

Adventus,  us,  m.    Arrival,  approach. 

Adversus,  prep,  with  ace.     Against. 

Aedifico,  iire,  avi,  attim.     To  build. 

Aestas,  aestatis,^/.     Summer. 

AgSr,  agri,  m.    Field,  land. 

Agggr,  aggeris,  m.  Mound,  ram- 
part. 

Agis,  Agidis,  m.  Agis,  a  king  of 
Sparta. 

Albanus,  a,  um.     Allan. 

Alexander,  Alexandri,  m.  Alexan- 
der, the  Great. 

Aliquis,  aliqua,  allquid  or  aliquod. 
Some,  some  one.  See  191. 

Altus,  a,  urn.     High,  lofty. 

Amans,  umantis.     Loving,  fond  of. 


Ambulo,  are,  avi,  atiim.     To  walk. 

Amicitia,  ae,  f.     Friendship. 

Amiciis,  a,  um.     Friendly. 

Amicus,  i,  m.     Friend. 

Amnis,  amnis,  in.    River. 

Amo,  are,  avi,  atum.     To  love. 

Amor,  amoris,  m.    Love. 

Amplio,  are,  avi,  attim.    To  enlarge. 

Ancus,  i,  m.   Ancus,  a  Roman  king. 

Animal,  animalis,  n.     Animal. 

Animus,  i,  m.     Soul,  mind,  passion, 
disposition. 

Annulus,  i,  m.     Ring. 

Annils,  I,  m.     Year. 

Ante,  prep,  with  ace.    Before. 

Antiques,  a,  um.    Ancient. 

Apis,  apis,  /.    Bee. 

AppellO,  arS,  avi,  atum.     To  call. 

Appgtens,     app^tentis.       Desiring, 
striving  for. 

Apud,  prep,  with  ace.     In  the  pres- 
ence of,  near,  before,  a^iong. 

Apulia,  ae,  f.    Apulia,  a  country  in 
Italy. 

Arabs,  Arabis,  in  and  f.     Arab,  an 
Arab. 

Arete,  adv.     Closely,  soundly. 

Argentum,  i,  n.     Silver. 

Aro,    Srare,    aravl.     Sratum.       T* 
plough. 

147 


148 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 


Arrogantia,  ae,/.    Arrogance. 
AYS,  artis,  /     Art,  skill. 
Artaxerxes,  is,   m.      Artaxerxes,   a 

Persian  king. 

Arx,  arcis,  /.     Citadel,  fortress. 
Athenae,  arum,/,  plur.    Athens,  the 

capital  of  Attica. 
Atheniensis,  e.    Athenian. 
Atheniensis,  is,  in.  and  /.  Athenian, 

an  Athenian. 
Atticus,  I,  m.    Atticus,   a  Roman 

name. 

Audio,  Ir8,  m,  itum.     To  hear. 
Auditor,     audltoris,     m.      Hearer, 

auditor. 

Aureus,  a,  iim.     Golden. 
Auriim,  i,  n.     Gold. 
Avaritia,  ae,  /.     Avarice. 
Avidiis,  a,  iim.   Desirous  of,  eager  for. 
Avis,  avis,  f.     Bird. 

B. 

Babylon,  Babylonls,  /.  Babylon, 
the  celebrated  capital  of  the  As- 
syrian Empire,  on  the  banks  of 
the  Euphrates. 

Beatiis,  a,  iim.     Happy,  blessed. 

Bellum,  i,  n.     War,  warfare. 

B6ng,  adv.     Well 

BSnigne,  adv.    Kindly. 

Bonltas,  bonitatis,  /.  Goodness, 
excellence. 

Bonus,  a,  iim.     Good. 

BrSvis,  8.     Short,  brief. 

Brutus,  i,  m.  Brutus,  a  celebrated 
Roman  patriot. 

C. 

Caesar,  Caesaris,  m.  Ccesar,  a  cele- 
brated Roman  commander. 

Caiiis,  il,  in.  Caius,  a  proper 
name. 


Camillas,  i,  m.  Camillus,  a  Roman 
general. 

Campus,  i,  m.     Plain. 

Canis,  cams,  m.  andy*.    Dog. 

Canto,  are,  avi,  atttm.     To  sing. 

Cantiis,  us,  m.     Singing,  song. 

Capio,  capgr6,  ccpi,  captum.  To 
take,  capture. 

Capiit,  capitis,  n.     Head,  capital. 

Carmen,  carminis,  n.  Song,  poem, 
verse. 

Carthaginiensis,  e.     Carthaginian. 

Carthaginiensis,  is,  in.  and  f.  A 
Carthaginian. 

Carthago,  Carthaginis,  f.  Carthage, 
a  city  of  Northern  Africa. 

Carthago  Nova.  New  Carthage, 
Carthagena,  a  city  of  Spain. 

Carus,  a,  iim.     Dear. 

Cato,  Catonis,  m.  Cato,  a  distin- 
guished Roman. 

Centum.    One  hundred.    See  175,  2. 

Certamen,  certaminis,  ».  Contest, 
strife,  battle. 

Clbus,  i,  ?w.    Food. 

Cicero,  Ciceronis,  m.  Cicero,  the 
celebrated  Roman  orator. 

Civllis,  d.     Civil. 

Civis,  cms,  m.  and/.     Citizen. 

CMtas,  civitatis,/.     State,  city. 

Clarus,  a,  um.  Renowned,  distin- 
guished, illustrious. 

Classis,  classis,/.    Fleet,  navy. 

Coerceo,  coercerd,  coercui,  coerci- 
tiim.  To  check. 

Colo,  colere,  colui,  cultum.  To 
practise,  cultivate. 

Communis  e.     Common. 

Condemno,  are,  avi,  atiim.  To  con- 
demn. 

Conditor,  conditoris,  m.    Founder. 

Conjux,  conjtigis,  m .  and/.  Wife, 
husband,  spouse. 


LATIN-EXGLISII   VOCABULARY. 


149 


Cunon,    Cononis,    m.      Conon,   an 

Athenian  general. 
Conscientia,  ae,/!     Consciousness. 
Consilium,  ii,  n.     Design,  plan. 
Conspectus,    us,    m.      Sight,    view, 

presence. 

Consul,  consults,  m.     Consul. 
Contra,  prep,    with  ace.     Against, 

opposite  to,  contrary  to. 
Convoco,  are,  avi,  atum.     To  assem- 
ble, call  together. 
Curinthtts,    I,  f.     Corinth,   city  in 

Greece. 
Cornelius,     ii,     in.       Cornelius,     a 

Roman  name. 
Corona,  ae,/I     Crown. 
Corpus,  corporis,  n.     Body,  person. 
Crc6,   arS,   avi,   atum.     To  create, 

make,  appoint,  elect. 
Crudelis,  c.     Cruel. 
Crudus,  a,  urn.     Unripe. 
CulpO,  are,  avi,  atiim.     To  blame. 
Cum,  prep,  ivith  all.     With. 
Cupidiis,  &,  urn.    Desirous  of. 
Cures,  Curium,  m.  p/ur.     Cares,  a 

Sabine  town. 

Custodio,  ire,  ivi,  itum.     To  guard. 
Gustos,  custodis,  m.  and/1     Keeper, 
guard. 

D. 

De,  prep,  with  abl.     Concerning. 

Debeo,  debere,  debui,  debitum.  To 
owe. 

Deoem.     Ten.     See  175. 

Decimus,  a,  tim.     Tenth. 

DefectiO,  defectionis,  /.     Eclipse. 

DeflagrO,  are,  avi,  atum.  To  burn, 
be  consumed. 

Delecto,  are,  avl,  atum.  To  delight, 
please. 

Demaratus,  I,  m.  Demaratus,  a  Co- 
rinthian. 


Demosthenes,  is,  m.      Demosthencst 
the  celebrated  Athenian  orator. 

Diana,  ae,  f.     Diana,  the  goddess 
of  the  chase. 

Dic5,  dicere,  dixi,  dictum.     To  say, 
speak,  tell. 

Dies,  diei,  m.    Day.    See  119,  note. 

Diligens,  diligentis.     Diligent. 

Diligentia,  ae,  f.     Diligence. 

Dimico,  are,  avi,  atiim.     To  fight. 

Diony sitis,  ii,  m.     Dionysiust  tyrant 
of  Syracuse. 

Discipuliis,  I,  m.     Pupil. 

Diserte,  adv.     Clearly,  eloquently. 

Displice5,  displicerS,  displicui,  dis- 
plicitum.     To  displease. 

Divmus,  a,  um.     Divine. 

Dolor,  doloris,  HI.     Pain,  grief,  suf- 
fering. 

Dono,  are,  avi,  atum.     To  give,  pre- 
sent. 

Donum,  I,  n.     Gift. 

Dormi5,  ire,  ivi,  itum.     To  sleep* 

Draco,    Draconis,    m.      Draco,   an 
Athenian  lawgiver. 

Ducenti,  ae,  a.     Two  hundred. 

Duco,  ducere,  duxl,  due  turn.     To 
lead. 

Dulcis,  e.     Sweet,  pleasant. 

Duo,  ae,  o.     Two.     See  176. 

DiiplicO,  are,  avi,  atum.    To  double, 
increase. 

Dux,  ducis,  m.  and  f.    Leader,  gen- 
eral. 


E,  ex,  prep,  with  abl.    From. 
Ebrietas,  ebrietatis,y.    Drunkenness. 
Educo,  educere,  eduxi,  eductum.  To 

lead  forth,  lead  out. 

ftVigio,  efFttgere,  cffugi,  effugitum. 
To  escape. 
Ego,  mel.    /.     See  184. 


150 


INTRODUCTORY  LATIN  UOOK. 


Egrdgiiis,  a,  lim.     Distinguished. 
Egregie,  adv.     Excellently. 
Elephanttts,  i,  m.     Elephant. 
Eloquens,  eloqucntis.     Eloquent. 
Eloquentia,  ae,  f.     Eloquence. 
Ephesius,    a,    um.       Ephesian,    of 

Ephesus. 
Epiriis,  i,  f.     Epirus,  a  country  in 

Greece. 

Epistola,  ae,  f.    Letter. 
Eriidio,  ire,  ivi,  ittim.     To  instruct, 

refine,  educate. 
Eriiditus,  a,  um.    Learned,  instructed 

in.  "-• 

Ex,  prep,  ivith  abl.     From. 
Exerceo,  exercere,  exercui,  cxcrci- 

tum.     To  exercise,  train. 
Exercitiis,  us,  m.     Army. 
Expugno,  are,  avi,  atum.     To  take, 

take  by  storm. 
ExspectO,  are,  avi,  atiim.    To  await, 

expect. 
Exstil,  exsttlis,  m.  and  f.     Exile. 

F. 

Eacies,  faciei,  f.     Face,  appearance. 

Ferrum,  i,  «.     Iron. 

Fcrtilis,  e.     Fertile. 

Fidelitas,  fidelitatis,  /.  Fidelity, 
faithfulness. 

Fides,  fidei,  /.     Faith,  fidelity. 

Fidus,  a,  tim.     Faithful. 

Filia,  ae,  /.     Daughter. 

Filius,  ii,  m.     Son. 

Fmio,  ire,  ivi,  itiim.  To  finish, 
bring  to  a  close. 

Finis,  finis,  m.     Limit,  territory. 

FirmO,  are,  avi,  atum.  To  strengthen, 
confirm. 

Flaminitis,  ii,  m.~  Flaminius,  a  Ro- 
man general. 

Flos,  floris,  m.     Flower. 

Foedus,  a,  um.     Detestable. 


Fons,  fontis,  m.     Fountain. 
Fortis,  e.     Brave. 
Fortiter,  adv.     Bravely. 
Fortitude,  fortitudmis,  /.    Bravery, 

fortitude. 

Fossa,  ac,  /.     Ditch,  moat. 
Frater,  fratris,  m.     Brother. 
Fructus,  us,  m.     Fruit,  produce,  in- 
come. 

Frumentum,  i,  n.     Corn,  grain. 
Fuga,  ae,  /.     Flight. 
Fugio,  ftigere,  fugi,  fugitfun.      To 

flee,  fly,  run  away. 
Ftigo,   are,   avi,    atiim.       To    rout, 

drive  away. 

Funestiis,  a,  um.     Destructive. 
Ftiror,  furoris,  m.   Madness,  insanity. 

G. 

Gallils,  i,  m.   Gallus,  a  proper  name. 

Galliis,  i,  m.  Gaul,  a  Gaul,  an  in- 
habitant of  ancient  Gaul,  embra- 
cing modern  France. 

Gemma,  ae,  f.     Gem, 

Gener,  generi,  m.     Son-in-law. 

Gens,  gentis,  f.     Race. 

Germania,  ae,  f.     Germany. 

Gladius,  ii,  m.     Sword. 

Globostts,  a,  um.     Spherical. 

Gloria,  ae,  f.     Glory. 

Graecia,  ae,  f.     Greece. 

Graecus,  a,  um.     Grecian,  Greek. 

Graeciis,  i,  m.      Greek,  a  Greek. 

Gratia,  ae,  f.  Favor,  gratitude, 
thanks. 

Gratus,  ii,  tim.    Acceptable,  pleasing. 

Grex,  gregis,  m.     Herd,  flock. 

II. 
Habco,    liabere,     hiibui,     habitum. 

To  have,  hold. 
Habito,  are,  avi,  atum.     To  dwell, 

reside. 


LATKv-EXG LTSII    VOCAI5UL AIIY . 


151 


ILmnlbiXl,  Ilanniballs,  in.  Ilanni- 
lal,  a  celebrated  Carthaginian 
general. 

Ilanno,  Hannoms,  r,i.  Ilanno,  a 
Carthaginian  general. 

llasta,  SLQ,f.     Spear. 

Hie,  hacc,  hoc.     This. 

Ilicms,  hi£mis,y.      Winter. 

Ilirtmdo,  hirundinis,  f.     Swallow. 

Hispania,  ae,/I     Spain. 

Hispamls,  I,  in.     A.  Spaniard. 

Homerus,  I,  m.  Homer,  the  cele- 
brated Grecian  poet. 

Homo,  hominis,  m.     Man. 

Honor,  honoris,  m.     Honor. 

Hora,  ac,  f.     Sour. 

Jlostis,  hostis,  m.  and/*.     Enemy. 

I. 

Idem,  cadem,  idem.  Same,  the 
same.  Sco  18G.  ,. 

Ignoro,  are,  avi,  atum.  To  be 
ignorant  of,  not  to  know. 

Hie,  ilia,  illud.  That,  he,  she,  it.  Sec 
18G. 

Illustro,  are,  avi,  atum.  To  illus- 
trate, illumine. 

Imago,  imagmis,  f.     Imayc,  picture. 

Impatiens,  impatientis.     Impatient. 

Imperator,  imperatoris,  m.  Com- 
mander. 

Imperiiim,  il,  n.  Reign,  poiccr,  r/ov- 
crnment. 

Impetus,  iis,  m.     Attack. 

Improbitas,  improbitatiSjy.  Vfick- 
cdness. 

In,  prep,  with  ace.  and  all.  Into, 
in,  within. 

Inccrttts,  a,  urn.      Uncertain. 

IndicO,  indicere,  indixi,  indictum. 
To  declare. 

Infesto,  are,  avi,  atiim.     To  infest. 

Ingens,  ingentis.    Huge,  large,  great. 


Innoccns,  innoccntls.     Innocent. 
Insania,  ac,  f.     Insanity. 
Insiila,  ae,  f.     Island. 
Inter,    prep,    with    ace.       Between, 

among,  in  the  midst  of. 
Intro,  are,  avi,  atiim.     To  enter. 
Inventor,  inventoris,  m.     Inventor. 
Invito,  are,  avi,  atum.     To  invite. 
Ipse,  ipsa,  ipsiim.     Self,  he,  himself. 

See  ISO. 

Is,  ca,  id.      That,  he,  she,  it. 
Iste,  ista,  istud.   That,  such.  Sec  10G. 
Italia,  ac,  /.     Italy. 

J. 

JaciO,  jacere,  jeci,  jactiini.  To  cast, 
throw,  hurl. 

Jam,  adv.     Noio,  already. 

Jucundus,  a,  tim.  Delightful,  pleas- 
ant. 

Judex,  judicis,  m.  and  f.    Judge. 

Jungo,  jungere,  junxi,  junctiim.  To 
join. 

Justitia,  ac,  f.     Justice. 

Justus,  it,  um.      Upright,  just. 

JuvSnis,  juvenis,  m.  and  f.  A  youth, 
young  man. 

Juventus,  juventutis,  /.  Youth,  a 
youth,  a  young  person. 

L. 

Labor,  laboris,  m.     Labor. 

LaborS,  arS,  avi,  atttm.     To   strive 

for,  labor,  worlc. 

LacSdaemonitts,  ii,  m.  Spartan,  a 
"  Spartan,  inhabitant  of  Sparta  in 

Greece. 

Laetltia,  ae,  f.     Joy. 
Lapis,  lapidis,  m.     Stone. 
Latme,  adv.     In  Latin. 
Latimls,    I,    m.     Latinus,   a    Latin 

king. 
Latus,  a,  tim.     Broad. 


152 


IXTEODUCTOEY   LATIN   BOOK. 


Lauda,biiio,  c.  Pfcusstcorthy,  lauda- 
ble, 

LaudO,  tire,  avi,  iltiim.     To  praise. 

Laus,  laudls,^     Praise. 

Lavmiti,  ac,  f.  Lavinia,  a  proper 
name. 

Legatio,  Icgati6nls,y*.     Embassy. 

Legatus,  I,  m.     Ambassador. 

LCgio,  legionis,  y*.  Legion,  a  body 
of  soldiers. 

L'jgo,  legere,  iGgl,  Icctur.i.  jfo 
choose,  appoint. 

Leo,  leonis,  m.     Lion. 

Letalis,  c.     Mortal,  deadly. 

Lex,  legls,yi     £au?. 

Liber,  libri,  m.     Boole.        <& 

LiberS,  are,  avi,  atiim.      To  liberate. 

Libertas,  Hbertatis,  f.     Libert j. 

Longiis,  a,  um.     Long. 

Luciis,  i,  m.      Grove. 

Luna,  ae,  f.     Moon. 

Luscmia,  ac,  f.     Nightingale. 

Lux,  lucis,  f.     Light. 

Luxiiria,  ae,  f.     Luxury. 

Lycurgtts,  I,  m.  Lycurrjus,  a  Spartan 
lawgiver. 

Ly sander,  Lysandii,  m.'  Ly sunder, 
a  Spartan  general. 


Macedonia,  ae,jf.  Macedonia,  Mace- 
don,  a  country  of  Northern  Greece. 

Magister,  magistri,  m.  Master, 
teacher. 

Magnop2re,  adv.     Greatly. 

Magnus,  a,  um.     Great,  large. 

Maltim,  I,  n.     Evil. 

MarceMs,  I,  m.  Marcettus,  a  cele- 
brated Roman  general. 

MarS,  maris,  n.     Sea. 

Mater,  matris,  f.     Mother. 

Maturtis,  a,  um.     Ripe. 

MSmoria,  ac,  f.     Memory. 


Mensa,  ac,  /.     Table. 

Mensis,  mensis,  m.     Month. 

Merces,  mercedis,  /.     Reward. 

Mereo,  mSrere,  mcrui,  meritum. 
To  deserve,  merit. 

Metis,  a,  inn.     My.     Sec  185. 

Miles,  militis,  m.     Soldier. 

Miltiades,  is,  m.  Miltiades,  an  Athe- 
nian general. 

Modestia,  ac,  f.     Modesty. 

MoncO,  monere,  monui,  momtum. 
To  advise. 

Mons,  mentis,  m.     Mountain. 

Monstro,  are,  uvl,  atiim.  To  shoic, 
point  out. 

Mora,  ac,  /.     Delay. 

Mors,  mortis,  f.     Death. 

Multitiido,  multitudinis,  /.  Multi- 
tude. 

Multus,  li,  urn.     Much,  many. 

Mundus,  I,  m.      World,  universe. 

Munio,  ire,  ivi,  ittim.  To  fortify, 
defend. 

Muniis,  muneris,  n.     Gift,  present. 

Murus,  i,  m.     Wall. 

Mutatio,  miitationis,  f.  Change, 
phase. 

N. 
Natfilis,  c.     Belonging  to  one's  birth, 

natal. 

Natalis  dies.     Birth-day. 
Natura,  ae,  f.     Nature. 
Navalis,  C .     Naval. 
Navigo,  are,  avi,  atttm.     To  sail  to. 
Navis,  navis,  /     Ship. 
Necessarius,  a,  um.     Necessary. 
Necessitas,  neccssitatis,y.   Necessity. 
NCpos,  nepotis,  m.     Grandson. 
Nobilis,  e.     Nobk. 
NomSn,  no  minis,  n.     Name. 
NominB,  are,  avi,  atiim.     To  call, 

name. 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


Nun,  ado.     Not. 

NonnS,  interrog.  part.     Expects  the 

answer,  Yes.     See  346,  II.,  2. 
Noster,  nqstra,  nostrum.     Our,  our 

own,  ours. 

Novitas,  novitatis,  f.     Novelty. 
Novus,  a,  um.     New. 
Nox,  noctis,  f.     Night. 
Niibes,  nubis,  /.     Cloud. 
Num,  interrog.  part.     Expects  the 

answer,  No.     See  346,  II.,  1. 
Niima,  ae,  m.  Numa,  a  Roman  king. 
Numeriis,  I,  m.     Number,  quantity. 
Nummiis,  I,  m.    Money,  a  piece  of 

money,  a  coin. 
Nuntio,  arg,  avi,  atiim.    To  proclaim, 

announce. 

0. 

ObsSs,  obsidis,  m.  and  f.    Hostage. 

Occasus,  us,  m.    Setting,  going  down. 

Occtipd,  ar£,  avi,  atiim.  To  occupy, 
take  possession  of. 

Octavus,  a,  um.     Eighth . 

Octo.     Eight.     See  175,  2. 

Octoginta.     Eighty.     See  175,  2. 

Oculus,  I,  m.     Eye. 

Odiosus,  a,  um.     Odious,  hateful. 

Omnis,  e.     All,  every,  whole. 

Oppidum,  i,  n.     Town,  city. 

Oppugno,  ar£,  avi,  atum.  To  be- 
siege, take  by  storm. 

Opt5,  are,  avi,  atum.  To  wish  for, 
desire. 

Optilentus,  a,  um.     Rich,  opulent. 

Opus,  opSris,  n.     Work. 

Orati5,  orationis,^    Oration,  speech. 

Orator,  oratoris,  m.     Orator. 

Orbis,  orbis,  m.     Circle. 

Orbis  terrariim.     The  world. 

Orno,  ard,  avi,  atum.  To  adorn,  be 
an  ornament  to. 

Ovls,  ovis,^.     Sheep. 


P. 

Parens,  parcntis,  m.  and/.    Parent. 
Parco,  parere,  purul,  paritum.     To 

obey. 

Pars,  partis,  f.     Part,  portion. 
Parvus,  a,  um.     Small. 
Passer,  passeiis,  m.     Sparrow. 
Pastor,  pastoris,  m.     Shepherd. 
PatSr,  patiis,  m.    Father. 
Patria,  ac,  f.     Native  country,  coun- 
try. 
Pauliis,   I,    m.     Paulus,   a    Roman 

consul. 

Pax,  pacis,/     Peace. 
Pecunia,  ae,/    Money. 
Peltfs,  pellis,/.     Skin,  hide. 
Per,  prep,  with  ace.     Of,  through. 
Peragrd,  arC,  avi,  atum.     To  wan- 

der  through. 

Pgritus,  a,  um.     Skilled  in. 
Persa,  ae,  m.     A  Persian. 
Pes,  p£dis,  m.    Foot. 
Philippus,   i,    m.     Philip,    king  of 

Macedon. 

Philosophia,  ae,/.  Philosophy. 
Philosophus,  i,  m.  Philosopher. 
Pietas,  pietatis,/  Filial  affection, 

piety,  duty. 

Pirata,  ae,  m.     Pirate. 
Piscis,  piscis,  m.     Fish. 
Pisistratus,  i,  m.    Pisistratus,  tyrant 

of  Athens. 
PlaceO,   placere,    placui,    placitum. 

To  please. 

Pleniis,  a,  lim.     Full. 
Poenus,  fi,  um.     Carthaginian. 
Poenus,  i,  m.     A  Carthaginian. 
Pomum,  i,  n.     Fruit. 
Pompilitis,    ii,   m.       Pompilius,     a 

Roman  name. 
Pompeiiis,  ii,  m.     Pompey,  a   cole- 

brated  Roman  general. 
Pondus,  ponderis,  n.     Weight,  mass. 


154 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN"   BOOK. 


Portus,  us,  77i.     Port,  harbor. 

Post,  prep,  with  ace.     After. 

Potens,  potentis.     Powerful,  able. 

Praebeo,  praebere,  praebui,  praebi- 
tum.  To  show,  furnish,  give. 

Praeceptor,  praeceptoris,  m.  Teacher, 
instructor. 

Praeceptum,  i,  n.     Rule,  precept. 

Praeclarus,  a,  urn.  Renowned,  dis- 
tinguished. 

Praedico  pracdicere,  praedixi,  prae- 
dictiim.  To  predict,  foretell. 

Praemium,  ii,  n.     Reward. 

Pratum,  i,  n.     Meadow. 

Pretiosus,  a,  urn.     Valuable. 

Primus,  a,  um.     First. 

Principium,  ii,  n.     Beginning. 

Pro,  prep,  with  all.  In  behaJf  of, 
for. 

Proelium,  ii,  n.     Battle. 

ProspCre,  adv.     Successfully. 

ProvocO,  arS,  avi,  atiim.  To  chal- 
lenge. 

Prudential,  ae,  f.     Prudence. 

Publius,  ii,  JR.  Publius,  a  Roman 
name. 

Puella,  ae,  /.     Girl. 

Puer,  pueii,  m.     Boy. 

PugnJt,  ae,  f.     Battle. 

PugnO,  are,  avi,  atiim.     To  fight. 

Pulchgr,  pulchra,  pulchrum.  Beauti- 
ful. 

Puniciis,  a,  tim.  Carthaginian, 
Punic. 

Pyrrhus,  i,  m.  Pi/rrhus,  a  king  of 
Epirus. 

Q. 

Quanij  conj.     Than. 
Quartiis,  a,  um.     Fourth. 
Quattuor.     Four.     See  175,  2. 
Qui,  quae,  quod,  rel.  pronoun.   Who, 
which,  what.     See  187. 


Quinquaginta.     Fifty.     See  175,  2 
Quinque.     Five.     See  175,  2. 
Quintus,  a,  tim.    Fifth. 
Quis,  quac,  quid  ?  interrog.  pronoun. 

Who,  which,  what?   See  188. 
Quivis,  quaevis,  quodvis,  or  quidvis, 

indef.  pronoun.    Whoever,  whatever. 

See  191. 

Quotidianus,  a,  um.     Daily. 
Quotidie,  adv.     Daily. 

R. 

Ramus,  i,  m.     Branch. 

Riitio,  ratio nls,f.     Reason. 

Recte,  adv.     Rightly. 

Rectum,  i,  n.     Right,  rectitude. 

Rgduco,  rSducgrS,  reduxi,  rSductum. 
To  lead  back. 

Regin£,  ae,  f.     Queen. 

RSgio,  regionis,  f.  Region,  terri- 
tory. 

Regulus,  I,  m.  Regulus,  a  Roman 
general. 

Regno,  are,  avi,  atiim.     To  reign. 

Regniim,  I,  n.  Kingdom,  royal  author- 
ity. 

Rego,  regere,  rexi,  rectum.  To 
rule. 

Renovo,  arS,  avi,  atum.     To  renew. 

Res,  rei,y     Thing,  affair. 

Res  publica.  Republic. 

Revocd,  ar5,  avi,  atiim.     To  recall. 

Rex,  regls,  m.    King. 

Rheniis,  i,  m.     Rhine. 

RomS,,  ae,/;     Rome. 

Romantts,  a,  iim.     Roman. 

Romanus,  I,  m.     Roman,  a  Roman. 

Romulus,  i,  m.  Romulus,  the  found- 
er of  Rome. 


Saguntum,  1^71.     Saguntum,  a  town 
in  Spain. 


L ATIX-KXG LISH    VOCABULARY. 


155 


Salus,  salutis,/     Safety. 

Salutaris,  e.  Benejicial,  salutary, 
advantageous. 

Saluto,  are,  avi,  atum.     To  salute. 

Sanctus,  a,  urn.     Holy,  sacred* 

Sapiens,  sapientis.     Wise. 

Sapienter,  adv.     Wisely. 

Sapientia,  ac,  f.     Wisdom. 

Schola,  ae,  f.     School. 

Scientia,  ae,  f.     Knowledge. 

Scipio,  Scipionis,  m.  Scipio,  a  dis- 
tinguished Roman. 

Sciibo,  scrlbere,  scrips!,  scriptthn. 
To  write. 

Scythae,  arum,  m.  plur.  The  Scythi- 
ans. 

Secundus,  a,  um.  Second,  favor- 
able. 

SempCr,  adv.     Always,  ever. 

Senator,  senatoris,  m.     Senator. 

SSnatiis,  us,  m.     Senate. 

Senectus,  sSnectutis,  f.     Old  age. 

Sensiis,  us,  m*  Feeling,  perception, 
sense. 

Sententia,  ae,  f.     Opinion. 

SermO,  sermonis,  m.  Discourse,  con- 
versation. 

ServiS,  ire,  ivi,  itum.     To  serve. 

Serviiis,  ii,  m.  Servius,  a  Roman 
proper  name. 

Servo,  are,  avl,  utum.  To  preserve, 
keep,  save. 

Servus,  I,  m.     Slave. 

Sex.     Six.     See  175,  2. 

Sicilia,  ae,/.     Sicily. 

Silentium,  ii,  n.     Silence. 

Similis,  S.     Like. 

Singularis,  e.     Remarkable,  singular. 

Socer,  socfiii,  m.     Father-in-law. 

Socius,  ii,  m.     Ally,  associate. 

Socrates,  is,  m.  Socrates,  the  cele- 
brated Athenian  philosopher. 

Sol,  solis,  m.     Sun. 


Solon,  Solonis,  m.  Solon,  an  Athe- 
nian legislator.  • 

Soltim,  i,  n.     Soil. 

Sparta,  ae,  /.  Sparta,  capital  of 
Laconia. 

SpScies,  specie!,  f.     Appearance. 

Spero,  are,  avi,  atum.     To  hope. 

Spes,  spei,/.    Hope. 

Spolio,  are,  avi,  atiim.  To  rob, 
spoil,  despoil. 

Stimulo,  are,  avi,  atum.  To  stimu- 
late. 

Stultitia,  ae,/.     Folly. 

Sul,  sibi.  Himself,  herself,  itself. 
See  184. 

Sum,  essg,  fin.     To  be.     See  204. 

Siipero,  are,  avi,  atiim.    To  conquer. 

Supplicium,  ii,  n.     Punishment. 

Sutts,  a,  um.  His,  her,  its,  their, 
his  own,  her  own,  its  own,  their 
own. 

Syracusae,  arum,/  ptur.  Syracuse, 
a  city  of  Sicily. 

T. 

TaceO,  tacere,  tacui,  tacitiim.  To 
be  silent. 

Tarentum,  I,  n.  Tarentitm,  an  Ital- 
ian town. 

Tarquinius,  ii,  m.  Tarquin,  a  Ro- 
man king. 

Teltim,  i,  n.     Javelin,  weapon. 

TemSritas,  temeritatis,  /  Rashness, 

Templiim,  I,  n.     Temple. 

Tempus,  temporis,  n.     Time. 

Terra,  ae,  /.    Land,  earth. 

TerreO,  terrerS,  terrui,  teiTitum.  To 
frighten,  terrify. 

Tertiiis,  a,  um.     Third. 

Thales,  is,  m.  Tholes,  a  Grecian 
philosopher. 

Thebantis,  a,  um.  Theban,  belonging 
to  Thebes  (a  city  in  Greece). 


156 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 


Thebantis,  I,  m.     A  Theban. 

ThemistOcles,  is,  m.  T/iemistodes,  a 
celebrated  Athenian. 

Thrasybultis,  i,  m.  Thrasybulus,  the 
liberator  of  Athens. 

Ticintis,  I,  m.  Ticinus,  a  river  of 
Cisalpine  Gaul. 

Tres,  tria.     Three.     Sec  176. 

Triginta.     Thirty.     See  175,  2. 

Triumpho,  are,  avi,  atiim.  To  tri- 
umph. 

Troja,  ae,  f.  Troy,  ancient  city  in 
Asia  Minor. 

Tu,  tin.     Thou,  you.     See  184. 

Tullia,  ae,  f.  Tullia,  a  Roman 
proper  name. 

Tullus,  I,  m.    Tullus,  a  Roman  king. 

Turn,  adv.     Then,  at  that  time. 

Turris,  turris,  /.     Tower. 

Tutis,  a,  tim.   Your,  yours,  thy,  thine. 

Tyrannus,  i,  in.     Tyrant. 

Tyritis,  a,  tim.     Tyrian. 

U. 

Ulysses,  is,  in.     Ulysses,  a  Grecian 

king. 
Universes,  a,   tim.     All,  the  whole, 

entire. 

Untis,  a,  tim.     One.     See  176. 
Urbs,  urbis,  /.     City. 
Ustis,  us,  m.     Use. 
Utilis,  e.     Useful. 

V. 

Valetudo,  valetudinis,  /.     Health. 
Varic'tas,  variStatis,  f.      Variety. 
Varitis,  a,  tim.     Various. 
VarrO,  varronis,  m.  Varro,  a  Roman 

consul. 

Yer,  veris,  n.     Spring. 
Verbum,  I,  w.     Word. 


Verecundia,  ae,  f.     Modesty. 

Yeritas,  veritatis,  /.      Trutht  verity. 

Yertis,  a,  tim.     True,  real. 

Yerum,  i,  n.     Truth. 

Yester,  vestra,  vestrum.     Your. 

YestiO,  ire,  M,  ittim.     To  clothe. 

Yia,  ae,/.      Way,  road. 

Yictor,  victoris,  m.  Victor,  con- 
queror. 

Victoria,  ae,/.     Victory. 

Victoria,  ae,/.  Victoria,  Queen  of 
England. 

VigilS,  are,  avi,  atum.  To  watcn, 
be  awake. 

Vills,  C.     Cheap. 

Vindex,  vindicis,  in.  and/.  Vindi- 
cator, avenger. 

Viol5,  arS,  avi,  atiim.     To  violate. 

Vir,  viri,  ?7i.     Man,  hero,  soldier. 

VirgO,  virginis,/.     Maiden,  girl. 

Virtus,  virtutis,/      Valor,  virtue. 

Vita,  ae,/.     Life. 

Vititim,  ii,  n.     Fault,  vice. 

Vittiper5,  are,  avi,  attim.  To  find 
fault  ivith,  censure,  blame. 

Vivo,  vivere,  vixi,  victtim.  To  lii-e, 
Beside. 

Y6c5,  are,  avi,  atum.     To  call. 

Vol5,  are,  avi,  atum.     Toflij. 

Voluntarius,  a,  um.      Voluntary. 

Yoluptas,  voluptatis,/.     Pleasure. 

Vox,  vocis,/.     Voice. 

VulnSrO,  arg,  avi,  attim.     To  wound. 

Yulntis,  vulneris,  n.     Wound. 

Vulttir,  vulturis,  m.     Vulture. 

Yulttis,  us,  ??i.      Countenance. 

X. 

Xerxes,  is,  m.  Xerxes,  a  Persian 
king;. 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


A. 

A,  an.  Not  to  be  translated,  as  the 
Latin  has  no  article.  See  p.  12, 
note  1. 

Acceptable.     Grdtus,  a,  urn. 

Admonish.  Admdneo,  admonere,  ad- 
mSnul,jadmonltum. 

Adorned.     Orndtus,  a,  urn. 

Advise.  Moneo,  mtfnere',  mffnui,  monl- 
tum. 

After.    Post,  prep,  with  ace. 

Against.  Contra,  prep,  with  ace. 
Sometimes  denoted  by  the  Dative. 

Alexander.  Alexander,  Alexandn,  m. 

All.     Omnls,  <T. 

Always.     Semper,  adv. 

Announce.     Nuntio,  are,  din,  at  am. 

Appoint.     Cred,  are,  art,  dtum. 

Army.     Exercltus,  us,  m. 

Arrival.    Adventus,  us,  m. 

At.  Denoted  by  the  Ablative  of  Place, 
or  of  Time.  See  421  and  426. 

Athenian.    Atheniensls,  P. 

Athenian,  an  Athenian.  Athenien- 
sis, is,  m.  and  f. 

Athens.     Athenae,  drum,  f.  plur. 

Attack.     Impetus,  us,  m. 

Await.     Exspecto,  are,  del,  alum. 

B. 

Battle.     Proelium,  il,  n. 
Battle-array.     Ades,  el,  f. 
Be.     Sum,  ess?,  fui. 


Be  silent.      Tdceo,  tacerff,  idem,  ta& 

turn. 
Beautiful.      PulcMr,    pulchra,  pul 

chrum. 

Before.    Ante',  prep,  with  ace. 
Bird.    Avis,  avis,  f. 
Birth-day.     Ndtdlls  dies,  m. 
Blame.     Vltup&ro,  are,  dvl,  dtum. 
Book.    Liber,  fibri,  m. 
Boy.     Puer,puerl,  in. 
Brave.     Forils,  e. 
Bravely.     Fortltgr,  adv. 
Bravery.     Virtus,  virtutls,  f. 
Bring  to  a  close.      Flnio,  ir£,   ivi^ 

Hum. 

Brother.     Frdter,frdtrls,  m. 
Brutus.     Brutus,  I,  m. 
By.     A,  ab,  prep,  with  abl.     Often 

denoted  by  the  Ablative  alone. 

See  414. 


Cains.     Cdius,  il,  m. 

Call.      Vtico,  are',  dvl,  alum. 

Camillus.     CamiRus,  I,  m. 

Can,    can    have.       See    incy,   ??ioy 

have. 

Carthage.      CartlidyD,  CarthdgZnis.  f. 
Carthaginian.     Carthdglniensls.  &. 
Carthaginian,  a  Carthaginian.   Car- 

tlidglniensls,  Is,  m.  and  f. 
Cato.     CatS,  Catonls,  m. 
Cicero.     Cicero,  Cic&rd)>t*,  m 
157 


158 


INTRODUCTORY    LATIN   BOOK. 


Citizen.     Clcis,  clvls,  m.  and  f. 
City.     Urbs,  urbis,  f. 
Cloud.     Nubes,  nulls,  f. 
Commander.       Impgrdtor,     imperd- 

tons,  m. 

Concerning.    De,  prep,  with  abl. 
Consul.     Consul,  consults,  m. 
Contrary   to.      Contra,   prep,   with 

ace. 

Conversation.     Sermo,  sermoitis,  m. 
Corinth.     Cdrinthus,  I,  f. 
Corinthian.     Ctfrinthius,  a,  urn. 
Corinthian,  a  Corinthian.    Corintld- 

us,  it,  m. 

Cornelius.     Cornelius,  il,  m. 
Could,  could  have.    See  might,  might 

have. 

Country.     Patria,  ae,  f. 
Courage.     Virtus,  virtutts,  f. 
Crown.     Corona,  ae,  f. 

D. 

Daily.     Quotldidnus,  a,  um. 

Daughter.     Filia,  ae,  f. 

Day.    Dies,  diel,  m.    See  11 9,  note. 

Dear.     Cdrus,  a,  um. 

Declare.      Indlcd,   indlcere,   indixl, 

indicium. 

Delight.     Delecto,  dre~,  am.,  alum. 
Desirous  of.      Cupidus,  a,  um ;  uui- 

dus,  a,  um. 
Did.     Often  the  sign  of  the  Imperfect, 

or  of  the  Perfect  tense,  especially  in 

questions. 

Diligence.     Diltgentia,  ae,  f. 
Diligent.     DlUgens,  diligentis. 
Do.     Often  the  sign  of  the  Present 

tense,  especially  in  questions. 

E. 

Eight.     Octo.     See  175,  2. 
Eighth.     Octavus,  a,  um. 
Enemy      Hostts,  fiostts,  m.  and  f. 


Exercise.    Exerceo,  exerccre',  excrcult 

exercUum. 

Exile.     Exsul,  exsulis,  m.  and  f. 
Expect.     Exspecio,  are,  del,  alum- 

F. 

Father.     Pater,  patns,  m. 

Father-in-law.     Stic&r,  soceri,  m. 

Fertile.    Fertilis,  e. 

Fidelity.     Fides,  fidtl,  f. 

Field.     Ag&r,  dgri,  m. 

Fifth.     Quintus,  a,  um. 

Fifty.     Quinqudgintd.     See  175,  2. 

Fight.     Pitgno,  are,  dvl,  dtum. 

Finish.     Flnio,  Ire,  wi,  Hum. 

Five.     Qainquc.     See  175,  2. 

Flee.    Fugio,  fugSre,  fucjl,  fufitum. 

Flower.    Flos,  floris,  m. 

Fly.      Volo,  are,  dvl,  dtum. 

Foot.     Pes,  pcdis,  m. 

Fond  of.     Amans,  amantls. 

For.  Pro,  prep,  with  abl.  In  tha 
sense  of  because  of,  it  is  denoted 
by  the  Ablative  alone  (414) ;  and 
in  the  sense  of  for  the  benefit  of, 
by  the  Dative  (384). 

Fortify.     Munio,  ire,  lul,  Itwn, 

Four.     Quattuor.     See  175,  2. 

Fourth.     Quartus,  a,  iim. 

Friend.     Amlcus,  I,  m. 

Friendship.     Amicitia,  ae,  f. 

From.     A,  ab,  prep,  with  abl. 

Fruit.     Fractus,  us,  m. 


Garden.     Ilortus,  I,  m. 
Gaul.     Callus,  I,  m. 
Gem.     Gemma,  ae,  f. 
General.     Dux,  duels,  m.  and  f. 
Gift.     Donum,  I,  n. 
Glory.      Gloria,  ae,  f. 
Gold.     Aurum,  I,  n. 
Golden.    "Jiureus,  a,  um. 


KXC,  LTSII-LATIN   VOCABULABT. 


159 


Good.     Bonus,  a,  um. 

Goodness.     Bonitds,  lonitdiis,  f. 

Govern.     R&jo,  regere,  rcxl,  rectum. 

Great.     Magnus,  a,  um. 

Greece.     Graecid,  ae,  f. 

Grove.     Lucus,  I,  m. 

Guard.     Cusiodio,  Ire,  id,  Hum. 

II. 

Had.  Often  the  sign  of  the  Pluper- 
fect tense. 

Hannibal.    Hannibal,  Hanntlalis,  in. 

Happy.     Bedtus,  a,  um. 

Have.  Ildbeo,  habere,  habul,  hdlltum. 
Sometimes  simply  the  sign  of  the 
Perfect  tense  ;  as,  we  have  loved. 

He,  she,  it.  7s,  cd,  id;  ille,  ilia, 
illud.  The  pronoun  is  often  im- 
plied in  the  ending  of  the  verb. 

He  himself.     Ips?,  ipsd,  ipsum. 

Hear.     Audio,  Ire,  ui,  Itum. 

High.     Altus,  alia,  ahum. 

Himself.  Sul  (184);  ipse,  ipsd, 
ipsum. 

His.     Suus,  a,  um. 

Hope  (verb).     Spero,drc,  ad,  alum. 

Hope  (noun).     Spes,  spel,  f. 

Hour.     Ilord,  ae,  f. 

Hundred.     Centum.     Sec  175,  2. 


I.  .  Efjo,  mei.     Sec  184. 

In.     In,  prep,  with  abl. 

In  behalf  of.     Pro,  prep,  with  abl. 

Instruct.     Erudio,  Ire,  wl,  Itum. 

Instructor.   PraecepWr,  praeceptorls, 

m. 

Into.     In,  prep,  with  ace. 
Invite.     Invlto,  are,  del,  dtuin. 
Iron.     Ferrum,  I,  n. 
Island.     Insuld,  ae,  f. 
It.     Sec  he,  she,  it. 
Italy.     Iialitt,  ae,  f. 


J. 

Judge.     Judcx,  judicislm.  and  f. 
Justice.     Justitid,  ae,  f. 


Keep  one's  word.     Fldem   se.rvdre. 

Sec  p.  74,  note  4. 
Kindly.     B&nignc,  adv.      • 
King.     Rex,  regis,  m. 
Knowledge.     Scientia,  ae,  f. 

L. 

Large.     Magnus,  a,  um. 

Latinus.     Ldtlnus,  I,  m. 

Lavinia.     Ldvlnia,  ae,  f. 

Law.     Lex,  leyis,  f. 

Lead.     Duco,  ducerc,  duxi,  ductum. 

Lead  back.      Reducu,  reduce  re,  r?- 

duxl,  redact  um. 
Lead  forth.     Educo,  cducere,  edaxl, 

eductum. 
Let.    Render  by  the  Subjunctive.    See 

196,  L,  2. 

Leader.     Diix,_ducis,  m.  and  f. 
Letter.    Epistola,  ae,  f. 
Liberate.     Llbero,  are,  dti,  dium. 
Life.     Vita,  ae,  f. 
Like.     SimiltSj  e. 
Love.     Amo,  are,  del,  dtum. 

M. 

Macedonia.     Macedonia,  ae,  f. 

Man.  Homo,  hSmims,  m.  Vir,  viri, 
in.  The  latter  is  used  as  a  term 
of  respect ;  a  true  or  ivorthy  man, 
a  hero. 

Many.     Multl,  ae,  a,  plur. 

May,  can.  Signs  of  the  Present  Sub- 
junctive. 

May  have,  can  have.  Signs  of  the 
Perfect  Subjunctive. 

Me.     Sec  7. 

Memory.     Jlfemfiria,  ae,  f. 


160 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 


Might,  could,  would,  should.    Signs 

of  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 
Might    have,    could    have,    would 

have,  should  have.     Signs  of  the 

Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 
Mind.     Animus,  I,  m. 
Moat.     Fossa,  ae,  f. 
Money.  ~Pecunia,  ae,  f. 
Month.     Mcnsis,  mensis,  m. 
More.      Sign    of    the    Comparative 

degree.     See  160. 
Most.  Sign  of  the  Superlative  degree. 

See  160. 

Mound.     Agger,  aggcrts,  m. 
Mountain.    Mons,  montis,  m. 
Much.     Multtim,  adv. 
My.     Metis,  a,  um.     See  185. 

N. 

Name.     Nomen,  nummis,  n. 
Nightingale.     Luscinia,  ae,  f. 
Noble.     Ndbllis,  e. 
Not.      Non,    adv.       Interrogative, 

nonne. 

0. 
Obey.     Pdreo,  pdrere,  pdrul,  pdri- 

tum. 

Observe.  Servo,  are,  dvl,  dtum. 
Occupy.  Occupo,  dr&,  dvl,  dtum. 
Of.  Denoted  by  the  Genitive.  See 

393. 

Of  itself.     Per  se. 
On.     Often  denoted  by  the  Ablative  of 

Time.     See  426. 
One.     Unus,  a,  um.     See  176. 
Oration.     Or  at  id,  ordtionis,  f. 
Orator.     Ordttfr,  ordtons,  m. 
Our.     Noster,  tra,  trum. 

P. 

Parent.    P&rcns,  parentts,  m.  and  f. 
Philip.     P/ulippus,  I,  m. 
Pisistratus.     Pisistratus,  I,  m. 


Please.       Placeo,     placerc,     placul, 

placitum. 

Pleasing.      Grdtus,  a,  um. 
Pleasure.     Vtiluptds,  vtiluptdXs,  f. 
Plough.     Aro,  ardre,  ardvl,  ardtani. 
Plunder    (verb).     Spdlio,    arc,    dri, 

dtum. 
Practise.     ExcrccO,  excrcere,  excrctri, 

exercitum. 
Praise    (verb).      Laudo,    are,    art, 

dtum. 

Praise  (noun).     Laus,  laudts,  f. 
Precept.     Praeceptum,  I,  n. 
Predict.     Praedlco,  pracdlcere,  prae- 

dixl,  praedictum. 
Present  (noun).     Donum,  I.  n. 
Publius.     Publius,  it,  m. 
Punish.     Punio,  ire,  Ivl,  Itum. 
Pupil.    Discipulus,  I,  m. 
Put  to  flight.     Fugo,  are,  dvl,  dtum. 

Q. 

Queen.     Reglna,  ae,  f. 

R. 

Receive.      Accipid,  accip&re,  accept, 

acceptum. 
Reign,   royal   authority.      Regnum, 

I,  n. 

Renowned.     Cldms,  a,  um. 
Reside.     IJabito,  dr&,  dvl,  dtum. 
Rhine.     Rhenus,  I,  m. 
River.     Amnis,  amnis,  m. 
Roman.     Rdmdnus,*a,  um. 
Roman,  a  Roman.     Rdmdnus,  I,  in. 
Rome.     Roma,  ae,  f. 
Romulus.     Romulus,  I,  m. 
Rule.     Regd,  regcrtf,  rcxl,  rectum. 


Safety.     Salus,  salults,  f. 
'  Same..  Idem,  cade"m,  idem.    Sec  186. 
1  S;iv.     DTcoTdlcc'rc,  dixl,  dictum. 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


161 


Save.     Servo,  are,  del,  dtum. 
Scipio.     Sdpio,  Sclpionis,  ni. 
Senator.     Sendtffr,  senators,  in. 
Serve.     Servio,  Ire,  ii'l,  Itum. 
Scrvius.     Servius,  il,  m. 
Setting.     Occdsiis,  us,  m. 
8 hall,    will.     Signs    of  the  Future 

tense. 
Shall  have,  will  have.     Signs  of  the 

Future  Perfect  tense. 
Shepherd.     Pasttfr,  pastorls,  in. 
Should,  should   have.     Sec   might, 

might  have. 

Show.     Monstro,  are,  del,  dtum. 
Sicily.     Sicilid,  ae,  f. 
Silent.     See  be  silent. 
Silver.     Argentum,  I,  n. 
Sing.     Canto,  are,  del,  alum. 
Singing,  a  song.     Cantus,  m,  m. 
Six.     Sex.     See  175,  2. 
Slave.     Seruus,  I,  m. 
Sleep.     Dor  mid,  ire,  wl,  Hum. 
Soldier.     Miles,  mllitis,  m. 
Somebody,     somo    one.       Aliqnis, 

ahqua,   aiqnid,   or  ahqudd.      Sec 

191. 

Son.     Fllius,  it,  m. 
Son-in-law.     Geuer,  generl,  in. 
Song.     Carmen,  carminls,  n. 
Speak.     Dlco,  dlcere,  dixl,  dictum. 
State.     Clultds,  clcltdtis,  f. 
Strengthen.     Firmo,  arc,  del,  dfiim. 
Sun.     Sol,  soils,  m. 
Sunset.     Occdsus  softs. 
Sword.      Gladius,  il,  m. 


Take.      Capio,  capere,  ccpl,  captain. 
Take  by  storm.     Expuyno,  are,  del, 

dtum. 

Tarquin.     Tarqiuniiis,  it,  m. 
Tell.     Died,  dice  re',  dixl,  dictum. 
Temple.     Templum,  I,  n. 


Ten.     Decem.     Sec  1/5,  2. 
Terrify.      TerreO,  terrere,  terrul,  fcrri- 

turn. 
Than.     Qi.iam.     Often   omitted,   in 

which  case  the  Ablative  follows. 

See  417. 

That.     Ille,  ilia,  HIM.     See  18G 
The.     Not  to   be  translated  y  <(i   t.'.-". 

Latin   has  no  article.     See  p.  1  2, 

note  1. 

Their.     Situs,  a,  um. 
Then.     Turn,  adv. 
Thing.     Res,  rel,  f. 
This.     Etc,  haec,  hoc.     Sec  186. 
Three.     Tres,  trid.     Sec  176. 
Time.     Tempus,  temporis,  n. 
To.'    Ad,  in,  preps,  with  ace.     To 

is    sometimes    denoted    by    the 

Accusative,  and  sometimes  by  th? 

Dative.     Sec  370  and  384 
True.      Verus,  a,  um. 
Truth.      Vcrum,  I,  n. 
Tullia.     Tallin,  ae,  f. 
Two.     Duo,  duae,  duo.     See  176. 
Tyrant.     Tyrannus^  7,  in. 


Use.     Us  us,  us,  m. 
Useful.      Uttlis,  e. 

V. 

Valor.      Virtus,  virtutis,  f. 
Valuable.     Pretiosus,  a,  um. 
Very.      Sometimes    the  sign    of 

Superlative.     Sec  160. 
Victoria.      Victoria,  ac,  f. 
Victory.      Victoria,  ae,  f. 
Violate.      Violo,  are,  dvl,  dtum. 
Virtue.     Virtus,  virtutis,  f. 

IK. 

Walk.     Atnbulo,  arc",  dvl,  dtum. 
War.     Bell&n,  I,  n. 


162 


INTRODUCTORY   LATIN   BOOK. 


Way.  Via,  ac,  f. 
Well.  Bcne,  adv. 
Who,  which  (relative).  Qul,  quae, 

quod.     Sec  187. 
Who,  which,  what  (interrogative)  1 

Qius,  quae,  quid?  qul,  quae,  quSd? 

Sec  188. 

Wide.     Lotus,  a,  urn. 
Wife.     Conjux,  conjugis,  f. 
Will,  will  have.     Sec  shall,   shall 

have. 

Winter.  ,  Iliems,  hie  mis,  f. 
Wisdom.     Sapient  ia,  ac,  f. 
Wise.     Sapiens,  sapicntts. 
With.    Cum,  prep,  with  abl.    Often 

denoted  by  the  Ablative  alone. 

Sec  414. 


Word.  Verbum,  I,  n.  To  keep  one's 
word,  fidem  servdrc.  Sec  p.  74, 
note  4. 

Would,  would  have.  Sec  'might, 
might  have. 

Wound.      Vulnero,  are,  dvi,  alum. 

Write.  Scribo,  scrlbere,  scripsl,  scrip- 
turn. 

Y. 

Year.     Annus,  i,  m. 

You.     Tii,  till.     Sec  184. 

Your.     THUS,  a,  u:n ;   vcster,  vcstra, 

vcslrum. 
Yourself.     Tu,  tu  ips£. 


. 

UITI7BI15ITT 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 


Harkness's  Elements  of  Latin  Grammar. 

This  work  is  intended  especially  for  those  who  do  not  contemplate 
a  collegiate  course,  but  it  may  be  successfully  used  in  any  school  where, 
for  special  reasons,  a  small  grammar  is  deemed  desirable.  The  beginner 
needs  to  store  his  mind  at  the  outset  with  the  laws  of  the  language  in 
such  forms  of  statement  as  he  can  carry  with  him  throughout  his  whole 
course  of  study.  The  convenience  and  interest  of  the  student  in  this 
regard  have  been  carefully  consulted  in  the  preparation  of  this  manual. 
All  the  paradigms,  rules,  and  discussions,  have  been  introduced  in  the 
exact  language  of  the  author's  Grammar,  by  which  it  may  at  any  time 
be  supplemented.  While,  therefore,  in  many  schools  this  work  will  be 
found  a  sufficient  Latin  Grammar,  it  may  be  used  in  others,  either  as 
preparatory  to  the  larger  Grammar,  or  in  connection  with  it. 

No  separate  references  to  this  volume  will  ever  be  needed  in  editions 
of  Latin  authors,  as  the  numbering  of  the  articles  is  the  same  as  in  the 
larger  Grammar. 


From  Pros.  COBLEIGH,  Tennessee  Wesley- 
an  University. 

"  This  work  is  very  timety.  I  regard 
it  as  indispensabie  in  many  schools  in  the 
South." 

From  Prof.  W.  TT.  YOUNG,   Ohio   Uni- 
versity. 

"  I  most  heartily  commend  this  work. 
I  have  for  some  time  felt  its  need.  It 
seems  to  make  your  Latin  course  com- 
plete.1' 

From  Prof.  C.  G.  HUDSON,  Genesee  Wes- 
leyan  Seminary,  Lima,  N.  Y. 

"  I  can  heartily  recommend  it.  I  think 
that  it  is  superior  to  all  rivals." 

From  Prof.  IT.  D.  WALKER,  Orangemlle 
Academy,  Pa. 

41  In  my  opinion,  no  work  of  Professor 
llarkness  will  be  more  widely  used,  or 
more  valuable,  than  this.  It  supplies  a 
want  long  felt  by  teachers.  It  is  clear, 
thorough,  and  sufficiently  extended  for 
ordinary  students." 

From  Prof.  S.  II.  MANLEY,  Cornell  Col- 
lege, Iowa. 

"  I  think  it  one  of  the  finest  compendi- 
ums  of  Grammar  I  have  ever  seen.  It 
must  prove  of  great  service  as  a  prepara- 
tory drill-book." 


From  Prof.  L.  F.  PARKER,  Iowa  College. 
"  I  feel  under  personal  obligation  for 
this   new  incentive   and  aid  to  classical 
study." 

From  II.  F.  LANE,  High  Sc7wol,  Temple- 
ton,  Mass. 

"It  is  exactly  adapted  to  our  wants. 
We  use  all  of  Ilarkness's  books — Gram- 
mar, Eeader,  and  Composition.  We  con- 
sider them  emphatically  '  the  best.' " 

From  Prof.  J.  A.  KELLER,  Heidelberg 
College,  Ohio. 

"  I  was  surprised  to  find  so  full  an  out- 
line of  Latin  Grammar  comprised  within 
such  narrow  limits." 

From  Prof.  M.  B.  BROWN,  Notre  -  Dame 
University. 

"In  my  opinion,  it  is  just  the  book 
which  has  long  been  needed.  It  is  a  book 
to  be  learned  entire,  and  is  complete  as  far 
as  it  goes.  Prof.  Harkness  deserves  the 
thanks  both  of  students  and  teachers." 

From  "Rev.  B.  G.  NORTHROP,  Secretary 
of  Board  of  Education,  Conn. 

"  I  am  highly  pleased  with  Harkness's 
Elements  of  Latin  Grammar.  Its  brevity 
commends  it  for  beginners  and  for  all 
contemplating  a  partial  Latin  course  of 
study." 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 

HAEKNESS'S    LATIN    GEAMMAE. 

12mo,  355  pages. 

Although  this  work  has  been  published  but  a  short  time  comparatively,  it  is  recom- 
mended by  and  introduced  into  a  large  number  of  Colleges  and  Classical  Schools,  among 
which  are  the  following: 

BOWDOIN  COLLEGE,  Brunswick,  Me. 

BATES  COLLEGE,  Lewiston,  Maine. 

LEWISTON  FALLS  ACADEMY,  Auburn,  Me. 

DOVER  HIGH  SCHOOL,  Dover,  N.  H. 

DARTMOUTH  COLLEGE,  Hanover,  N.  II. 

NORWICH  UNIVERSITY,  Norwich,  Vt. 

GLENWOOD  LADIES1  SEMINARY,  Brattleboro,  Vt. 

AMHEEST  COLLEGE,  Amhcrst,  Mass. 

TUFTS  COLLEGE,  Medford,  Mass. 

PHILLIPS  ACADEMY,  Andover,  Mass. 

STATE  NORMAL  SCHOOL,  Framingham,  Mass. 

HIGHLAND  SCHOOL,  Worcester,  Mass. 

NEWTON  HIGH  SCHOOL,  Newton,  Mass. 

PUBLIC  HIGH  SCHOOL,  Springfield,  Mass. 

ROXBURY  LATIN  SCHOOL,  Roxbury,  Mass. 

LAWRENCE  ACADEMY,  Groton,  Mass. 

AUBURNDALE  FEMALE  SEMINARY,  Auburndale,  Mass. 

SPENCER  ACADEMY,  Spencer,  Mass. 

JAMAICA  PLAIN  HIGH  SCHOOL,  Jamaica  Plain,  Mass. 

BROWN  UNIVERSITY,  Providence,  R.  I. 

UNIVERSITY  GRAMMAR  SCHOOL,  Providence,  R.  I. 

PUBLIC  HIGH  SCHOOL,  Providence,  R.  I. 

FRIENDS1  BOARDING  SCHOOL,  Providence,  R.  I. 

WARREN  HIGH  SCHOOL,  Warren,  R.  I. 

PROVIDENCE  CONFERENCE  SEMINARY,  East  Greenwich,  R.  L 

WESLEYAN  UNIVERSITY,  Middletown,  Ct. 

FREE  ACADEMY,  Norwich,  Ct. 

NEW  LONDON  ACADEMY,  New  London,  Ct. 

YALE  COLLEGE,  New  Haven,  Ct. 

ROCHESTER  UNIVERSITY,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 

MADISON  UNIVERSITY,  Hamilton,  N.  Y. 

COLLEGE  OF  THE  CITY  OF  NEW  YORK. 

CORTLAND  ACADEMY,  Homer,  N.  Y. 

OSWEGO  HIGH  SCHOOL,  Oswego,  N.  Y. 

HAMILTON  COLLEGE,  Clinton,  N.  Y. 

HOBART  FREE  COLLEGE,  Geneva,  N.  Y. 

CANANDAIGUA  ACADEMY,  Canandaigua,  N.  Y. 

NEWTON  HIGH  SCHOOL,  Newton,  N.  J. 

HAVERFORD  COLLEGE,  West  Haverford,  Pa. 

CLASSICAL  AND  MILITARY  SCHOOL,  Columbia,  Pa- 

SHURTLEFF  COLLEGE,  Upper  Alton,  111. 

IOWA  STATE  UNIVERSITY,  Iowa  City,  Iowa. 

UNIVERSITY  OF  MICHIGAN,  Ann  Arbor,  Mich. 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 


Harkness's  Latin  Grammar. 

From  Eev.  Prof.  J.  J.  OWEN,  D.  D.,  New  York  Free  Academy. 
"  I  have  carefully  examined  Harkness's  Latin  Grammar,  and  am  so  well  pleased  witb 
its  plan,  arrangement,  and  execution,  that  I  shall  take  the  earliest  opportunity  of  intro- 
ducing it  as  a  text-book  in  the  Free  Academy." 

From  Mr.  JOHN  D.  PHILBRICK,  Superintendent  of  Public  Schools,  Boston,  Mass. 

"  This  work  is  evidently  no  hasty  performance,  nor  the  compilation  of  a  mere  book 
maker,  but  tho  well-ripened  fruit  of  mature  aud  accurate  scholarship.  It  is  eminently 
practical,  because  it  is  truly  philosophical." 

From  Mr.  G.  N.  BIGELOW,  Principal  of  State  Normal  School,  FramingJiam,  Mass. 
"  Uarkness's  Latin  Grammar  is  the  most  satisfactory  text-book  I  have  ever  used." 

From  Eev.  DANIEL  LEACH,  Superintendent  Public  Scliools,  Providence,  R.  I. 
"  I  am  quite  confident  that  it  is  superior  to  any  Latin  Grammar  before  the  public.    It 
has  recently  been  introduced  into  the  High  School,  and  all  are  much  pleased  with  it." 

From  Dr.  J.  B.  CHAPIN,  State  Conmissioner  of  Public  Instruction  in  Rhode  Island. 
"The  vital  principles  of  the  language  are  clearly  and  beautifully  exhibited.    The 
work  needs  no  one's  commendation.1' 

From  Mr.  ABNER  J.  PHIPPS,  Superintendent  of  Public  Schools,  Loicell,  Mass. 

"The  aim  of  the  author  seems  to  be  fully  realized  in  making  this  'a  tisefu-l  book,  and 
fti  such  I  can  cheerfully  commend  it.  The  clear  and  admirable  manner  in  which  the  in- 
tricacies of  the  Subjunctive  Mood  are  unfolded,  is  one  of  its  marked  features. 

"The  evidence  of  ripe  scholarship  and  of  familiarity  with  the  latest  works  of  GerrnaD 
and  English  philologists  is  manifest  throughout  the  book." 

From  Dr.  J.  T.  CHAMPLIN,  President  of  Waterville  College. 

.  "  I  like  both  the  plan  and  the  execution  of  the  work  very  much.  Its  matter  and 
manner  are  both  admirable.  I  shall  be  greatly  disappointed  if  it  does  not  at  once  win  the 
public  favor." 

From  Prof.  A.  S.  PACKARD,  Bowdoin  College,  Brunswick,  Maine. 
"  Harkness's  Latin  Grammar  exhibits  throughout  the  results  of  thorough  scholarship. 
I  shall  recommend  it  in  our  next  catalogue." 

From.  Prof.  J.  J.  ST ANTON,  Bates  College. 

"'  We  have  introduced  Harkness's  Grammar  into  this  Institution.  It  is  much  more 
logical  and  concise  than  any  of  its  rivals." 

From  Mr.  WM.  J.  EOLFE,  Principal  Cambridge  ITigJi  ScJwol. 
"Notwithstanding  all  the  inconveniences  that  must  attend  a  change  of  Latin  Gram- 
mars in  a  large  school  like  mine,  I  shall  endeavor  to  secure  the  adoption  of  Harkness's 
Grammar  in  place  of  our  present  text-book  as  soon  as  possible." 

From  Mr.  L.  E.  WILLISTON,  Principal  Ladies'1  Seminary,  Cambridge,  Mass. 
"  I  think  this  work  a  decided  advance  upon  the  Grammar  now  in  use." 

From  Mr.  D.  B,.  HAGER,  Princ.  Eliot  High  School,  Jamaica  Plain,  Mass. 
"  This  is,  in  my  opinion,  by  far  the  best  Latin  Grammar  ever  published.    It  is  ad- 
mirably adapted  to  the  use  of  learners,  being  remarkably  concise,  clear,  comprehensive; 
and  philosophical.    It  will  henceforth  be  used  as  a  text-book  in  this  school." 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 


Harkness's  Latin  Grammar. 

From  Prof.  C.  S.  HARRINGTON  and  Prof.  J.  C.  VAN  BENSCIIOTEN,  of  the  Wesleyan 
University. 

"  This  work  is  clear,  accurate,  and  happy  in  its  statement  of  principles,  is  simple  yet 
scholarly,  and  embraces  the  latest  researches  in  this  department  of  philological  science. 
It  will  appear  in  our  catalogue." 

From  Mr.  ELBRIDGE  SMITH,  Principal  Free  Academy,  Norwich,  Ct. 

"This  is  not  only  the  best  Latin  Grammar,  but  one  of  the  most  thoroughly  prepared 
school-books  that  1  have  ever  seen.  I  have  introduced  the  book  into  the  Free  Acade- 
my, and  am  much  pleased  with  the  results  of  a  month's  experience  in  the  class-room.1' 

From  Mr.  II.  A.  PRATT,  Principal  High  ScJiool,  Hartford,  Ct. 

"  I  can  heartily  recommend  Harkness's  new  work  to  both  teachers  and  scholars.  It 
is,  in  my  judgment,  the  best  Latin  Grammar  ever  offered  to  our  schools.11 

From  Mr.  I.  F.  CADY,  Principal  High  ScJiool,  Warren,  R.  7. 

':  The  longer  I  use  Harkness's  Grammar  the  more  fully  am  I  convinced  of  its  superior 
excellence.  Its  merits  must  secure  its  adoption  wherever  it  becomes  known." 

From  Messrs.  S.  TIIURBER  and  T.  B.  STOCKWELL,  Public  High  School,  Providence. 

"An  experience  of  sereral  weeks  with  Harkness's  Latin  Grammar  enables  us  to  say 
with  confidence,  that  it  is  an  improvement  on  our  former  text-book.11 

From  Mr.  C.  B.  GOFF,  Principal  Boys1  Classical  High  School,  Providence,  K.  I. 

"  The  practical  working  of  Harkness's  Grammar  is  gratifying  even  beyond  my  expec- 
tations.11 

From  Rev.  Prof.  M.  II.  BUCKHAM,  University  of  Vermont. 

"  Harkness's  Lathi  Grammar  seems  to  me  to  supply  the  desideratum.  It  is  philo- 
sophical in  its  method,  and  yet  simple  and  clear  in  its  statements ;  and  this,  in  my  judg- 
ment,  is  the  highest  encomium  which  can  be  bestowed  on  a  text-book." 

From  Mr.  E.  T.  QUIMBY,  Appleton  Academy,  New  IpswicJi,  N.  IT. 

"  I  think  the  book  much  superior  to  any  other  I  have  seen.  I  should  be  glad  to  in- 
troduce it  at  once.11 

From  Mr.  II.  ORCITTT,  Glenwood  Ladies'1  Seminary,  W.  Braitleboro' ,  Vt. 

"  I  am  pleased  with  Harkness's  Latin  Grammar,  and  have  already  introduced  it  into 
this  seminary.'1 

From  Mr.  CHARLES  JEWETT,  Principal  of  Franklin  Academy. 

"  I  deem  it  an  admirable  work,  and  think  it  will  supersede  all  others  now  in  use ;  in 
the  division  and  arrangement  of  topics,  and  in  its  mechanical  execution,  it  is  superior  to 
any  Latin  Grammar  extant/' 

From  Mr.  C.  C.  CHASE,  Principal  of  Lotcell  High  ScJiool. 

"  Prof.  Harkness's  Grammar  is,  in  my  opinion,  admirably  adapted  to  make  the  study 
•f  the  Latin  language  agreeable  and  interesting." 

From  Mr.  J.  KIMBALL,  IfigJi  School,  Dorchester,  Mass. 

"  It  meets  my  ideal  of  what  is  desirable  in  every  grammar,  to  wit :  compression  of 
general  principles  in  terse  definitions  and  ctatemonts,  for  ready  use ;  aoid  fulness  of  de- 
tail, well  arranged  for  reference." 


1).  APPLETON  tfc  CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 


Harkness's  Caesar. 

This  edition  of  Caesar's  Commentaries,  intended  to  follow  the  Latin 
Reader,  aims  to  introduce  the  student  to  an  appreciative  study  of  Latin 
authors.  The  text  is  the  result  of  a  careful  collation  of  the  several  edi- 
tions most  approved  by  European  scholars.  The  notes  are  intended  to 
guide  the  faithful  efforts  of  the  learner,  and  to  furnish  him  such  collateral 
information  as  will  enable  him  to  understand  the  stirring  events  recorded 
in  the  Commentaries,  and  such  special  aid  as  will  enable  him  to  surmount 
real  difficulties  of  construction  and  idiom.  They  will  thus,  it  is  hoped, 
render  an  acceptable  service  both  to  the  instructor  and  the  learner,  by 
lightening  the  burden  of  the  one,  and  by  promoting  the  progress  of  the 
other.  The  dictionary  has  been  prepared  with  special  reference  to  the 
wants  of  the  student. 

The  Life  of  Caesar,  the  Map  of  Gaul,  and  the  diagrams  and  illustra- 
tions which  accompany  the  notes,  will  greatly  add  to  the  value  of  the 
work. 

From  Pres.  AIKIN,  Union  College,  N.  Y. 

"  This  edition  of  the  Commentaries  is 
admirably  suited,  not  merely  to  give  the 
student  an  acquaintance  with  his  immedi- 
ate text-book,  but  also  to  develop  those 
habits  of  investigation,  that  thoughtfulness 
in  regard  to  the  scope  of  the  whole  subject, 
and  that  style  of  vigorous,  tasteful,  and 
idiomatic  rendering,  which  are  among  the 
rarest,  as  they  are  certainly  among  the 
most  important,  results  of  classical  study.1' 

From  S.  H.  TAYLOR,  LL.  D.,  Phillips 

Academy,  Andover,  Mass. 
"The  notes  are  prepared  with  a  judi- 
cious appreciation  of  the  wants  of  the  pupil. 
They  show  the  hand  of  the  finished  scholar, 
as  well  as  of  the  experienced  teacher." 

From  Prof.  TV.  A.  PACKARD,  Princeton. 

College,  N.  J. 

"  The  notes  are  models  of  what  the  be- 
ginner needs  to  interest  and  guide  him. 
The  text  is  furnished  with  the  best  illus- 
trations in  the  way  of  maps  and  plans.1' 

From  Prof.  W.  T.  JOHNSON,  Notre-Dame 

University*  Ind. 

"•This  is  certainly  an  excellent  text- 
book—superior to  any  other  edition  of  the 
Commentaries  now  in  use.1' 

From  Pres.  MCELDOWNEY,  Albion  Col- 
lege, Mich. 

"  This  is  the  most  valuable  edition  of 
Cfiosar  with  which  I  am  acquainted." 


From  Prof.  II.  TV.  HAYNES,  University  </ 

Vermont. 

"  Never  before  have  I  seen  snch  a  lucid 
and  simple  explanation  of  Caesar's  bridge 
across  the  Khine." 

From  Prof.  C.  S.  HARRINGTON,  Wesleyan 

Univevsity,  Conn. 

"The  student  who  uses  this  edition 
must  read  Caesar  with  a  lively  relish." 

From  Prof.  TV.  A.  STEVENS,  Denison  Uni- 
versity Ohio. 

"  The  notes  are  gotten  up  on  the  right 
principle,  and  are  greatly  superior  to  those 
of  similar  works  in  England." 

From  Prof.  J.  E.  GINTNER,  Otterbein  Uni- 
versity, Ohio. 

"  This  is  the  only  edition  of  Caesar  rec- 
ommended to  our  classes." 

From  A..  D.  SANDBORN,  Wilton  Seminar?/, 

Iowa. 

"  I  know  of  no  work  of  the  kind  rn 
which  the  notes  so  fully  meet  the  want? 
of  both  teacher  and  pupil.  I  am  delighted 
with  the  Me  of  Caesar." 

From  Prof.   S.  HASSELL,  State  Normal 

University,  Del. 

"  This  edition  of  Caesar  is  superior  to 
all  others  published  in  this  country.  The 
biographical  sketch  of  the  Eoman  com- 
mander is  a  splendid  production." 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO?  8  PUBLICATIONS. 


Arnold's  First  Latin  Book  ; 


Remodelled  and  Rewritten,  and  adapted  to  the  Ollendorff  Method  of 
Instruction.  By  ALBERT  HARKNESS,  A.  M.   12mo,  302  pages. 

Under  the  labors  of  the  present  author,  the  work  of  Arnold  has  undergone  radical 
changes.  It  has  been  adapted  to  the  Ollendorff  improved  method  of  instruction,  and  is 
superior  to  the  former  work  in  its  plan  and  all  the  details  of  instruction.  While  it  pro- 
ceeds hi  common  with  Arnold  on  the  principle  of  imitation  and  repetition,  it  pursues 
much  more  exactly  and  with  a  surer  step  the  progressive  method,  and  aims  to  make  the 
pupil  master  of  every  individual  subject  before  he  proceeds  to  a  new  one,  and  of  each 
subject  by  itself  before  it  is  combined  with  others ;  so  that  he  is  brought  gradually  and 
surely  to  understand  the  most  difficult  combinations  of  the  language.  An  important 
feature  of  this  book  is,  that  it  carries  along  the  Syntax  part  passu  with  the  Etymology, 
so  that  the  student  is  not  only  all  the  while  becoming  familiar  with  the  forms  of  the  lan- 
guage, but  is  also  learning  to  construct  sentences  and  to  understand  the  mutual  relations 
of  their  component  parts. 

Special  care  has  been  taken  in  the  exercises  to  present  such  idioms  and  expressions 
alone  as  are  authorized  by  the  best  classic  authors,  so  that  the  learner  may  acquire  by 
example  as  well  as  precept,  a  distinct  idea  of  pure  Latinity. 

It  has  been  a  leading  object  with  the  author  so  to  classify  and  arrange  the  various 
topics  as  to  simplify  the  subject,  and,  as  far  as  possible,  to  remove  the  disheartening  diffi- 
culties too  often  encountered  at  the  outset  in  the  study  of  an  ancient  language. 

From  W.  E.  TOLMAN,  Instructor  in,  Providence  ITigli  School. 
"  I  have  used  Arnold's  First  Latin  Book,  remodelled  and  rewritten  by  Mr.  Ilarkness, 
in  my  classes  during  the  past  year,  and  find  it  to  be  a  work  not  so  much  remodelled  and 
rewritten  as  one  entirely  new,  both  in  its  plan  and  in  its  adaptation  to  the  wants  of  the 
beginner  in  Latin." 

From  WM.  EUSSELL,  Editor  of  the  First  Series  of  the  Boston  Journal  of  Education. 
"The  form  which  this  work  has  taken  under  the  skillful  hand  of  Mr.  II.  is  marked 
throughout  by  a  method  purely  elementary,  perfectly  simple,  gradually  progressive,  and 
rigorously  exact.  Pupils  trained  on  such  a  manual  cannot  fail  of  becoming  distinguished, 
in  their  subsequent  progress,  for  precision  and  correctness  of  knowledge,  and  for  rapid 
advancement  in  genuine  scholarship." 

From  GEORGE  CAPRON,  Principal  of  Worcester  High  School. 
"  I  have  examined  the  work  with  care,  and  am  happy  to  say  that  I  find  it  superior 
to  any  similar  work  with  which  I  am  acquainted.    I  shall  recommend  it  to  my  next 

class.1' 

From  J.  E.  BOISE,  Professor  of  Ancient  Languages  in  Michigan  University. 

t;  I  have  examined  your  First  Book  in  Latin,  and  am  exceedingly  pleased  both  with 
tho  plan  and  execution.  I  shall  not  fail  to  use  my  influence  toward  introducing  it  into 
the  classical  schools  of  this  State." 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 

Second  Latin  Book. 

Comprising  an  Historical  Latin  Reader,  with  Notes  and  Rules  for 
Translating,  and  an  Exercise  Book,  developing  a  Complete  Ana- 
lytical Syntax,  in  a  series  of  Lessons  and  Exercises,  involving 
the  Construction,  Analysis,  and  Reconstruction  of  Latin  Sen- 
tences. By  ALBERT  HARKNESS,  A.M.,  Senior  Master  in  the 
Providence  High  School.  12mo,  362  pages. 

This  work  is  designed  as  a  sequel  to  the  author's  "  First  Latin  Book."  It  comprises 
a  complete  analytical  syntax,  exhibiting  the  essential  structure  of  the  Latin  language, 
from  its  simplest  to  its  most  expanded  and  elaborate  form. 

The  arrangement  of  the  lessons  is  decidedly  philosophical,  gradually  progressive, 
and  in  strict  accordance  with  the  law  of  development  of  the  human  mind.  Every  new 
principle  is  stated  in  simple,  clear,  and  accurate  language,  and  illustrated  by  examples 
carefully  selected  from  the  reading  lessons,  which  the  student  is  required  to  translate, 
analyze,  and  reconstruct.  He  is  also  exercised  in  forming  new  Latin  sentences  on  given 
models.  This,  while  it  gives  variety  and  interest  to  what  would  otherwise  be  in  the 
highest  degree  monotonous,  completely  fixes  in  the  mind  the  subject  of  the  lesson,  both 
by  analysis  and  synthesis. 

The  careful  study  of  this  volume,  on  the  plan  recommended  by  the  author,  will 
greatly  facilitate  the  pupil's  progress  in  the  higher  departments  of  the  language.  Such 
is  the  testimony  of  the  numerous  institutions  in  which  Harkness's  improved  edition* 
of  Arnold  has  been  introduced. 

From  J.  A.  SPENCER,  D.  D.,  late  Professor  of  Latin  in  Burlington  College,  N.  J. 

"The  present  volume 'appears  tome  to  carry  out  excellently  the  system  on  which 
the  late  lamented  Arnold  based  his  educational  works ;  and  in  the  Selections  for  Bead- 
ing,  the  Notes  and  Rules  for  Translating,  the  Exercises  in  Translating  into  Latin,  tho 
Analyses,  etc.,  I  think  it  admirably  adapted  to  advance  the  diligent  student,  not  only 
rapidly,  but  soundly,  in  an  acquaintance  with  the  Latin  language.111 

From  PROF.  GAMMELL,  of  Brown  University. 

"  The  book  seems  to  me,  as  I  anticipated  it  would  be,  a  valuable  addition  to  the  works 
now  in  use  among  teachers  of  Latin  in  the  schools  of  the  United  States,  and  for  many 
of  them  it  will  undoubtedly  form  an  advantageous  substitute." 

From  PROF.  LINCOLN,  of  Brown  University. 

"  It  seems  to  me  to  carry  on  most  successfully  the  method  pursued  in  the  First 
Book.  Though  brief,  it  is  very  comprehensive,  and  combines  judicious  and  skilfully- 
forined  exercises  with  systematic  instruction." 

From  J.  J.  OWEN,  D.  D.,  Professor  of  the  Latin  and  GreeJt  Languages  and  Litera- 
ture in  the  Free  Academy,  New  York. 

"This  Second  Latin  Book  gives  abundant  evidence  of  the  author's  learning  and 
tact  to  arrange,  simplify,  and  make  accessible  to  the  youthful  mind  the  great  and  funda- 
mental principles  df  the  Latin  language.  The  book  is  worthy  of  a  place  in  every 
classical  school,  and  I  trust  will  have  an  extensive  sale." 

From,  PROF.  ANDERSON,  of  Lewisburg  University,  Pennsylvania. 

"  A  faithful  use  of  the  work  would  diminish  the  drudgery  of  the  student's  earlier 
studies,  and  facilitate  his  progress  in  his  subsequent  course.  I  wish  the  work  a  wid* 


D.  APPL^TON  <i>  CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 

Arnold's  Latin  Course : 


I.  FIEST  AND  SECOND  LATIN  BOOK  AND  PRACTICAL  GRAMMAR.    Re- 

visedand  Carefully  Corrected,  by  J.  A.  SPENCEK,  D.  D.    12mo,  859  pa" es 
II.  PRACTICAL  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION,    Re- 
vised and  carefully  corrected  by  J.  A.  SPENCEK,  D.  D.    12mo,  356  pages. 
III.  CORNELIUS  NEPOS.    With  Questions  and  Answers,  and  an  Imitative&Exercise 
on  each  Chapter.    "With  Notes  by  E.  A.  JOHNSON,  Professor  of  Latin,  in  Uni- 
versity of  New  York.    New  edition,  enlarged,  with  a  Lexicon,  Historical  and 
Geographical  Index,  etc.    12mo,  350  pages. 


Arnold's  Classical  Series  has  attained  a  circulation  almost  unparalleled,  having  been 
introduced  into  nearly  all  the  leading  educational  institutions  in  the  United  States. 
The  secret  of  this  success  is,  that  the  author  has  hit  upon  the  true  system  of  teaching 
the  ancient  languages.  He  exhibits  them  ifct  as  dead,  but  as  living  tongues ;  and  by 
imitation  and  repetition,  the  means  which  Nature  herself  points  out  to  the  child  learn- 
ing his  mother-tongue,  he  familiarizes  the  student  with  the  idioms  employed  by  the 
elegant  writers  and  speakers  of  antiquity. 

The  First  and  Second  Latin  Book  should  be  put  into  the  hands  of  the  beginners,  who 
will  soon  acquire  from  its  pages  a  better  idea  of  the  language  than  could  be  gained  by 
months  of  study  according  to  the  old  system.  The  reason  of  this  is,  that  every  thing 
has  a  practical  bearing,  and  a  principle  is  no  sooner  learned  than  it  is  applied.  The  pupil 
is  at  once  set  to  work  on  exercises. 

The  Prose  Composition  ibrms  an  excellent  sequel  to  the  above  work,  or  may  te 
used  with  any  other  course.  It  teaches  the  art  of  writing  Latin  more  correctly  and 
thoroughly,  more  easily  and  pleasantly,  than  any  other  work.  In  its  pages  Latin  syno. 
nymes  are  carefully  illustrated,  differences  of  idioms  noted,  cautions  as  to  common  errors 
impressed  on  the  mind,  and  every  help  afforded  toward  attaining  a  pure  and  flowing 
Latin  style. 

From  N.  WHEELER,  Principal  of  Worcester  County  High  School. 

"  In  the  skill  with  which  he  sets  forth  the  idiomatic  peculiarities,  as  well  as  in  the 
directness  and  symplicity  with  which  he  states  the  facts  of  the  ancient  languages,  Mr. 
Arnold  has  no  superior.  I  know  of  no  books  so  admirably  adapted  to  awaken  an  inter- 
est in  the  study  of  the  language,  or  so  well  fitted  to  lay  the  foundation  of  a  correct  schol- 
arship and  refined  taste." 

From  A.  B.  RUSSELL,  Oakland  High  School. 

"  The  style  in  which  the  books  are  got  up  are  not  their  only  recommendation.  With 
thorough  instruction  on  the  part  of  the  teacher  using  these  books  as  text-books,  I  am 
confident  a  much  more  ample  return  for  the  time  and  labor  bestowed  by  our  youth  upon 
'  Latin  must  be  secured.  The  time  certainly  has  come  when  an  advance  must  be  made 
upon  the  old  methods  of  instruction.  I  am  glad  to  have  a  work  that  promises  so  many 
.i .1  vantages  as  Arnold's  First  and  Second  Latin  Book  to  beginners." 

From  C.  M.  BLAKE,  Classical  Teacher,  Philadelphia. 

"  I  am  much  pleased  with  Arnold's  Latin  Books.  A  class  of  my  older  boys  have  just 
finished  the  First  and  Second  Book.  They  had  studied  Latin  lor  a  long  time  before, 
but  never  understood  it,  they  say,  as  they  do  now." 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


OCT    111933 

to 

By 

lie 

FEB   4  w& 

•ok 
of 

iIES 

.one 

30N, 

.by 

yof 

38  by 

ABDS 

>ition 
KEN- 

,dley's 

12mo. 

0. 

TTLEB, 

180  pp. 

LrD  21-100m-7/33 

STANDARD  CLASSICAL  WORKS. 


Thucydides's  History  of  the  Peloponnesian  War,  according 
to  the  Text  of  L.  DINDOKF,  with  Notes  by  JOHN  J.  OWEN.  With 
Map.  12mo. 

Xtoiophon's  Memorabilia  of  Socrates.  With  Notes  and  Intro- 
\duction  by  R.  D.  C.  KOBB!NS,  Professor  of  Language  in  Middle- 
bury  Qollege.  12mo.  421  pages. 

Anabasis.    With  Explanatory  Notes  for  the  use  of 

Schools  and  Colleges.    By  JAMB»~R.  BOISE,  Profess^  -  of  Greek 
in  the  University  of  Michigan.    12mo.    393  page? 
Anabasis.    Chiefly  according  to  th' 


DORF,  with  Notes  by  John  J.  OWEN. 

Map.    12mp. 
— f — Cyropsedia,  according  to  th 

with  Notes  by  JOHN  J.  OWEN.    12mr 
Sophocles's  (Edipus   Tyrannus, 

Schools/  and    Colleges.     By   How.  / 

Greek  in  the  University  of  New  Yc/ 


HEBREW 

Gesenins's  Hebre-       ~a- 
rections  and 

J.  CONAN' 

nary, 


j.  Dm- 
With 


ise  of 
ior  of 


Cor- 
byT. 

«i  Semi- 


Ine  German. 
.cises  in  Syriac 
on  prepared  by 


D.  APPLETON  &  CO.,    549  &   551   BKOADWAY,  N. 


PUBLISH    UPWARD    OP 


3OO    SCHOOL    TEXT-BOOKS, 

Including  the  Departments  of  English,  Latin,  Greek,  French,  Span- 
ish, Italian,  Hebrew,  and  Syriac;  of  which  a  complete 

DESCRIPTIVE     CATALOGUE 
Witt  be  sent,  free  of  postage,  to  those  applying  for  it. 

A  single  copy  for  examination,  of  any  of  the  works  marked 
thus  *,  will  be  transmitted  by  mail,  postage  prepaid,  to  any  Teach- 
er remitting  one-half  of  its  price.  Any  of  the  others  will  be  sent 
by  mail,  postage  prepaid,  upon  receipt  of  full  retail  price. 


